Copyright: Copyright ® Corel Corp. 1996.
Citation: Copyright ® Corel Corp. 1996. All rights reserved.


How Do I
Contents

Click an icon or a title to find information.

How Do I  Step-by-step instructions for common tasks

Examples  Pictures of what you can do and how to do it

Search  Index of Help topics and features

Additional Help  Glossary and other information

Macros  Macro commands and syntax

Using Help  Hints on learning Help


Choose a Fit for Chart Data

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Formulas, Fit Info

Purpose

Use Fit Info to forecast trend lines, curves, and regression types, and to determine which fit type is best for your data. From trends, you can predict future values such as population growth, sales potential, and future costs. Use Formulas to apply the fit formulas to your data.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Select the row or column in the Datasheet to which you want to apply a formula, then choose Formulas from the Data menu.

3	Select one of the fit formulas:

Fit Exponential

Fit Linear

Fit Log

Fit Polynomial

Fit Power

4	Choose Fit Info to display information about how well each of the formulas best fits your data, then choose OK.

5	Specify an Order of Curve Fit and a Number to Forecast.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Display Statistics about Chart Data

Estimate Unknown Data Values

Use Formulas in the Datasheet


Sentence Corrections

Capitalize First Letter:  Automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence and the first letter of words preceded by four or more spaces.

Correct TWo IRregular CApitals:  Automatically converts two initial capital letters of a word to an initial capital letter and a lowercase second letter.

Double Space to Single Space:  Automatically eliminates double spaces between words in a sentence.


Insert Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Insert menu to include drawing objects, charts, bitmaps, QuickArt, text, files, and OLE links in your drawings or slide shows. The options on the Insert menu change, depending on the object you are creating or editing.

These are the Insert menu options for the drawing window:

Drawing Tools

Data Chart

Bullet Chart

Org Chart

Bitmap

QuickArt

Text Area

Text Line

Character

Date

Acquire Image

Select Image Source

File

Object

These are the Insert menu options for bitmaps:

Paint Tools

Text Area

Text Line

Paint Brush

Air Brush

Flood Fill

Pickup Color

Selective Replace

Eraser

Date

File

These are the Insert menu options for organization charts:

Import

Character

Date

See Also

Create Bitmaps

Create Organization Charts

Edit Menu

Open Documents


How to Select Objects

Click [image] from the tool palette, then click the object you want to activate, edit, or move.

Hold down Ctrl while clicking to select multiple objects, or drag an area to select all objects within that area.

Click a text object to select it for attributes or fonts, or double-click it, then drag to select the specific text you want.


 Hint

You can also click inside the Files list box and begin typing the first few letters of the filename. The Name Search text box appears below the files list box indicating the letters typed, and the Filename text box displays the currently selected filename.


Move Objects

Purpose

You can use the pointer or the space bar and arrow keys to position objects in the drawing window. The space bar and arrow keys are useful for "fine-tune" editing.

Steps

1	Select the object you want to move.

2	Place the pointer inside the object, then drag the object to a new location.

or

Place the pointer inside an object, hold down the space bar, then press an arrow key to move the object in the direction of the arrow.

See Also

Select in the Drawing Window


Create Drawn Objects

Insert, Drawing Tools

Purpose

Use the objects on the Drawing Tools submenu and the tool palette to create many different kinds of drawing objects in the drawing window. Drawn objects include lines, curves, filled objects, arrows, rectangles, circles, and so on.

Steps

1	Choose a fill color and pattern from the color and pattern palettes.

2	Click the desired tool on the tool palette.

or

Choose Insert, then choose the desired object from the Drawing Tools submenu.

3	Click or drag to create the object you choose.

See Also

Drawing Tools Menu

Edit Drawn Objects


 Hint

Stagger alternates the ticks up and down the X axis.

Ticks on Intervals determines how many ticks appear on the X axis. For example, specifying two will show every second tick.


Style

Cluster displays the bars representing each column as clustered groups.

Overlap displays the bars representing each column as overlapping groups.

Stacked displays the data in each column as a combined total, stacked from bottom to top.

Stacked 100% displays each piece of data in a column as a percentage of the whole column. The percentage figures are stacked to 100% for each column.


Use Special Effects in Bitmaps

Insert, Bitmap, Tools, Special Effects

Purpose

Use Special Effects to enhance bitmaps by applying one or more special effects.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Choose Special Effects from the Tools menu.

3	Choose from these special effects:

Blur

Brightness

Contrast

Emboss

Equalize

Mosaic

Rain

Saturation

Sharpen

Smooth

Spike Removal

Stereogram

Trace Contours

Wind

4	Select Full Image to apply the effect to the entire image, excluding the selected area.

or

Select Inside Area, then position the Preview Area on the section of the bitmap image you want to change.

or

Select Outside Area, then position the Preview Area on the section of the bitmap image you want to exclude from the change.

5	Choose Preview to view the effect before applying it to the bitmap image.

6	Choose OK.

7	Click outside the area to deselect it.

See Also

Choose Brush Attributes

Choose Colors


Blur

Blurs the borders between colors and objects. You can select low, medium, or high blurring.


Chart Type Menu

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Type

Purpose

Use the options on the Type submenu to choose different types of data charts.

Table

Pie

Bar

Line

Area

Surface

Scatter

High/Low

Radar

See Also

Create Data Charts

Edit Charts

Use the Chart Gallery


Tips for Creating Organization Charts

Before you begin to create your chart, read these suggestions for presenting your information effectively.

     	Avoid showing too much information on one chart; break a complex chart up into separate charts showing the details of a department.

     	Use a large-to-small box width to emphasize rank at different levels.

     	Use a top-to-bottom orientation for easy reading.

     	Start each box the same way, with either a position title or a person's name.

     	Use the same font throughout the chart.

See Also

Create Organization Charts


Estimate Unknown Data Values

These fit formulas connect your data with a line or curve:

Fit Exponential

Fit Linear

Fit Log

Fit Polynomial

Fit Power

By using them, you can estimate other data points along the line or curve. The closer the line or curve fits your data, the more accurate your estimations will be.

Before estimating these values, find the best fit for your data. If your data is inconsistent, try a fit polynomial formula.

This is useful for applications involving time. For example, you may have charted values reached at specific times but not at every time interval. From the fit line or curve you have charted, however, you can estimate values at each time interval.

See Also

Choose a Fit for Chart Data

Use Formulas in the Datasheet


None

Deletes a formula in a row but leaves the formula data


Mixed Chart

A chart that uses different series types. For example, you can use a bar chart with one series displayed as a line or area chart.


 Bezier Curve Tool

Use this drawing tool to draw Bezier curves.


Line Menu

Format, Line

Purpose

Use the options on the Line submenu to format lines of text.

Spacing

Center

Flush Right

See Also

Justify Text


Change the Order of Objects

Graphics, Order

Purpose

Use the options on the Order submenu to change the order of objects in the drawing window. Every object is like one sheet in a stack of transparencies, stacked in the order you created them with the most recent on top. The Order options move objects in the stack, changing their position in relation to other objects. When you move a range of objects, they retain their order in relation to each other.

Steps

To move objects in front of or behind all other objects,

1	Select the objects you want to move to the front or back.

2	Right-click and choose Front or Back from the QuickMenu.

To move objects one layer in the stack,

1	Select the objects you want to move one layer.

2	Choose Order from the Graphics menu, then choose Forward One or Backward One.

See Also

Align Objects


Align Objects

Graphics, Align

Purpose

Use Left, Right, Top, and Bottom on the Align submenu to align selected objects with the top, bottom, or sides of the drawing window. If one object is selected, it is aligned within the drawing window. If two or more objects are selected, they are aligned in relation to each other.

Steps

1	Select the object(s) you want to align.

2	Choose Align from the Graphics menu, then choose the border of the drawing window to which you want the objects to move.

See Also

Center Objects

Justify Text


 Hint

Some objects may be superimposed. If you do not want them to overlap, select and drag the objects to arrange them.


Options

Displays radar chart data on a linear or radial grid


QuickCorrect

Tools, QuickCorrect

Purpose

Use QuickCorrect to automatically replace your common spelling errors and mistyped words or to expand abbreviations.  You can also use QuickCorrect to match open and close quotes (called SmartQuotes) and to automatically correct sentence problems, such as initial double upper-case and double spacing between words.

Steps

1	Choose QuickCorrect from the Tools menu.

2	Type the incorrect spelling of a word you commonly misspell or mistype, or type an abbreviation that you want expanded in your document.

3	Type the correct spelling of the misspelled or mistyped word, or type the expanded word(s) of the abbreviation.

4	Choose Add Entry.

5	Continue adding words to the Replace and With fields.

6	Select an entry and choose Delete Entry to remove a replacement from the list.

7	Select Replace Words as you Type to let QuickCorrect replace misspelled or mistyped words as you enter text.

8	Choose Options, choose from the following options, then choose OK:

Sentence Corrections

End of Sentence Corrections

Single and Double SmartQuotes

9	Choose Close.

See Also

Spell Check Text


Object Exchange

Tools, Object Exchange

Purpose

Use the options on the Object Exchange submenu to receive data sent from another application (subscribe) or to send (publish) Object Exchange data from Presentations 3.0.  The OBEX Address Book contains information about people in your workgroup.  It lists the transport accounts through which they can receive your publications, and explains how to access those accounts.

Steps

To create an OBEX Address Book,

1	Choose Object Exchange from the Tools menu, then choose Address Book.

2	Choose New from the Names menu.

3	Type the name you want to address the subscriber when publishing.  (This could be the subscriber's network user name, initials, or simply a nickname).

4	Fill in the subscriber's first name, last name, and so on.

5	Choose Setup.

6	Select a transport type that both you and the subscriber share.

7	Type the subscriber's address information.  (The information required here depends on the type of transport you selected in step 6.)

8	Choose OK twice.

To publish data,

1	Choose Publish from the File menu.

2	Choose Address to compile a subscriber list.

3	Double-click names to add them to the subscriber list, then choose OK.

or

If you know the alias of the subscriber, bypass steps 2 and 3 by typing it under Subscribers.

4	Type a description (title) for the publication.

5	Add notes to the publication to serve as a cover letter for this issue.

6	Specify the number of publication versions your subscribers can store.

7	Choose Publish.

OBEX will poll your accounts as soon as you choose Publish.  If you are unable to poll immediately (for example, you are not attached to a network), you can postpone polling by deselecting the Poll on Publish check box.  Later, when you are ready to poll, choose Object Exchange from the Tools menu, then choose Poll Now.  Select the accounts/transports you wish to poll, then choose Start Poll to poll your accounts manually.

To publish a new version,

1	Choose Publish from the File menu.

2	Edit the subscriber list (if necessary).

3	Edit the publication notes (optional).

4	Choose Issue.

See Also

Mail Documents from Presentations 3.0


Print Help Topics

Purpose

You can print one or several Help topics.

Steps

To print a single Help topic,

1	Display the topic.

2	Choose the Print button at the top of the Help window.

or

Choose Print Topic from the File menu.

To print several topics,

1	Choose Print Topics from the File menu.

2	Choose from the following sequences of topics:

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents

3	Select the topics you want to print.

4	Choose Print.


Use Show Expert

File, New, Create a Slide Show Using Show Expert

Purpose

Use Show Expert to create a new slide show from a pre-designed outline.  Show Expert gives you advice and guidelines for creating several kinds of presentations.

Steps

1	Choose New from the File menu.

2	Select Create a Slide Show Using Show Expert, select the master and template you want to use, then choose OK.

3	Choose OK, then click the tabs to choose the type of presentation you want to make.

4	Select the specific presentation you want, then choose OK and Close.

5	Replace the guiding text in the outline with the text for your presentation.

6	Click [image], then add charts, figures, bitmaps, and other elements to each slide.

7	Choose Save As from the File menu, type a filename for the slide show, then choose Save.

Choose from the following types of presentations:

Informative

Persuasive

Teaching

Special Occasion

See Also

Create Slide Shows

Save Slide Shows


DDE Execute

DDE Execute is a Windows feature that enhances product integration by allowing applications to instruct each other to perform specific tasks (execute commands).  For example, using DDE Execute you can create macros in Presentations 3.0 that send commands to control other Windows applications.  In order for this to work, the other application must accept DDE Execute strings.  See the Presentations 3.0 Macros Help file for information on the DDEInitiate(), DDEExecute(), and DDETerminate() programming commands.  Also, see the documentation for the other Windows application.  The information you need includes the service (application) name, topic name, and list of commands it will accept through DDE Execute.

In addition, Windows applications can use DDE Execute to control Presentations 3.0.  The application must first initiate a DDE conversation using the service (application) name of "WPPresentations" and topic name of "Command".  Before terminating the conversation, the application can send DDE Execute strings made up of one or more Presentations 3.0 macro commands.  Note that Presentations 3.0 will accept only product commands, not programming commands.  These product commands may not contain variables or expressions.  See the Presentations 3.0 Macros Help file for a list of product commands and descriptions.

Windows applications can also send commands to Presentations 3.0 as a DDE Request item in order to receive a string representing the command's return value.  The application must send the DDE Execute string or DDE Request item in ANSI text format.  Presentations 3.0 will return the DDE Request result as an ANSI text string.  If either a DDE Execute string or a DDE Request item returns an error, the application can send a DDE Request on the item "LastCmdError" to find out what went wrong.  This item will return an ANSI text string containing a three-digit error code and a description of the error.

DDE Execute Application Names, Services, and Topics:

Application	Service, Topic
GroupWise	GroupWise, Command
InfoCentral	WPIC, RunMacro
Envoy	Envoy, System
Presentations	WPPresentations, Command
Quattro Pro	QPW, <full path and filename of open notebook>
WordPerfect	WPWin60_Macros, Commands
Envoy and InfoCentral act as servers for DDE Execute, but not clients. This means that you can use DDE Execute in products to send commands to Envoy and InfoCentral, but you cannot use DDE Execute in Envoy or InfoCentral to send commands to other products. For information about the DDE commands you can use with Envoy and InfoCentral, see the Software Developer's Kits that are available for these products.

See Also

Macros Online Help


Center Objects

Graphics, Align

Purpose

Use the Center options on the Align submenu to center objects horizontally and vertically in the drawing window or to arrange several objects horizontally and vertically in the selection area.

Steps

1	Select the objects you want to center.

2	Choose Align from the Graphics menu, then choose the type of centering you want.

See Also

Align Objects

Justify Text


Choose Brush Attributes

Insert, Bitmap, Format, Brush

Purpose

Use Brush Attributes to choose a brush size and shape for the paintbrush, air brush, eraser, and selective eraser.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Right-click the bitmap and choose Brush from the QuickMenu.

3	Choose a brush shape.

4	Specify a brush width.

5	Specify the air brush density.

6	Choose OK.

or

Choose a shape, width, and density from the power bar.

See Also

Erase in Bitmaps

Selective Replacing

Use the Air Brush

Use the Paint Brush


Display OLE Objects as Icons

Purpose

Use Change Icon to choose the graphic representing an OLE object in a drawing or slide.

Steps

1	Choose Object from the Insert menu.

or

Choose Paste Special from the Edit menu.

2	Choose Display As Icon, then choose Change Icon.

3	Specify the icon file and icon you want to use.

4	Type a label for the icon.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Create and Edit Embedded Objects

Create and Edit Linked Objects


Glossary

Purpose

Use the Glossary to find definitions for terms used in Presentations 3.0 Help.

Steps

1	Click the appropriate letter above.

2	Click the term you want.

A

active

.ALL file

alphanumeric

angle fill

ANSI

application

application icon

application window

arc

area chart

argument

ASCII

aspect ratio

attributes

automatic font change (AFC)

axes

axis label

B

back up

bar chart

base

baseline

baud

baud rate

bevel

bezier curve

.BIF file

BIOS

bitmap

bitmap image

blend (colors)

border

built-in font

bullet

bullet chart

button

byte

C

cache

card

cartridge fonts

cascade

cascading menu

CDROM

cell

cell format

center point

CGM

chart

check box

check mark

choose

circular arc

clear

click

client application

Clipboard

close

closed object

cluster

CMYK

codes

color palette

column

command

command button

complement

compressed file

constrain

Control menu

Control-menu box

conversion

coordinates

copy

correlation coefficient

crosshair pointer

CUA

current directory

cusp

D

data chart

data label

data series

Datasheet

DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) link

default

delay time

delimiter

deselect

desktop

dialog box

dialog box title bar

dimmed

directory

directory dialog box

display font

dither

document

document window

DOS

DOS prompt

double-click

double Y axes chart

DPI

drag

drawing tools

drawing window

driver

drop-down list

E

ellipse

ellipsis

elliptical arc

embed

EPS

expanded memory

export

extended memory

F

fade

fat bits

feature

figure

figure area

file

file extension

file format

filename

fill

fill color

fill gradient

fill method

fill pattern

fit

fit exponential

fit linear

fit log

fit polynomial

fit power

fixed-pitch font

folder icon

font

forecast

foreground color

format

frame (data chart)

frame (text, chart, bitmap, or figure)

function keys

G

gallery

gradient

gradient fill type

gray scale

grid

grid line

group box

H

handle

handout

headword

help prompt

help topic

hexadecimal

high/low chart

highlight

histogram

HLS

hue

I

icon

import

inactive

inactive window

incrementing button

.INI file

insertion point

interval value

J

jump term

K

kerning

keyboard layout

keyword

kilobyte (K)

L

label

label leader

label scale factor

landscape

landscape orientation

language code

leading

legend

.LEX file

lightness

linear

list box

list button

log (logarithm)

M

macro

main dictionary

marker

master

maximize button

megabyte (M)

memory

menu

menu bar

message box

MIDI

miter

mnemonics

modem

modifier keys

monospaced font

mouse button

mouse pointer

movement keys

MT32

multitasking

N

newspaper column

O

object

object linking and embedding (OLE)

open

option

organization chart

outline family

overlay

P

palette

parallel column

parallel interface

parallel printer

parameter

paste

path

pathname

pitch

pixel

point

point size

polygon

pop-up definition

pop-up list

port

portrait orientation

Power Bar

print queue

print wheel

printer definition

printer driver

program

proportionally spaced font

.PRS file

Q

QuickList

QuickMenu

R

radio button

rainbow

RAM

range

results row or column

RGB

ROM

root directory

route

row

ruler

S

saturation

scalable font

scale

screen font

scroll

scroll arrows

scroll bar

scroll box

select (options or commands)

select (text or objects)

selection insertion point

serial interface

serial printer

series

server application

shortcut key

shortcut keys

size

sizing handle

slide show

soft font

sort key

spooler

spreadsheet

spreadsheet import

spreadsheet link

standard deviation

startup options

Status Bar

submenu

supplementary dictionary

surface chart

syntax

T

table

template

temporary file

text box (dialog box)

text box (graphics)

text chart

text file

thumbnail sketch

tick

tile

title bar

toggle

Toolbar

Toolbar directional arrows

transition

typeface

U

No entries.

V

variable-pitch font

vector

vector image

vertical alignment

W

wildcard

window

wipe

workspace

.WPG file

wrap

WYSIWYG

X

x axis

Y

y axis

y1 and y2 axes

Z

zoom


Choose Colors

Format, Color Attributes

Purpose

Use Color Attributes to choose the Line, Fill, and Text colors for your objects, bitmap images, and text, and to define, retrieve, and save color palettes.

Steps

To select fill, line, and text colors,

1	Choose Color Attributes from the Format menu.

2	Select the Fill, Line, or Text option you want, then select a color for that option.

3	For bitmaps, select a Bitmap Transparent Color, then select Transparent Color On to allow the page background to replace that color when you bring the bitmap into the drawing window.

4	Choose OK.

To select colors using the tool palettes,

1	Click [image] to select colors for text and objects.

or

Click [image] to select line colors.

See Also

Choose Fills for Objects

Choose Line Attributes

Choose Text Attributes

Define Color Palettes

Make Bitmap Colors Transparent


Define Color Palettes

Format, Color Attributes, Define

Purpose

Use Define Color Palette to customize the colors for your drawings or slide shows.

Steps

1	Choose Color Attributes from the Format menu, then choose Define.

2	Select a color, choose the color model you want, then specify the new values.

or

Select the Selection Option you want to use and drag to select and edit a block of colors.

3	Choose Reset to restore the original colors.

4	Choose OK twice.

or

Choose OK, choose Save As, type a name for the palette, choose Save, then choose OK to save the customized color palette.

See Also

Copy and Paste Colors

Edit Color Blocks

Save and Retrieve Color Palettes

Use Color Models


End of Sentence Corrections

None:  Makes no changes to the ends of sentences

Single Space to Two Spaces:  Automatically inserts two spaces instead of one after a period

Two Spaces to Single Space:  Automatically inserts two spaces instead of one after a period


 Hint

The color appears in the Current Color box, on the color wheel, on the intensity bar, and in the Color palette.


 Hint

Choose Copy, select the new location, then choose Paste to move the selected color or colors to another spot on the palette.

Choose Blend, Complement, or Rainbow to change all the colors in the selected block at once.


Use Color Models

Format, Color Attributes, Define, Color Model

Purpose

Use Color Models to set the color mixture of a color in the palette. The available color models are RGB, HLS, and CMYK.

Steps

1	Choose Color Attributes from the Format menu, then choose Define.

2	Select the color you want to change.

3	Choose the Color Model you want to use.

4	Specify the new values for the color.

5	Choose Reset to restore the original colors.

6	Choose OK twice.

or

Choose Save As, type a name for the palette, choose Save, then choose OK to save the customized color palette.

See Also

Copy and Paste Colors

Edit Color Blocks

Save and Retrieve Color Palettes


 Text Area Tool

Use this tool to create multiple-line areas for entering text.  Click once to create an expandable text line from where you click to the right margin.


 Hint

Changes in color appear in the Current Color box, intensity bar, color palette, and color wheel.

You can also drag the black indicator on the intensity bar and color wheel to change the color.

If you define a color that may be difficult to duplicate later, record the numbers from the text boxes for future reference or save the color palette.


Edit Color Blocks

Format, Color Attributes, Define, Selection Options, Blend, Rainbow, Complement

Purpose

Use the Selection Options, Blend, Rainbow, and Complement to select and customize a block of colors in the color palette.

Steps

1	Choose Color Attributes from the Format menu, then choose Define.

2	Select Stream Mode.

or

Select Block Mode.

3	Highlight a block of colors.

4	Choose Blend, Rainbow or Complement.

or

Copy and paste colors to another place on the color palette.

5	Choose Reset to restore the original colors.

6	Choose OK twice.

or

Choose Save As, type a name for the palette, choose Save, then choose OK to save the customized color palette.

See Also

Copy and Paste Colors

Save and Retrieve Color Palettes

Use Color Models


Copy and Paste Colors

Format, Color Attributes, Define, Copy and Paste

Purpose

Use Copy and Paste to change locations of colors on the color palette. You can modify the copied color without changing the original color.

Steps

1	Choose Color Attributes from the Format menu, then choose Define.

2	Select Stream Mode or Block Mode, then click or drag to select the color(s) you want to customize.

3	Choose Copy to copy the colors to the Clipboard.

4	Select the cell(s) where you want to place the color(s), then choose Paste.

5	Customize your colors using Color Models and other options.

6	Choose Reset to restore the original colors.

7	Choose OK twice.

or

Choose Save As, type a name for the palette, choose Save, then choose OK to save the customized color palette.

See Also

Define Color Palettes

Edit Color Blocks

Save and Retrieve Color Palettes

Use Color Models


Single and Double SmartQuotes

Select Turn on SmartQuotes to use paired opening and closing quotes, then select the type of quotes you want.

Select Use Regular Quotes with Numbers to disable SmartQuotes when you type numbers (for example, 6'5" for six feet, five inches).


Save and Retrieve Color Palettes

Format, Color Attributes, Save and Retrieve

Purpose

Use Save and Retrieve in the Color Attributes dialog box to save color palettes you have customized and to retrieve color palettes for use.

Steps

To retrieve color palettes,

1	Choose Color Attributes from the Format menu, then choose Retrieve.

2	Specify the filename of the palette you want.

3	Choose OK twice.

To save color palettes,

1	Choose Color Attributes from the Format menu, then choose Define.

2	Define the colors you want to save in a new color palette, then choose OK.

3	Choose Save As, type a name for the palette, then choose Save.

See Also

Define Color Palettes


Play OLE Objects

Slide, OLE Play Settings

Purpose

Use OLE Play Settings to select actions for media clips (such as edit), or specify how and when a clip should play in a slide show.  Unless you specify a different action, media clips (objects with motion or sound such as video or sound clips), begin playing after the slide which they are linked to or embedded in is drawn on your screen. When the video clip finishes playing, the slide show resumes play.

Steps

1	Select the object.

2	Choose OLE Play Settings from the Slide menu.

3	Choose Media Clip Action to determine the action the media clip takes during a slide show (play, edit, and so on).

4	Choose Hide While Not Playing to hide the object until its time to play it. When finished playing, the object disappears again.

5	Choose Start Play When Click on Object to delay playing until you click on it.

or

Choose Start Play When Transition Ends, then specify an amount of time to delay playing after the transition.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Create and Edit Embedded Objects

Create and Edit Linked Objects

Play Slide Shows


Choose Line Spacing

Format, Line, Spacing

Purpose

Use Line Spacing to set the amount of white space between lines of text.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Spacing.

3	Specify the line spacing you want, then choose OK.

See Also

Choose Fonts

Justify Text


Blend Objects

Graphics, Blend

Purpose

Use Blend to combine the shapes, sizes, and colors of two objects.

Steps

1	Draw the two objects you want to blend.

2	Select both of the objects.

3	Choose Blend from the Graphics menu.

4	Specify the number of steps you want between the objects.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Colors

Drawing Tools Menu


Change Bitmaps into Objects

Tools, Trace Bitmap

Purpose

Use Trace Bitmap to convert a bitmap into a vector image. Vector images print more clearly than bitmap images.

      	When a bitmap is traced, it becomes a figure and you cannot edit it as a bitmap. Therefore, you may want to save your bitmap before you trace it. You can return it to a bitmap by saving it in a bitmap format.

Steps

1	Insert or create the bitmap image you want to convert into a vector image and select it in the drawing window.

2	Right-click a bitmap and choose Trace Bitmap from the QuickMenu.

See Also

Create Bitmaps

Group Objects

Insert Files

Save Documents as Bitmaps


Constrain while Drawing

You can constrain objects by pressing the Shift key as you draw. This restricts how objects are drawn, as shown in the following table:

Object	Result
Bezier	Places points at horizontal, vertical, and 45-degree angles
Curve	Places points at horizontal, vertical, and 45-degree angles
Closed Curve	Places points at horizontal, vertical, and 45-degree angles
Ellipse	Creates a circle
Elliptical Arc	Creates a circular arc
Line	Places points at horizontal, vertical, and 45-degree angles
Polygon	Places points at horizontal, vertical, and 45-degree angles
Rectangle	Creates a square
Rounded Rectangle	Creates a rounded square

See Also

Drawing Tools Menu


 Text Line Tool

Use this tool to define one line for text.


 Hint

Presentations 3.0 converts the bitmap into a series of objects with editing points around each object. To move, copy, size, or rotate the parts of the former bitmap as a single object, choose Group from the Arrange menu.

To deselect the objects, click anywhere outside the objects in the drawing window.


Change Charts into Objects

Graphics, Separate

Purpose

Use Separate to convert a chart into a series of vector images.

      	When you explode a chart, it becomes a figure and you can no longer edit the data. Therefore, you may want to save the original chart before you explode it.

Steps

1	Import or create the chart you want to convert into an object, then select it in the drawing window.

2	Choose Separate from the Graphics menu.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Menu

Group Objects

Separate Pie Slices


Create Cusps

Insert, Drawing Tools, Bezier

Purpose

 Use Bezier to create cusps. Cusps (pointed corners) connect curved segments that meet at different angles. You can create a cusp to abruptly change direction at the end of a curve. You can create a cusp as you draw or later when you edit.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Place the pointer where you want the curve to begin, then drag to size the direction line.

4	Release the mouse button, then move the pointer to size and curve the segment.

5	Press and hold down the Alt key at the point where you want to change direction, then drag in the direction you want the next curve.

6	Release the mouse button and the Alt key at the same time, then move the pointer to size and curve the next segment.

7	Click to end the segment and continue to the next segment.

or

Double-click to end the bezier curve.

See Also

Draw Bezier Curves

Edit Bezier Curves


 Circle Tool

Use this tool to draw circles.


 Hint

The exploded chart reappears as a series of vector objects with editing points around each object. To move, copy, size, or rotate the parts of the former chart as a single object, choose Group from the Graphics menu.

To deselect the objects, click anywhere outside the objects in the drawing window.


Contour Text

Graphics, Contour Text

Purpose

Use Contour Text to place text along the borders of drawn objects and along lines. Contour Text does not work with bitmaps, charts, or figures.

Steps

1	Select a drawn object and a text object.

2	Choose Contour Text from the Graphics menu.

3	Choose a position for the contoured text in relation to the object.

4	Deselect Display Text Only to keep the object on screen.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Text Attributes

Drawing Tools Menu

Straighten Contoured Text


 Hint

The text wraps around the outline of the drawing object. If the text is too long to fit the object, straighten the text, resize the object, then contour the text again.

Select the contoured text and drag to position it.


Straighten Contoured Text

Graphics, Separate

Purpose

Use Separate to return contoured text to straight lines and restore the drawing object it was contoured around.

Steps

1	Select the contoured text you want to straighten.

2	Choose Separate from the Graphics menu.

See Also

Choose Text Attributes

Contour Text


Choose Fills for Objects

Format, Fill Attributes

Purpose

Use Fill Attributes to select fill colors, gradients, and patterns for closed objects and bitmaps.

Steps

To choose fills for objects,

1	Choose Fill Attributes from the Format menu to apply new attributes to all new objects.

or

Right-click an object, then choose Attributes from the QuickMenu to apply new attributes to that object.

2	Choose an Apply To option to apply the attributes to graphics, text, or both.

3	Select a Fill Type.

4	Select the gradient or pattern options you want.

5	Choose OK.

or

Choose Line, set line attributes, then choose OK.

To choose fill patterns,

1	Select Pattern as the Fill Type.

2	Choose a fill pattern.

3	Select a Foreground and a Background Color.

4	Choose a Fill Method and Transparency option.

5	Choose OK.

To choose gradient fills,

1	Select Gradient as the Fill Type.

2	Select a Center Color and an Outer Color.

3	Choose a Fill Method and Type, then specify the Angle the colors will slant on.

4	Specify the X and Y offset percentages to position the center of the gradient.

5	Select Auto-Step Blending or specify the amount of Fixed Blending you want.

6	Choose OK.

To choose fills using the tool palette,

1	Click [image] to select pattern and gradient fills.

2	Click [image] to select colors.

See Also

Choose Colors

Choose Line Attributes

Choose Shadow Attributes

Choose Text Attributes

Invert Colors


 Hint

Pattern fills objects with a solid color or pattern.

Gradient fills objects with a blend of two colors.

None disables Fill and draws objects as outlines only.


Make Objects and Text 3-D

Graphics, Quick3-D

Purpose

Use Quick3-D to give objects and text a three-dimensional appearance.

Steps

1	Select the object you want to appear three-dimensional.

2	Choose Quick3-D from the Graphics menu.

3	Specify the amount of rotation you want around each axis, or select a pre-defined rotation.

4	Choose a perspective option and specify the depth.

5	Adjust the color.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Perspective Options

Drawing Tools Menu

Shape Objects and Text

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


 Regular Polygon Tool

Use this tool to draw regular polygons such as triangles, hexagons, and so on.


 Circular Arc Tool

Use this tool to draw circular arcs.


Edit Bézier Curves
Edit Bezier Curves

Select a Bezier curve, Edit, Edit Points

Purpose

Once you draw a Bézier curve, use Edit Points to edit the points and modify the control handles.

Steps

1	Select, then double-click the bezier curve you want to edit.

2	Drag one of the control handles to adjust the curve.

3	Click outside the curve to deselect it.

See Also

Create Cusps

Draw Bezier Curves


Choose Line Attributes

Format, Line Attributes

Purpose

Use Line Attributes to choose the style, pattern, color, and width of the foreground or background lines on your objects.

Steps

To select line attributes,

1	Choose Line Attributes from the Format menu to apply attributes to all new lines.

or

Right-click a line or curve and choose Attributes from the QuickMenu to apply new attributes to that line.

2	Choose an Apply To option to apply the attributes to graphics, text, or both.

3	Select No Line if you want no lines to appear.

4	Select a Foreground and a Background color.

5	Specify the line width, or click the icon to the right and select a pre-defined line width.

6	Choose the pattern and style you want to use.

7	Choose a Joins option to determine angle appearance.

8	Choose an Ends option to determine line end appearance.

9	Choose an Arrowhead option.

10	Choose OK.

or

Choose Fill, set fill attributes, then choose OK.

To select line colors and patterns using the tool palettes,

1	Click [image] to select colors for lines.

2	Click [image] to select line styles.

See Also

Choose Colors

Choose Fills for Objects

Choose Shadow Attributes

Choose Text Attributes


Examples

Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


 Hint

Flat ends stop at line handles, and the line does not get longer as it thickens. Round and Square ends stretch beyond the handles and allow the line to lengthen as it thickens.


Save Selected Objects

File, Save As

Purpose

Use Save As to save selected objects independently of the drawing or slide show they appear in. Unless you choose a different format, they are saved as .shw or .wpg files.

Steps

1	Select the object(s) you want to save.

2	Choose Save As from the File menu.

3	Select Selected Items, then choose OK.

4	Type a filename, select a format, then choose Save.

See Also

Save Documents

Save Documents as Bitmaps

Save Gallery Figures As .WPG Files


Additional Help

Keystrokes  Keyboard navigation

Glossary  Terms and definitions

Print Topics  Print multiple Help topics

Available Products


Graphics Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Graphics menu to position and manipulate graphics and text.

Order

Flip

Align

Space Evenly

Combine

Group

Separate

Contour Text

Blend

Trace Bitmap

Text to Curves

Quick3-D

QuickWarp

See Also

Drawing Tools Menu

Tools Menu

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Informative Presentations

Use informative presentations to tell your listeners about alternatives, new ideas, or results.  These are the types of informative presentations Show Expert includes:

     	Describe Alternatives:  Tells listeners about two or more options they may choose from.

     	Present Idea(s):  Tells listeners about one or more ideas that may be new to them.

     	Report Results:  Tells listeners about results achieved or progress made.

Each section of the outline serves a different purpose.  Here are several suggestions for writing an effective informative presentation:

     	Greeting and Preview:  Briefly state the topic you are presenting and introduce yourself if the audience does not know you.  Build your credibility by citing personal involvement, experience, or training relative to the topic.  Sound confident, not boastful.

For example:  "I've spent a lot of time studying this idea and I think I have a good idea of what it means to us."

     	Purpose and Importance:  State the purpose of your presentation.  What do you want your listeners to know or do after hearing your presentation?  Listeners always ask "What's in it for me?"  To gain and hold their attention, tell them how your presentation can benefit them.

For example:  "Here's how our sales results compare to Company X's.  With these tips on selling techniques, we'll be able to improve our performance significantly."

     	Main Points:  Tell what main points you will cover in the presentation.  Try to keep between two and five main points per presentation.  If you present more than five, your presentation may be too complex for your listeners to follow.  Combine main points to limit their number.

     	Support:  Restate each main point and provide supporting information.  This information may include data, charts, examples, illustrations, stories, pictures, video clips, and quotations.  Each main point should have at least one form of supporting data.

Criteria for Comparison:  Explain the criteria you will use for comparing alternatives.  Try to keep between two and five bases for comparison.  If you present more than five, your presentation may be too complex for your listeners to follow.  Combine criteria to limit their number.

     	Pro and Con Comparisons:  Compare each alternative, describing its advantages and disadvantages.  Use supporting material such as data, charts, examples, illustrations, stories, pictures, video clips, or quotations for each comparison.  Remember that your purpose is to get the listeners to select from the alternatives you present.  Use a Question and Answer session to clarify any obscure points and then reach a decision.

     	Summary:  Summarize each of your main points and call for action.  Remind listeners why this information is important and useful to them.  Encourage them to act on what they have learned, and to contact you for additional details.

Persuasive Presentations

Special Occasion Presentations

Teaching Presentations

Use Show Expert


Persuasive Presentations

Use persuasive presentations to prepare listeners to purchase a product or service, or to understand how or why a change is necessary.  Your listeners will probably fall into four categories:  doubting, negative, neutral, and positive.  Tailor your presentation to your listeners' attitudes for best results.

Each section of the outline serves a different purpose.  Here are several suggestions for writing an effective persuasive presentation:

     	Title:  Give the name of the presentation in an interesting, informative title.  It should let the audience know quickly and clearly what subject you will address.  Quickly mention your credentials and experience to address the subject.

     	Objective:  State the objective of the presentation and the steps your listeners should take in one clear, concise sentence.  State the objective in a manner that all listeners can agree with, no matter how they feel about the solution.

     	Present Situation:  List the existing problems and needs.  State the most commonly accepted problems first and leave the most controversial issues for last.  Use graphs, charts, case studies, surveys, and other hard data to give added credibility and support to every need.  Use words or slides to expand on the problems or needs and their effects on the listeners.

     	Solution:  Propose a solution to the problems you pointed out.  Relate the features of the solution to the benefits the listeners will gain by accepting your offer.  Features are inherent in the product, service, or idea being proposed.  Benefits are what those features will mean to the listeners.  Help the listeners realize the impact the benefits will have on them if they accept your solution and how it will work when they implement it.  During this process answer all known objections before the listeners raise them.

For example:  "One feature of the X100 is its automatic feeder.  The benefits to you are lower labor costs, increased margins, and the elimination of a boring, high-turnover job."

     	Cost/Benefit Analysis:  Minimize the cost of your solution and offset it with the benefits you developed.  Any successful offer must show that staying with the existing situation is more costly than accepting the new proposal.  Talk in terms of savings--not price or costs.  The secret is to make your listeners well aware of their needs and how well your solution takes care of them.

     	Cost of Rejecting the Solution:  Point out and explain what will happen if no action is taken.  This is especially important with negative audiences.

Summary:  As you finish your presentation, summarize the important benefits and restate the savings your listeners will enjoy when they accept your offer.

     	Action:  Tell the listeners what steps are required to implement the proposal.  Once this is done, open the presentation for questions to get a feeling of what stumbling blocks might still exist.

See Also

Informative Presentations

Special Occasion Presentations

Teaching Presentations

Use Show Expert


Teaching Presentations

Use teaching presentations to explain a concept, idea, or approach, or to teach your listeners a new skill.  Teaching skills involves preparing the listener to learn, setting the skill patterns in his or her mind, helping him or her perform and practice the skill, and reviewing his or her performance.

Each section of the outline serves a different purpose.  Here are several suggestions for writing an effective explanation presentation:

     	Greeting and Preview:  Briefly state the topic you are presenting and introduce yourself if the audience does not know you.  Build your credibility by citing personal involvement, experience, or training relative to the topic.  Sound confident, not boastful.

For example:  "I've spent a lot of time studying this idea and I think I have a good idea of what it means to us."

     	Purpose and Importance:  State the purpose of your presentation.  What do you want your listeners to know or do after hearing your presentation?  Listeners always ask "What's in it for me?"  To gain and hold their attention, tell them how your presentation can benefit them.

For example:  "Here's how our sales results compare to Company X's.  With these tips on selling techniques, we'll be able to improve our performance significantly."

     	Main Points:  Tell what main points you will cover in the presentation.  Try to keep between two and five main points per presentation.  If you present more than five, your presentation may be too complex for your listeners to follow.  Combine main points to limit their number.

     	Support:  Restate each main point and provide supporting information.  This information may include data, charts, examples, illustrations, stories, pictures, video clips, and quotations.  Each main point should have at least one form of supporting data.

     	Summary:  Summarize each of your main points and call for action.  Remind listeners why this information is important and useful to them.  Encourage them to act on what they have learned, and to contact you for additional details.

Here are several suggestions for writing an effective teaching presentation:

     	Teach a Skill:  Give the name of the presentation in an interesting, informative title.  It should let the audience know quickly and clearly what skill you will teach them.

     	Prepare the Learner:  Often listeners miss the point you are trying to teach them.  Use this section to preview the skill and teach the listeners the importance of learning the skill.  Present the name of the skill under Point A, then review all the purposes and reasons for learning the skill under Point B.

     	Review the Materials:  List and explain all the materials the listeners need to perform the skill.  If the materials are complex, include a picture or diagram.

     	Review the Skill Pattern:  Teach the listeners how to perform the skill.  Analyze the steps of the skill, then list them in sequential order and allow the slides to lead you through the steps as you teach.

     	Practice the Skill:  It is important that the listeners perform the skill according to the sequential steps.  Point A is a simple reminder for the learner that he or she should follow the steps in this practice session.  Point B is the sequential list of steps, reproduced for quick reference while practicing.

     	Final Check:  Review how effectively the listeners have acquired the skill.  List the acceptable standard of skill performance.  Determine this level and explain it to the listeners.

For example:  "Skill performance is acceptable when you can perform the skill once without error in one hour."

See Also

Informative Presentations

Persuasive Presentations

Special Occasion Presentations

Use Show Expert


Use Coaches in Presentations 3.0

Help, Coaches

Purpose

Coaches are short, animated tutorials that give you step-by-step instructions on many useful tasks in Presentations 3.0. If you prefer, a Coach will apply a feature for you.

Steps

1	Choose Coaches from the Help menu.

2	Select the task you want to perform.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Using Help


Special Occasion Presentations

Use special occasion presentations to present awards or tributes, to welcome an audience, and to introduce a speaker.

Each section of the outline serves a different purpose.  Here are several suggestions for writing an effective welcome and introduction:

     	Welcome and/or Introduce:  Briefly welcome the audience, guests, speaker, and other attendees.  Introduce yourself if necessary, and briefly mention the theme or purpose of the meeting.

     	Review the Nature of the Occasion:  Tell the listeners what the meeting is for, and why they are attending.

Welcome the Audience:  Welcome the listeners to the meeting and review pertinent facts they need to know about each other.

     	Introduce the Speaker:  Tell the listeners who the speaker is, and summarize his or her qualifications, accomplishments, and background if necessary.

     	Conclude:  Keep your remarks short and to the point, and provide a smooth transition into the meeting.

Each section of the outline serves a different purpose.  Here are several suggestions for writing an effective tribute or award presentation:

     	Present an Award/Tribute:  Briefly state the purpose of the presentation and the people or organizations involved.

     	Review the Award:  Tell the listeners the name of the award, its significance, and the requirements for achieving it.

     	Review the Accomplishments of the Award Recipient:  Briefly introduce the winner, then list his or her accomplishments, credentials, and qualifications for winning the award.

     	Present the Award:  Use a picture or other appropriate slide while you present the award.

     	Conclude:  Repeat the names of the award and the recipient.  Provide a transition into presenting the next award if necessary.

See Also

Informative Presentations

Persuasive Presentations

Teaching Presentations

Use Show Expert


Group Objects

Graphics, Group

Purpose

Use Group to allow two or more objects to retain their original arrangement and proportions to each other when you move, size, rotate, or stretch them.

Steps

1	Select each object that will be in the group.

2	Right-click and choose Group from the QuickMenu.

See Also

Combine Objects

Separate Objects


 Hint

For example, by grouping all of the objects that comprise a house--chimney, windows, roof, and so on--you can move the house as one object.


 Hint

Grouped objects are treated as one object as you are editing, but the individual objects retain their original attributes.

Combined objects are also treated as one object, but the new objects take on the attributes of the first object.


Examples

Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Combine Objects

Graphics, Combine

Purpose

Use Combine to create a single figure from two or more drawing objects. The fill colors and patterns of the bottom object are assigned to the combined object, and overlapping areas become transparent.

Steps

1	Select the objects you want to combine.

2	Choose Combine from the Graphics menu.

See Also

Group Objects

Separate Objects


 Hint

For example, you could draw a small rectangle in the center of a large rectangle to create a picture frame.

You cannot combine bitmaps, text, or charts.


Separate Objects

Graphics, Separate

Purpose

Use Separate to return a combined or grouped object to the original objects and to restore their original colors and patterns. You can also use Separate to straighten contoured text and to edit parts of figures.

Steps

1	Select the object you want to separate into individual objects.

2	Right-click and choose Separate from the QuickMenu.

See Also

Combine Objects

Group Objects


Flip Objects

Graphics, Flip

Purpose

Use the options on the Flip submenu to mirror objects left/right or top/bottom.

Steps

1	Select the object(s) you want to flip.

2	Choose Flip from the Graphics menu.

3	Choose Left/Right or Top/Bottom.

See Also

Rotate Objects


 Hint

The object is flipped from its center point and mirrored from the left to right or top to bottom. Choose the same Flip option again to restore the object to its original position.

Pressing Ctrl while choosing Flip creates a duplicate of the object and flips it, leaving the original unchanged.


Stereogram

Converts the bitmap image into a black and white stereogram. A stereogram is a seemingly random pattern that reveals three-dimensional images as you concentrate on it.


In-place Editing vs. Open Editing

There are two methods for editing OLE objects:

In-place Editing:  Allows you to edit an object without switching to a different window. The client application adopts the functions of the server application. Buttons and pulldown menus temporarily change to work specifically with that object. Using the substitute menu items, you can modify the embedded object just as if you were in the server application. When you finish editing the object, you simply click outside the object to restore the client applications original menus.

The advantage of in-place editing is the ability it gives you to interact with an object right where it is, without switching to a different application or window.

To edit an object in-place, double click it.

Open Editing:  Lets you launch the object's server application in another window where you can edit the object as desired. When you exit the server application, the object returns to your document with any changes you made to it.

One advantage of open editing is the amount of workspace the new window provides you. This is particularly useful when you are working with small or complex objects. It also allows you to save your drawing as a .wpg file directly from WordPerfect Draw.

To edit an object in open mode, press Alt while double-clicking it.

See Also

Create and Edit Embedded Objects


Choose Shadow Attributes

Format, Shadow Attributes

Purpose

Use Shadow Attributes to create and change shadow characteristics for objects.

Steps

1	Choose Shadow Attributes from the Format menu to apply shadow attributes to all new objects.

or

Right-click an object and choose Shadow from the QuickMenu to apply new attributes to that object.

2	Select Shadow On.

3	Select Transparency On to change the shadow's density.

4	Select a shadow color.

5	Specify the X and Y Offset values.

or

Use the scroll bars to move the shadow around the object.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Colors

Choose Fills for Objects

Choose Line Attributes


Space Objects Evenly

Graphics, Space Evenly

Purpose

Use the options on the Space Evenly submenu to space three or more objects equally in relation to each other.

Steps

1	Select the objects that you want to space.

2	Choose Space Evenly from the Graphics menu, then choose Left/Right for horizontal spacing.

or

Choose Top/Bottom for vertical spacing.

See Also

Align Objects

Center Objects


 Hint

The objects are proportionally spaced. Space Evenly does not move overlapping objects apart. If any objects overlapped before, all objects will overlap by the same amount.

Click once outside the objects to deselect them.


Choose Text Attributes

Format, Text Attributes

Purpose

Use Text Attributes to choose the fill colors, gradients, patterns, and outlines of text.

Steps

To choose fill and outline attributes,

1	Choose Text Attributes from the Format menu to apply attributes to all new text.

or

Right-click a text area and choose Attributes from the QuickMenu to apply new attributes to selected text.

2	Select a fill type.

3	Select an outline color.

or

Select Outline Off.

4	Specify the line width, or click the icon to the right and select a pre-defined line width.

To choose patterns for text,

1	Select Pattern.

2	Choose a pattern.

3	Select a Foreground Color and a Background Color.

4	Choose OK.

To choose a gradient fill for text,

1	Select Gradient.

2	Select a Center Color and an Outer Color.

3	Choose a Type, then specify the Angle on which the colors will slant.

4	Specify the X and Y offset percentages to position the center of the gradient.

5	Select Auto Step Blending, or specify the amount of Fixed Blending you want.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Colors

Choose Fonts

Choose Line Attributes

Choose Shadow Attributes


Examples

Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


 Hint

Pattern fills letters with a solid color or pattern.

Gradient fills letters with a blend of two colors.

None disables Fill, and text appears as outlines only.


Add Background

Slide, Edit Backgrounds, Background, Add Background

Purpose

Use Add Background to create and add a new background to the current master.

Steps

1	Choose Edit Backgrounds from the Slide menu.

2	Choose Add Background from the Background menu.

3	Type a name for the new background, then choose OK.

4	Create your background by adding page colors, objects, text, and whatever elements you want.

5	Choose Save As from the File menu to save the master (.mst) file with the added background, specify the master you want, then choose Save.

6	Choose Edit Slides from the Background menu.

See Also

Add Layout

Delete Backgrounds

Name Backgrounds

Use the Master Gallery


Image Settings Menu

Format, Image Settings

Purpose

Use the options on the Image Settings submenu to change the color and outlines of selected objects.

Outline

Silhouette

Black and White

Invert

See Also

Adjust for Printing

Display in Draft Mode


Page Menu

Format, Page

Purpose

Use the options on the Page submenu to choose the paper size, margins, and page color for the current document.

Size/Margins

Color

See Also

Choose Colors

Zoom


Format Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Format menu to choose text and page formatting, and to choose attributes for objects. The options on the Format menu change depending on the object you are creating or editing.

These are the Format menu options for the drawing window:

Font

Define Bullets/Fonts

Line

Paragraph

Page

Justification

Manual Kerning

Color Attributes

Line Attributes

Fill Attributes

Text Attributes

Shadow Attributes

Image Settings

Get Attributes

Apply Attributes

These are the Format menu options for bitmaps:

Font

Line

Paragraph

Justification

Manual Kerning

Color Attributes

Line Attributes

Fill Attributes

Text Attributes

Brush

These are the Format menu options for charts:

Font

Line Attributes

Fill Attributes

Text Attributes

Box Attributes

This is the Format menu option for organization charts:

Font

See Also

Create Bitmaps

Create Bullet Charts

Create Data Charts

Create Organization Charts

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Change Objects to Outlines

Format, Image Settings, Outline

Purpose

Use Outline to change the fill color of one or more objects to the page color, leaving an outline. If an object has no border or outline, it will be invisible after using Outline. However, the parts of the invisible object that overlap other objects will be visible against them.

Steps

1	Select the object(s) you want to convert to an outline.

2	Choose Image Settings from the Format menu, then choose Outline.

See Also

Change Objects to Black and White

Change Objects to Silhouettes

Display in Draft Mode

Invert Colors


Examples

Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Change Angles to Bézier Curves
Change Angles to Bezier Curves

Edit, select a Line or Curve, Edit Points

Purpose

If you draw a line or curve with the Line or Curve drawing tools, use Edit Points to change the angles or curves of the lines to bezier curves.

Steps

1	Draw a line with several angles using the Line drawing tool.

2	Select, then double-click the line you want to edit.

3	Select the point you want to edit, right-click, then choose To Curve to create a bezier curve.

4	Drag the control handles to adjust the direction and depth of the curve.

5	Click outside the line to deselect it.

See Also

Draw Bezier Curves

Edit Bezier Curves


Change Objects to Silhouettes

Format, Image Settings, Silhouette

Purpose

Use Silhouette to change the color of figures, drawing objects, and text to black.

Steps

1	Select the object(s) you want to see as a silhouette.

2	Choose Image Settings from the Format menu, then choose Silhouette.

See Also

Change Objects to Black and White

Change Objects to Outlines

Invert Colors


Change Objects to Black and White

Format, Image Settings, Black and White

Purpose

Use Black and White to take the fill color out of bitmaps, figures, drawing objects, and text and to make the outline black and the interior white. If an object has a black fill, it remains black.

Steps

1	Select the object(s) you want to change to black and white.

2	Choose Image Settings from the Format menu, then choose Black and White.

See Also

Change Object to Outlines

Change Objects to Silhouettes

Invert Colors


Invert Colors

Format, Image Settings,  Invert

Purpose

Use Invert to change the colors of bitmaps, drawing objects, figures, and text to their complements.

Steps

1	Select the object(s) whose colors you want to invert.

2	Choose Image Settings from the Format menu, then choose Invert.

See Also

Change Objects to Black and White

Change Objects to Outlines

Change Objects to Silhouettes


Transferring Attributes

Format, Get Attributes and Apply Attributes

Purpose

Use Get Attributes and Apply Attributes to copy the attributes from objects or text and apply them to other objects or text.

Steps

1	Select the object or text with the attributes you want to transfer.

2	Choose Get Attributes from the Format menu.

3	Select Graphics Only to transfer attributes from an object, Text Only to transfer attributes from text, or Graphics and Text to transfer attributes from both, then choose OK.

4	Select the object or text that will receive the attributes.

5	Choose Apply Attributes from the Format menu.

See Also

Choose Colors

Choose Fills for Objects

Choose Line Attributes

Choose Shadow Attributes

Choose Text Attributes


Brightness

Lightens or darkens the image. You can specify a brightness percentage. Low percentages result in dark areas, while high percentages result in light areas.


Erase Areas in Bitmaps

Insert, Bitmap, Edit, Erase

Purpose

Use Erase to delete a selected area in a bitmap.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Click [image].

3	Drag to select the bitmap area you want to erase, right-click then choose Erase from the QuickMenu.

See Also

Edit Bitmaps

Erase in Bitmaps

Select Areas in Bitmaps

Undo Changes


Select Areas in Bitmaps

Insert, Bitmap, Edit, Select Area

Purpose

Use Select Area to define the area of the bitmap you want to cut, copy, erase, move, duplicate, paste, or apply special effects to. When you select an area of the bitmap, all pixels inside that area are selected. A selected area appears as a dashed rectangle.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Click [image].

3	Drag the pointer to designate the area you want to select.

See Also

Cut, Copy, and Paste Objects and Text

Erase Areas in Bitmaps

Use Special Effects in Bitmaps


Edit Bitmaps

Edit, Edit Bitmap

Purpose

Use Edit Bitmap to activate an existing bitmap so you can edit it pixel by pixel. You can rotate, skew, and stretch bitmaps like other drawing objects while in the drawing window.

Steps

1	Select, then double-click the bitmap you want to edit.

2	Edit the bitmap using the bitmap tool palette and menu options.

3	When you finish editing the bitmap, choose Return from the File menu.

See Also

Create Bitmaps


Edit Charts

Edit, Edit Chart

Purpose

Use Edit Chart to activate an existing chart so you can edit it.

Steps

1	Select, then double-click the chart you want to edit.

2	Double-click parts of the chart to edit them or change the data.

3	When you finish editing the chart, click outside it.

See Also

Enter Data in the Datasheet


Edit Layouts

Slide, Edit Layouts

Purpose

Use Edit Layouts to add, delete, name, and assign backgrounds to layouts.

Steps

1	Choose Master Gallery from the Slide menu.

2	Select the master containing the layout you want to edit, then choose Retrieve.

3	Choose Edit Layouts from the Slide menu.

4	Select the layout you want to edit from the Layout list on the Power Bar.

5	Edit the layout by adding text, drawn objects, bitmaps, charts, and whatever elements you want.

6	Choose Save As from the File menu, specify the master (.mst) file you want to save with the edited layout, then choose Save.

7	Choose Edit Slides from the Power Bar.

See Also

Layout Menu

Use the Master Gallery


Examples

Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Edit Figures

Edit, Edit Figure

Purpose

Use Edit Figure to activate a figure so you can edit it.

Steps

1	Select, then double-click the figure you want to edit.

2	Select and modify any part of the figure using the drawing tool palette and menu options.

3	When you finish editing the figure, click outside it.

See Also

Edit Objects

Use the QuickArt Gallery


Edit Text

Edit, Edit Text

Purpose

Use Edit Text to activate text so you can edit it.

      	Text created in bitmaps can be edited only as painted letters, not as text.

Steps

1	Select, then double-click the text you want to edit.

2	Position the insertion point in the text by clicking the mouse, or using the following movement keys:

Position	Keystroke
Left one character	Left Arrow
Right one character	Right Arrow
Up one line	Up Arrow
Down one line	Down Arrow
Left one word	Word Left (Ctrl+ Left Arrow)
Right one word	Word Right (Ctrl+Right Arrow)
Beginning of Line	Home
End of Line	End
Beginning of text	PgUp
End of text	PgDn
Before all codes	Ctrl+Home
After all codes	Ctrl+End
3	Use these editing keys to change text:

Keys	Action
Backspace	Deletes character to the left of the insertion point
Delete (Del)	Deletes character to the right of the insertion point
Insert (Ins)	Toggles between Insert Mode and Typeover Mode
4	When you finish editing the text, click outside it.

See Also

Reveal Codes

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Edit Drawn Objects
Edit Objects

Edit, Edit Points

Purpose

Use Edit Points to change the shape and size of drawn objects by moving editing handles. Drawn objects include lines, curves, filled objects, arrows, rectangles, circles, and so on.

Steps

1	Select, then double-click the object you want to edit.

2	Select an editing handle and drag it to a new position.

3	Select an editing handle, right-click, then choose the editing options you want from the QuickMenu:

Add

Open

Delete

Close

To Curve

To Line

Symmetrical

Smooth

4	Click outside the object to deselect it.

See Also

Create Drawn Objects

Drawing Tools Menu


 Hint

To select multiple handles, press Ctrl while you click the handles you want to select.

To create wedges, drag the editing handle of a circle or ellipse while keeping the mouse pointer inside the circle or ellipse.


Add

Inserts a new point between the selected handle and the next handle


Delete

Removes the selected handle


Open

Removes the segment between the selected point and the next point drawn to create an open object


Close

Completes the outline of an object by connecting the first and last handle of an object's outline. When an outline is closed, the object can be filled with a color or pattern


To Curve

Creates a bezier curve at the selected handle


To Line

Replaces the curve with straight lines


Smooth

Softens a bezier curve


Symmetric

Evens the length of the direction lines on a bezier curve


Contrast

Increases or decreases the contrast between colors and backgrounds. You can specify a contrast percentage. High percentages result in high contrast; low percentages result in low contrast.


Cancel Changes

Insert, Bitmap, File, Cancel

Purpose

Use Cancel to close an active bitmap without saving changes.

Steps

1	Choose Cancel from the File menu after making changes to an active bitmap.

2	Choose Yes.

See Also

Clear Bitmaps

Close Active Objects

Undo Changes


Fill Arcs

Edit, Edit Points

Purpose

Use Edit Points to create filled pie wedges out of arcs.

Steps

1	Select, then double-click the arc you want to turn into a wedge.

2	Drag one of the points in a circular motion, keeping the pointer inside the arc.

3	Click [image], then select a pattern.

4	Click [image], then select a color.

5	Click outside the wedge to deselect it.

See Also

Create Arcs and Wedges

Draw Circular Arcs

Draw Elliptical Arcs


Close Active Objects

Purpose

Click outside an active object to close it after you create or edit it.

Steps

1	Click outside the active object.

or

Choose Return from the File menu after creating or editing a bitmap.

See Also

Cancel Changes

Clear Bitmaps


Clear Bitmaps

Insert, Bitmap, Edit, Clear

Purpose

Use Clear to completely erase a bitmap.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate a bitmap:

2	Choose Clear from the Edit menu.

3	Choose Yes.

See Also

Cancel Changes

Close Active Objects


Shape Objects and Text

Graphics, QuickWarp

Purpose

Use QuickWarp to mold objects and text into pre-defined shapes such as waves, pennants, crescents, and bows.

Steps

1	Select the object or text you want to shape.

2	Choose QuickWarp from the Graphics menu.

3	Select the shape you want, then choose OK.

See Also

Make Objects and Text 3-D


Magnify Bitmaps

Insert, Bitmap, View, Zoom

Purpose

Use Zoom to magnify a bitmap and edit it one pixel at a time.

Steps

To magnify a bitmap image,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Choose Zoom from the View menu.

3	Drag the rectangle in the Full Bitmap or Actual Size areas to define the area you want to magnify.

To edit the bitmap pixel by pixel,

1	Click [image].

2	Choose a color from the Color palette.

3	Click the pixels to change them to the color you selected.

To return to the default view,

1	Choose Zoom from the View menu.

See Also

Create Bitmaps

Zoom


Examples

Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


 Hint

You can choose other tools to get different effects. For example, use [image] to fill an area with the same color.


Chart Menu

Insert, Data Chart, Chart

Purpose

Use the options on the Chart menu to choose a chart type and set options for your current chart. Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

These are the Chart menu options for data charts:

Gallery

Retrieve Style

Save Style

Type

Layout

Series

Axis

Grid/Tick

Frame

Perspective

Titles

Legend

Labels

These are the Chart menu options for organization charts:

Gallery

Retrieve Style

Save Style

Layout

Box Attributes

Box Options

Connectors

Set Top

Staff

See Also

Data Menu

Edit Charts


Examples

Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Examples

Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Delete Backgrounds

Slide, Edit Backgrounds, Background, Delete Background

Purpose

Use Delete Background to remove a background from the current master.

Steps

1	Choose Edit Backgrounds from the Slide menu.

2	Choose the background you want to delete from the list on the Power Bar.

3	Choose Delete Background from the Background menu, then choose Yes.

4	Choose Save As from the File menu to save the master (.mst) file without the deleted background, specify the master you want, then choose Save.

5	Choose Edit Slides from the Background menu.

See Also

Add Background

Delete Layouts

Use the Master Gallery


Examples

Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Examples

Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Examples

Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Examples

Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Create Data Charts

Insert, Data Chart, define a chart area

Purpose

Use Create Data Chart to choose the type of data chart you want to create, then add data and format your chart.  Each chart type is suited to particular kinds of information. Choose the chart type most appropriate for your material.

Steps

1	Click [image].

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or

Drag to define a chart area.

3	Choose one of these chart types:

Area

Bar

High/Low

Line

Mixed

Pie

Radar

Scatter

Surface

Table

4	Deselect Use Sample Data to begin with a blank Datasheet.

5	Select 3-D to create a chart with a three-dimensional appearance.

6	Choose the pre-defined chart style you want to use.

7	Choose OK.

8	Type your data in the Datasheet.

9	Double-click parts of the chart and Datasheet to edit them.

10	Click outside the chart to close it.

See Also

Edit Charts

Enter Data in the Datasheet

Import Data

Tips for Creating Data Charts

Use the Chart Gallery

Use the Datasheet


Use the Chart Gallery

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Gallery

Purpose

Use Gallery to display and select pre-defined styles for charts you create.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate a chart:

2	Choose Gallery from the Chart menu.

3	Select the type of chart you want.

4	Select the pre-defined style you want to use.

5	Select 3-D for charts with a three-dimensional appearance.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Data Charts

Edit Charts


Troubleshooting for MIDI Sound

Purpose

To get the best results from the MIDI sound files that ship with Presentations 3.0, make sure that your system is set up correctly for your sound card.

          	For best results with Presentations 3.0 MIDI sound clips, make sure all 16 MIDI channels are not active at the same time. You only need to use the MIDI Mapper to activate channels 1-10 or 13-16.

Steps

1	Install MIDI sound drivers and hardware compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards. Consult your sound system documentation for installation information.

2	Double-click the Control Panel icon from Windows Program Manager, then double-click the MIDI Mapper icon.

3	Select Setups, select the name of the setup you want to use, then choose Edit to view or change the current setup.

You will probably choose either Extended (channels 1-10) or Base (channels 13-16), depending on your sound system. Activating all 16 channels results in inaccurate sound play when you use the .MID files that ship with Presentations 3.0. These .MID files include two versions of each piece (one for Extended, and one for Base), so using all the channels causes the sound to overlap.

4	Select each channel you want to use, then choose your sound system and sound map from the drop-down lists. This activates the channels. If channels 1-10 or 13-16 are already activated, you do not have to alter the setup.

The checkboxes at the right indicate which channels are currently active. Each of the active channels should display the name of your sound system. The Patch Map column should display "None" for Presentations 3.0 sound files.

For further information about channel, port, and patch mapping, please choose Help from the MIDI setup dialog boxes.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Use MIDI Sound Clips


Create Bullet Charts

Insert, Bullet Chart

Purpose

Use Bullet Chart to display a series of text lines as a bulleted list.  You can also add blank bullet charts to layouts.

Steps

To create a bullet chart in a slide or drawing,

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or

Drag to define a chart area.

3	Type the text for your bullets.

4	Right-click the chart, then choose Define Bullets/Fonts from the QuickMenu to choose bullet, font, and box options.

5	Click outside the bullet chart when you have finished.

To create a blank bullet chart for a layout,

1	Choose Edit Layout from the Slide menu, then go to the layout you want to add a bullet chart to.

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or

Drag to define a chart area.

4	Select the elements you want your bullet chart to have, then choose OK.

5	Choose Save from the File menu, specify the master (.mst) file you want to save with the edited layout, then choose Save.

6	Choose Edit Slides from the Power Bar.

See Also

Define Bullets

Design Bullet Charts

Tips for Creating Bullet Charts


 Hint

To insert a new line, press Enter.

To move an object to the right, press Tab.

To move an object to the left, press Shift+Tab.


Access GroupWise from Presentations 3.0
Access Novell GroupWise from Presentations 3.0

File, GroupWise

Purpose

Use Novell GroupWise with Presentations 3.0 to instantly send mail, appointments, notes, phone messages, and tasks from inside Presentations 3.0.  You can also check the GroupWise Address Book, or your own Calendar, In Box, or Out Box.

Steps

1	Choose GroupWise from the File menu.

2	Choose the GroupWise feature you want to use.

See Also

Mail Documents from Presentations 3.0


Create Organization Charts

Insert, Org Chart

Purpose

Use Organization Chart to create a chart showing an organization's structure, or relationships of people and positions.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or

Drag to define a chart area.

3	Choose the pre-defined chart style you want to use, then choose OK.

4	Type the position title or name you want at the top of the chart in the Text Chart Outliner.

5	Press Enter to add a subordinate position under the top position, then type the position title (or name) of the subordinate.

6	Use the following keystrokes to complete your organization chart:

Press:	When you want to:
Enter	Add another position at the same level
Enter, Tab	Add a subordinate position
Enter, Shift+Tab	Add a superior position
Backspace	Delete the previous character
7	Right-click the chart and Text Chart Outliner to choose editing options from the QuickMenu.

8	Click outside the chart to close it.

See Also

Edit Charts

Design Organization Charts

Tips for Creating Organization Charts


table (def)
table

A two-dimensional list that displays data in rows and columns. You can use tables alone, or display them with charts using the Display Table option.

Use tables to show numerical information in columns and rows.


pie chart (def)
pie chart

A circular chart that shows each data cell in the Datasheet as a slice of the circle and how that slice relates to the whole. You can create as many as nine pie charts in the same Datasheet.

Use pie charts to show proportions and relationships of parts to a whole.


bar chart (def)
bar chart

A chart that displays the data as bars of varying heights or lengths for easy comparison. You can create vertical or horizontal bar charts.

Use bar charts to show variations between components, but not in relationship to a whole.


line chart (def)
line chart

A chart that shows trends and rate of change over time by connecting the data points with lines.

Use line charts to show trends and rate of change over time.


area chart (def)
area chart

A chart that shows the height of all values under the line defined by the data points. Area charts can also display continuous solid areas measuring the data in your Datasheet.

Use area charts to show trends and amount of change over time.


surface chart (def)
surface chart

A chart that represents data values as a solid area that bulges and dips like the contour of a landscape. For example, you can use a surface chart to show business profits and losses as the peaks and valleys of a mountain range. The color of the solid area changes as the surface rises and falls.

Use surface charts to show three-dimensional representations of data, with connected data points forming a surface.


scatter chart (def)
scatter chart

A chart that plots the intercept of two data values, placing a dot or marker at each point where data on the X and Y axes intersect.

Use scatter charts to show interception points between X and Y values.


high/low chart (def)
high/low chart

A line chart that uses lines and bars to show the high and low values compared over time. For example, a high/low chart could compare daily low and high values of a stock over five days; or it could show opening, closing, and range of stock prices. A vertical line or bar connects high and low values for the time period; horizontal marks or bars show opening and closing values.

Type a new label in every fourth column. For each label, type four data values in each row, representing the high, low, opening, and closing values.

Use high/low charts to show high, low, open, and close quotes for a stock or other value.


Use the Datasheet

Insert, Data Chart, select a data chart

Purpose

Use the Datasheet that appears as a floating palette in the drawing window to enter, edit, or import the data the chart displays.

Steps

To open a new Datasheet,

1	Click [image].

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or

Drag to define a chart area.

3	Select the chart type and pre-defined style you want to use, then choose OK.

4	Double-click parts of the chart and Datasheet to edit them.

5	Click outside the chart when you finish entering and editing data in the Datasheet.

To edit a Datasheet,

1	Click a cell to move directly to that cell.

2	Type the data you want in the cell.

or

Press Enter to edit rather than replace the data.

To learn more about the Datasheet,

1	Click any part of the sample Datasheet below for help with that part:

See Also

Data Menu

Enter Data in the Datasheet

Import Data


 Hint

For example, specifying 4 means that every fourth grid line is displayed.


Enter Data in the Datasheet

Insert, Data Chart, select a data chart

Purpose

Use the Datasheet as a spreadsheet for your chart data. The cell must have numeric data in order to be plotted in a chart (unless the cell is a Label or a Legend). Numeric data is right-justified in the cell. Text or date entries are left-justified.

Steps

To replace data in the current cell,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Select a cell in the Datasheet by clicking it or using the arrow keys.

3	Type the new data, replacing any previous data in the cell.

or

Paste data that has been copied to the Clipboard.

or

Choose Import from the Chart File menu, select a file to import and the import options you want, then choose Import.

4	Click on a different place in the Datasheet or press Enter to finish updating the cell.

To edit data in the current cell,

1	Double-click the cell.

2	Edit the data value.

3	Choose OK.

To remove data from the current cell,

1	Press Delete.

2	Select Data or Both, then choose OK.

See Also

Cut, Copy, and Paste Data and Text

Format Chart Data

Use the Datasheet


 Hint

If you press the space bar instead of Delete, the cell appears empty but it still contains a space.


Inactive cell

Any data entered in this cell (directly to the right of Labels) cannot be displayed in the chart.


Data entry cell (Row 1, Column A)

The current value in this cell is 90.


Data entry cell (Row 1, Column B)

The current value in this cell is 50.


Data entry cell (Row 1, Column C)

The current value in this cell is 65.


Data entry cell (Row 2, Column A)

The current value in this cell is 50.


Data entry cell (Row 2, Column B)

The current value in this cell is 40.


Data entry cell (Row 2, Column C)

There is no current value in this cell.


Legend

Clicking this cell selects all Legend names (in the Legend column) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Labels

Clicking this cell selects all Label names (in the Labels row) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Select all

Clicking this cell selects the entire Datasheet for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Row 1

Clicking this cell selects the Row 1 Legend and all Row 1 data entry cells (90, 50, and 65 in this sample chart) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on. This is called a series.


Row 2

Clicking this cell selects the Row 2 Legend and all Row 2 data entry cells (50, 40, and empty in this sample chart) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on. This is called a series.


Column A

Clicking this cell selects the Column A Label and all Column A data entry cells (90 and 50) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Column B

Clicking this cell selects the Column B Label and all Column B data entry cells (50 and 40) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Column C

Clicking this cell selects the Column C Label and all Column C data entry cells (65 and empty) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Legend cell (Row 1)

This cell contains the Legend name for Row 1. The Legend appears on the graph only when you choose to display the Legend.


Legend cell (Row 2)

This cell contains the Legend name for Row 2. The Legend appears on the graph only when you choose to display the Legend.


Label cell (Column A)

This cell contains the Label name for Column A. This label appears as the first object on the X axis of the chart.


Label cell (Column B)

This cell contains the Legend name for Column B. This label appears as the second object on the X axis of the chart.


Label cell (Column C)

This cell contains the Legend name for Column C. This label appears as the third object on the X axis of the chart.


Data Menu

Insert, Data Chart, Data

Purpose

Use the options on the Chart Data menu to control how data is entered and displayed in the Datasheet. Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

Import

Export

Format

Column Width

Statistics

Formulas

Recalculate

Fill

Sort

Include Row/Col

Exclude Row/Col

See Also

Chart Menu

Create Data Charts


Fill in Chart Series

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Fill

Purpose

Use Fill in a Datasheet to fill selected cells with linear, growth, or date data series. These options apply to all selected Datasheet cells, including multiple columns and rows. You can specify negative values if you want a descending series.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Select two or more Datasheet cells.

3	Choose Fill from the Data menu.

4	Select Rows to insert the data series from left to right, or Columns to insert the data from top to bottom.

5	Select a fill type.

6	Choose a date/time interval for date series.

7	Specify the starting value (number or date) for the series, then specify a number to indicate the rate of increase for the series.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Sort Chart Data


Sort Chart Data

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Sort

Purpose

Use Sort to sort rows or columns in a Datasheet. Presentations 3.0 sorts numeric values first, text values second, and empty cells last. Select the entire row or column, including the legends and labels, when you want to sort data using the Legend column or Labels row.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or edit charts:

2	Select the Datasheet rows or columns you want to sort.

3	Choose Sort from the Data menu.

4	Select sorting by rows or columns and a sort order.

5	Specify the Key Row or Key Column to use as a basis for sorting while keeping all the values in that row or column together.

For example, to alphabetically sort the legends by row, specify the Legend column (0) as the sort key; or to sort labels by column, specify the Labels row (A) as the sort key.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Fill in Chart Series


Display Statistics about Chart Data

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Statistics

Purpose

Use Statistics to display statistical information about data in a row or column in a Datasheet.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Select a Datasheet row or column cell for which you want to see statistical information.

3	Choose Statistics from the Data menu.

4	Select Row or Column. The statistics are displayed in these categories:

# of Data Points

Minimum value

Maximum value

Average

Standard Deviation

Curve Fit Info

5	Choose Close.

See Also

Choose a Fit for Chart Data

Use Formulas in the Datasheet


# of Data points

Number of cells containing data


Minimum value

Smallest data value


Maximum value

Largest data value


Average

Average of all data values


Standard Deviation

How widely each data value differs from the Average


Curve Fit Info

If the data conforms to a fit formula, the fit information is listed under Curve Fit Info.


Format Chart Data

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Format

Purpose

Use Format to control how numbers and dates are displayed in a Datasheet. Use Numeric to specify decimal precision, number format, type, and negative number style. Use Date Format to choose or edit a date format. Presentations 3.0 supports Julian date values in imported data, interprets regular numbers as a Julian date value, and inserts the date that corresponds to that value.

Steps

To format chart data,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Select the Datasheet cells you want to change.

3	Right-click the Datasheet and choose Format from the QuickMenu.

4	Make the changes you want, then choose OK.

To format numeric data,

1	Select Numeric Format.

2	Select a pre-defined Format.

or

Choose User Defined.

3	Deselect Floating, then specify the number of decimal digits you want to display to set precision of decimal places.

4	Select Parentheses to display negative numbers with parentheses instead of minus signs.

5	Select the number types.

6	Choose OK.

To format dates,

1	Select Date.

2	Choose a pre-defined format.

or

Choose User Defined, choose Custom, then double-click Date and Time Codes to build a custom date format.

3	Insert spaces and punctuation between codes.

4	Choose OK twice.

See Also

Format Dates

Redraw Charts


 Hint

Floating means the number of decimal digits is adjusted to the size of the cell and rounded if necessary.


 Hint

For the number 1000, Currency displays $1000, Thousands displays 1,000, Percent displays 100000%, and Exponential displays 1E+03.

Combining Currency with Percent or Exponential gives meaningless results. Thousands has no effect when combined with Exponential.


Choose Column Widths in the Datasheet

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Column Width

Purpose

Use Column Width to set a common width for all columns in a Datasheet.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Choose Column Width from the Data menu, then specify a column width (from 1 to 30).

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Delete Rows and Columns

Insert Rows and Columns


Use Formulas in the Datasheet

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Formulas

Purpose

Use Formulas to apply standard mathematical formulas to entire rows and columns of Datasheet data.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Select a Datasheet cell in the row or column you want to use as the results row or column.

3	Choose Formulas from the Data menu.

4	Select Row Calculation or Column Calculation.

5	Choose one of the following formulas:

None

Absolute Value

Average

Cosine

Cumulative Total

Difference

Fit Exponential

Fit Linear

Fit Log

Fit Polynomial

Fit Power

Maximum

Minimum

Moving Average

Percent of Total

Sine

Sum

6	Specify the rows or columns you want to apply the formula to in the Rows or Columns text boxes. For example, 1,2,3 or A:C (A..C is also acceptable).

Use 0 to indicate the variable row for a scatter chart.

7	Specify a row or column as the results row or column.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose a Fit for Chart Data

Display Statistics about Chart Data

Recalculate Formulas


absolute value

Takes the value of the number in each cell in a single row or column without regard to its sign. If your data is 3, -4, -2, the absolute values are 3, 4, 2.


average

Adds all data values in a row or column and divides that number by the number of data cells. For example, 1,2,3 adds the values in rows 1 through 3 and divides them by the number of cells containing data in those rows, while A:C or A..C averages values in columns A through C.


cosine

Takes the cosine of each value in one row or column. The cosine is the ratio between the adjacent side and the hypotenuse when the source number is expressed as an angle in radians.


cumulative total

Adds the values in a row or column, then adds that total to the next row and column, thus taking a running total of one or more rows or columns. For example, 1,2,3 totals row 1, then adds that total to the totals for rows 2 and 3, while A:C or A..C totals columns A through C.


difference

Subtracts one row from another or one column from another. The difference for the first cell will always be 0 because there is no previous cell.


maximum

Compares cell values in a row or column with corresponding cell values in the next row(s) or column(s) to find the largest value. For example, 1,2,3 displays the largest value in rows 1 through 3, while A:C or A..C displays the largest value in columns A through C.


minimum

Compares cell values in a row or column with corresponding cell values in the next row(s) or column(s) to find the smallest value. For example, 1,2,3 displays the smallest value in rows 1 through 3, while A:C or A..C displays the smallest value in columns A through C.


moving average

Adds the value of each cell with the values of the cells surrounding it, then divides by the number of cells included. You specify how many cells before and after each cell to include in the moving average. For example, if you type 2, the moving average for each cell will be the average of the current cell and the two cells on each side (a total of five cells).

You can smooth the curve of your data by charting a moving average.


Undelete Text

Edit, Undelete

Purpose

Use Undelete to restore deleted text.

Steps

1	After you have deleted text, choose Undelete from the Edit menu.

2	Use Next and Previous to display deleted text.

3	Choose Restore put deleted text back.

See Also

Delete Objects and Text

Undo Changes


percent of total

Figures the cell value as a percentage of all cells in a row or column. The resulting percentages are expressed as decimal numbers.


sine

Finds the sine of each value in a row or column. A sine is the ratio between the opposite side and the hypotenuse of the right triangle built on the angle when the source number is expressed as an angle in radians.


sum

Adds all the values in two or more rows or columns. For example, 1,2,3 adds all the values in rows 1 through 3, while A:C or A..C adds columns A through C.


Recalculate Formulas

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Recalculate

Purpose

Use Recalculate in a Datasheet to update calculated values after you make changes in a row or column that is affected by a formula. You must have previously defined a Formula including that particular row or column.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Change one or more Datasheet cell values in the row(s) or column(s) affected by a formula.

3	Choose Recalculate from the Data menu.

See Also

Use Formulas in the Datasheet


Include Data in Charts

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Include Row/Col

Purpose

Use Include Row/Col to specify what data in your Datasheet should be displayed in your chart. Use this option to include data that was previously excluded.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the excluded Datasheet row or column you want to include, then choose Include Row/Col.

See Also

Exclude Data in Charts

Redraw Charts


Exclude Data in Charts

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Exclude Row/Col

Purpose

Use Exclude Row/Col to specify what data in your Datasheet should not display in your chart. Unless you exclude some data, the chart displays all current data. The excluded cells appear dimmed. You can change data in the excluded rows, but the changes will not appear in the chart until you include them again.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the Datasheet row or column you want to exclude, then choose Exclude Row/Col.

See Also

Include Data in Charts

Redraw Charts


Emboss

Gives a three-dimensional effect to the edges of objects and lines


Toolbar

Use this feature to select, create, edit, copy, delete, and set the appearance of Toolbars

How to Use It


Cut, Copy, and Paste Data and Text

Insert, Data Chart, Edit, Cut

Purpose

Use Cut to remove selected information from the Datasheet or Text Chart Outliner to the Clipboard. Use Copy to place selected information onto the Clipboard without removing it from your chart. Use Paste to place information from the Clipboard into the Datasheet or Outliner.

Steps

To copy and paste data and text,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Select the Datasheet cell(s) containing the data you want to copy.

or

Select the line of text you want to copy.

3	Right-click the Datasheet or Outliner and choose Copy from the QuickMenu.

4	Choose Paste from the QuickMenu to bring the information from the Clipboard.

To cut and paste data and text,

1	Select the Datasheet cell(s) containing data you want to cut.

or

Select the line of text you want to cut.

2	Right-click the Datasheet or Outliner and choose Cut from the QuickMenu.

3	Choose Paste from the QuickMenu to bring the information from the Clipboard.

See Also

Transpose Data


 Hint

The information remains on the Clipboard until you Cut or Copy new information or until you exit Windows.


 Hint

If you cut or copied a block of data from more than one cell, the cell you click becomes the top-left corner of the block, and the data fills the cells to the right and down from it.

Pasted information will overwrite any existing information in a Datasheet.


Transpose Data

Insert, Data Chart, Edit, Paste Transposed

Purpose

Use Paste Transposed while editing a chart to switch the rows and columns of selected cells. Data from left to right will appear from top to bottom. Data in the first row will be inserted in the first column and so on. The examples below show data before and after using Paste Transposed:

Before	After
1   4   7	1   3   6
3   9   2	4   9   8
6   8   5	7   2   5
Steps

1	Select the cells you want to transpose.

2	Choose Cut from the Edit menu.

3	Select the cell where you want transposed data to begin.

4	Choose Paste Transposed from the Edit menu.

See Also

Cut, Copy, and Paste Data and Text


 Hint

The selection should contain the same number of rows and columns. If you select more rows than columns (or vice versa), Presentations 3.0 will take the larger of the two numbers and perform the function as if you had specified that number of rows and columns.


Insert Rows and Columns

Insert, Data Chart, Edit, Insert

Purpose

Use Insert while editing a chart to add rows or columns to the Datasheet. The new rows or columns will be inserted where you have selected a cell, and everything else will be pushed down (for rows) or to the right (for columns).

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Click in the Datasheet row or column where you want another row or column inserted, right-click, choose Insert from the QuickMenu, select Rows or Columns, then specify the number of rows or columns you want to insert.

or

Select the area where you want new cells, right-click, then choose Insert from the QuickMenu.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Delete Rows and Columns

Include Data in Charts


Delete Rows and Columns

Insert, Data Chart, Edit, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete while editing a chart to remove rows or columns from the Datasheet.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Click in the Datasheet row, column, or block of cells you want to remove, right-click, then choose Delete from the QuickMenu.

or

Right-click the Datasheet, choose Delete from the QuickMenu, select Rows or Columns, then specify the number of rows or columns to delete.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Clear Datasheet Cells

Insert Rows and Columns


 Hint

When you remove rows or columns, existing rows or columns move up (for rows) or left (for columns) to fill the empty space.


Clear Datasheet Cells

Insert, Data Chart, Edit, Clear

Purpose

Use Clear while editing a chart to erase the data in a cell, its format, or both.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Select the Datasheet cell(s) you want to erase.

3	Right-click the Datasheet and choose Clear from the QuickMenu.

4	Select Data, Format, or Both.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Clear the Datasheet

Delete Rows and Columns


Select All Datasheet Cells

Insert, Data Chart, Edit, Select All

Purpose

Use Select All while editing a chart to select all cells in the Datasheet. Select All selects only the cells in rows or columns with data in them.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the Datasheet and choose Select All from the QuickMenu.

or

Click the blank gray cell at the top-left corner of the Datasheet to select every cell, whether or not it has data in it.

See Also

Edit Cells

Format Chart Data


Move to a Cell

Insert, Data Chart, Edit, Go To Cell

Purpose

Use Go To Cell while editing a chart to move to any cell in the Datasheet.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the Datasheet and choose Go To Cell from the QuickMenu.

3	Specify the letter (column) and number (row) of the cell you want to move to.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Edit Cells


Edit Cells

Insert, Data Chart, Edit, Edit Cell

Purpose

Use Edit Cell while editing a chart to modify data in an individual cell in the Datasheet.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Select the Datasheet cell you want to modify, then double-click it.

3	Type your change.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Clear Datasheet Cells

Move to a Cell


Mosaic

Gives the effect of an image made up of squares of color. You can specify the size of the squares.


Rain

Gives the effect of colors running down the page in the rain. You can specify the size of the dripping effect.


Import Text Data

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Import

Purpose

Use Import to retrieve spreadsheet or Datasheet data saved as an ASCII or ANSI file into your chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Choose Import from the Data menu.

3	Choose the type of data you are importing, then specify the filename you want to import.

4	Select delimiters and ANSI character options.

5	Select Transpose Data to switch data from columns to rows or rows to columns.

6	Select Clear Current Data to eliminate data already in the Datasheet.

7	Select the Link to Spreadsheet check box if you want to link the imported Datasheet to an existing chart.

8	Select Import at Current Cell to import the data starting at the selected cell instead of the top-left cell.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Export Data

Import Data


Export Data

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Export

Purpose

Use Export to save Datasheet data as a new file without creating a chart in the current document. The Datasheet is saved in ASCII or ANSI format, delimited by tabs, commas, or spaces.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Type your data into the Datasheet, then choose Export from the Data menu.

3	Type a path and filename.

4	Select a format and delimiter type for the exported data.

5	Choose Export.

See Also

Import Data


Import Data

Insert, Data Chart, Data, Import

Purpose

Use Import to insert a spreadsheet file created in another application into the current Datasheet. Imported data will overwrite any data in the chart. You can import charts saved with the spreadsheet along with their data and attributes by choosing them from the list of range names.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Choose Import from the Data menu.

3	Choose the type of data you are importing, then specify the filename you want to import.

4	Specify the range of data or range name to import.

5	Select Clear Current Data to eliminate data already in the Datasheet.

6	Select Transpose Data to switch data from columns to rows or rows to columns.

7	Select the Link to Spreadsheet check box if you want to link the imported data to an existing chart.

8	Select Import at Current Cell to import the data starting at the selected cell instead of the top-left cell.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Export Data

Import Text Data

Importable Spreadsheet Formats


Clear the Datasheet

Insert, Data Chart, Edit, Clear All

Purpose

Use Clear All to clear all current data and formatting from your Datasheet.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Choose Clear All from the Edit menu, then choose Yes.

See Also

Clear Datasheet Cells


Save and Retrieve Chart Styles

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Retrieve Style or Save Style

Purpose

Use Retrieve Style and Save Style to retrieve and save a chart style so you can use the same box options and attributes, bullets, and other chart characteristics. Data and text are not saved.

Steps

To retrieve a chart style,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Choose Retrieve Style from the Chart menu.

3	Specify the filename of the style you want to use.

4	Choose Retrieve.

To save a chart style,

1	Create or modify a chart with styles you want to apply to other charts.

2	Choose Save Style from the Chart menu.

3	Type a path and filename.

4	Choose Save.

See Also

Design Data Charts

Export Data


saturation

Makes colors more and less vivid. You can specify the percentage of saturation. High percentages result in stronger colors; low percentages result in duller colors.


Design Data Charts

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Layout

Purpose

Use Layout to control how charts appear. Layout options change, depending on what type of data chart you are working on.

Steps

To set chart layout options,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the chart and choose Layout from the QuickMenu.

3	Choose from the following design options:

3D

Appearance

Blend

Explode Slice

Fill Color

Full Grid

Horizontal

Label Dividers

Line Color

Link Pies

Options

Outline Color

Outline Contours

Pie Options

Proportional Pies

Range Colors

Style

Sizes

Type

4	Select Display Table, choose Table to set options for a table, then choose OK.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Data Charts

Edit Charts

Link Pie Charts

Separate Pie Slices


 Hint

Choose Preview at any time to view your changes without closing the dialog box.


3D

Displays the chart in three dimensions


Horizontal

Displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically


Display Table

Displays a table of the Datasheet data below the graph


Style

Use these display options for area, bar, and line charts:

Cluster displays the data in each column as clustered groups.

Overlap displays the data in each column as overlapping groups.

Stacked displays the data in each column as a combined total, stacked from bottom to top.

Stacked 100% displays the data each column as a percentage of the whole column. The percentage figures are stacked to 100% for each column.


Sizes

Sets the Width, Depth, Height, and Overlap percentage for data. All charts do not use all options.


Type

Use these display options for High/Low charts:

Line displays each set of data as horizontal and vertical lines.

Bar/Error Bar displays each set of data as bars with error indicators.

Error Bar displays each set of data with top and bottom error markers.

Area displays each set of data as solid areas.

Use these display options for Radar charts:

Line displays data as outlines.

Area displays data as solid, filled areas on the chart grid.


Choose Axis Options

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Axis

Purpose

Use Axis to control the display of the axes in your chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Double-click an axis.

3	Select the axis you want to change.

4	Specify the Minimum and Maximum values for the axis.

or

Select Auto to automatically set the minimum and maximum values.

5	Specify the major grid value and number of minor grid lines

6	Specify the label scale factor to divide the maximum value.

7	Select a linear or logarithmic scaling method.

8	Choose Grid/Tick to set grid and tick options, then choose OK.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Frame Options

Choose Grid and Tick Options

Choose Series Options


 Hint

For example, if the Maximum Value for an axis is 100 and the Label Scale factor is 2, the new Maximum value will be 50.


Choose Frame Options

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Frame

Purpose

Use Frame to control how the base and frame(s) display in your chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Double-click the frame.

3	Select the sides of the chart where the frame will appear.

4	Specify the base height.

5	Select a color and pattern for the frame.

6	Choose Fill or Line to select the frame's attributes, make your changes, then choose OK.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Axis Options

Choose Fills for Objects

Choose Grid and Tick Options

Choose Line Attributes

Choose Series Options


Choose Grid and Tick Options

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Grid/Tick

Purpose

Use Grid/Tick to control how grid lines and ticks display in a chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Double-click the grids or ticks.

3	Select the axis you want to apply options to.

4	Choose the settings and color for major and minor grid lines and ticks.

5	Choose Axis, set axis options, then choose OK.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Axis Options

Choose Frame Options

Choose Series Options


Label Charts

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Labels

Purpose

Use Labels to format the labels for your data chart. Pie charts use different labeling options, such as percentages and slice values.

Steps

To label data charts,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Double-click a label.

3	Select the label(s) you want.

4	Choose Display to display the data labels.

5	Choose position options you want.

6	Choose Font, select the font, point size, and appearance of the label text, then choose OK.

7	Choose Attributes, select the color, attributes, and style of the label boxes and borders, then choose OK.

8	Repeat steps 3-6 for each label.

9	Choose OK.

To label pie charts,

1	Create or retrieve the pie charts you want to label.

2	Double-click a label.

3	Choose positions for values, percents, and labels on the chart, then choose the number of digits for percentage labels.

4	Select a label orientation.

5	Choose a leader option to insert a line from an outside value, percent, or label into the chart.

6	Follow steps 6-9 above.

See Also

Choose Axis Options

Choose Box Attributes

Choose Fonts


Choose Legend Options

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Legend

Purpose

Use Legend to format a descriptive legend for your chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click outside the chart and choose Display Legend.

3	Double-click the legend.

4	Choose from the following legend options:

Inside Chart

Outside Chart

Position

Horizontal

Vertical

Attributes

Series Font

Font

5	Type a legend name.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Box Attributes

Choose Fonts

Label Charts

Design Data Charts


Inside Chart

Positions the legend inside the frame of the chart


Outside Chart

Positions the legend outside the frame of the chart


Position

Determines the side of the chart where the legend appears. You can also drag the legend to position it on the chart.


Horizontal

Displays the chart legend horizontally


Vertical

Displays the chart legend vertically


Attributes

Determines the style, color, and fill attributes of the legend box and border


Series Font

Determines the font, appearance, point size, and attributes of the legend text


Font

Determines the font, appearance, color, and point size of the title text


Choose Series Options

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Series

Purpose

Use Series to define how each data series displays. You can change the type of an individual series without affecting the rest of the chart to create mixed charts. For example, you can change one series of bars to a line series and another to an area series, while the rest of the chart remains a bar graph. You can also assign series to different Y axes.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Double-click the series you want to change.

3	Select a current series type.

4	Choose a marker type, then specify a size.

5	Select the color, pattern, fill attributes, and line attributes for the series.

6	Select an axis.

7	Choose OK.

or

Use the Previous and Next buttons to specify the next series you want to change.

See Also

Choose Axis Options

Choose Fills for Objects

Choose Line Attributes

Label Charts

Design Data Charts


Choose Perspective Options

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Perspective

Purpose

Use Perspective to adjust the viewing perspective in your 3-D chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Choose Perspective from the Chart menu.

3	Select Right Angle Axes for the axes to appear at a right angle.

4	Specify the horizontal and vertical values.

or

Use the scroll bars under the view box.

5	Select Wire Frame View to display the chart in the view box as a series of frames with no colors or patterns.

6	Choose Reset to restore default perspective options.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Frame Options


Create and Edit Chart Titles

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Titles

Purpose

Use Titles to create and edit chart titles.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Double-click the title.

3	Type the title, subtitle, and axis titles.

4	Choose Options to set position, font, and box attributes for a title, then choose OK.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Legend Options

Choose Title Options

Label Charts


Choose Title Options

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Titles, Options

Purpose

Use Titles Options to set the position, font, and box attributes of chart titles.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Double-click the title.

3	Choose Options, then select the title you want.

4	Choose a position for the title.

5	Choose Font, set the title font, then choose OK.

6	Choose Attributes, set box attributes for the title, then choose OK.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Box Attributes

Choose Fonts


Proportional Pies

Proportionally sizes two or more pie charts in the current Datasheet


Explode Slice

Separates a slice from the rest of the pie chart


Appearance

Depth sets the thickness of your pie chart.

Size sets the size of the pie chart in relation to the chart area.

Angle rotates the slices counter-clockwise around the pie chart.

Tilt orients your pie chart in the chart area.


Pie Options

Column displays the pie chart as a stacked column.

Sort Slice arranges the pie chart slices by size.


Link Pies

Links a pie piece to another pie chart


Blend

Blends the range colors for a table or surface chart. Select the starting color (at the 1-10% row) and the ending color (at the 91-100% row) and choose Blend.


Label Dividers

Draws a heavy border under the row titles and to the right of the column titles in tables


Full Grid

Draws border lines for each cell in tables


Range Colors

Displays tables in the range colors


Fill Color

Displays the whole table in one color


Line Color

Sets the line color in tables


Outline Contours

Draws an outline around each area in surface charts


Outline Color

Sets the outline color in surface charts


Background Menu

Slide, Edit Backgrounds, Background

Purpose

Use the options on the Background menu to add, delete, and modify backgrounds.

Add Background

Delete Background

Master Gallery

Name

Edit Slides

Edit Layouts

See Also

Layout Menu


Name Backgrounds

Slide, Edit Backgrounds, Background, Name

Purpose

Use Name to assign a new name to an existing background.

Steps

1	Choose Edit Backgrounds from the Slide menu.

2	Choose Name from the Background menu.

3	Specify the background you want to rename using the arrow buttons.

4	Type a name for the background, then choose OK.

5	Choose Save As from the File menu to save the master (.mst) file with the renamed background, specify the master you want, then choose Save.

6	Choose Edit Slides from the Background menu.

See Also

Add Background

Name Layouts


Separate Pie Slices

Insert, Data Chart, select Pie, Chart, Layout, Explode Slice

Purpose

Use Explode Slice to separate a selected slice from a pie chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the chart and choose Layout from the QuickMenu.

3	Specify the pie chart number.

4	Specify the number of the slice you want to explode.

5	Specify the distance (1 to 200) that the slice will be separated from the pie.

6	Choose OK.

or

Select the slice you want to separate from the pie and drag it to position it.

See Also

Change Charts into Objects

Link Pie Charts


Link Pie Charts

Insert, Data Chart, select Pie, Chart, Layout, Link Pies

Purpose

Use Link Pies to represent data about a pie slice in one pie chart as data in another pie chart. You must create two or more pie charts to link them.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Create or retrieve the pie charts you want to link.

3	Right-click the chart and choose Layout from the QuickMenu.

4	Specify the pie chart number.

or

Use the Previous or Next buttons to specify the pie.

5	Select Link.

6	Specify the number of the slice you want to link.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Design Data Charts

Separate Pie Slices


Choose Fonts for Bullet Charts

Insert, Bullet Chart, Format, Define Bullets/Fonts, Font

Purpose

Use Font to set the font, size, style, appearance, and color for the bullets and text of each level of your bullet chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the bullet chart, then choose Define Bullets/Fonts.

3	Select Font.

4	Select a level, then choose a font, style, and size.

5	Select the appearance options and bullet color.

6	Choose Font Color, set the text attributes, then choose OK.

7	Repeat steps 4-6 for each level of the bullet chart.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Define Bullets

Choose Box and Frame Options for Bullet Charts


Design Bullet Charts

Insert, Bullet Chart, Format, Define Bullets/Fonts

Purpose

Use Define Bullets/Fonts to control the bullets, fonts, boxes, and frames in your bullet chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the bullet chart, then choose Define Bullets/Fonts.

3	Select Bullets, Font, or Box/Frame.

4	Choose Style, choose Load Style, specify a filename, then choose Retrieve to use a pre-defined bullet chart style.

or

Create a new style definition.

5	Choose Style, choose Save Style, type a filename for the style, then choose Save to save the chart style for future use.

or

Choose Style, choose Save Style to Layout to incorporate your changes into the current slide layout.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Box and Frame Options for Bullet Charts

Choose Fonts for Bullet Charts

Create Bullet Charts

Define Bullets


Choose Box Attributes

Insert, Data Chart or Org Chart, Chart, Labels or Legend, Attributes

Purpose

Use Box Attributes to define the interior and border styles of all boxes in your charts.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click a box and choose Box Attributes from the QuickMenu.

3	Choose a box style.

4	Select a fill color.

or

Choose Attributes to change fill colors and patterns.

5	Select a border color and style.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Box Options for Bullet Charts

Choose Box Options for Organization Charts

Choose Fills for Objects

Choose Legend Options

Create Bullet Charts

Create Organization Charts

Label Charts


Choose Box and Frame Options for Bullet Charts

Insert, Bullet, Define Bullets/Fonts, Box/Frame

Purpose

Use Box Options to position the shape, frame, position, and colors of boxes in your bullet chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the bullet chart, then choose Define Bullets/Fonts.

3	Select Box/Frame.

4	Select Display Box to display a box with the bullet chart.

5	Select a box shape, frame color, and frame style.

6	Select a position option to place the box in relation to the text.

7	Choose Fill Attributes, choose the fill type and colors, then choose OK.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Bullet Charts

Define Bullets

Design Bullet Charts


Define Bullets

Insert, Bullet Chart, Define Bullets/Fonts, Bullets

Purpose

Use Bullets to choose the appearance of the bullets in a bullet chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the bullet chart, then choose Define Bullets/Fonts.

3	Select Bullets.

4	Select the level you want to choose bullets for, then choose a justification.

5	Choose a bullet format.

6	Delete the bullet displayed, choose Insert, then select a Character or other bullet.

7	Choose a bullet color.

8	Repeat steps 4-7 for each bullet level.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Box and Frame Options for Bullet Charts

Create Bullet Charts

Design Bullet Charts


Sharpen

Sharpens the edges between colors and objects. You can choose low, medium, or high sharpening.


Smooth

Smooths the edges between colors and objects. You can choose low, medium, and high sharpening.


Trace Contours

Traces the edges of objects, removing the color and leaving only the contour lines. You can choose low, medium, or high contouring.


Wind

Gives the effect of wind blowing colors horizontally along the page. You can specify the strength and direction of the wind.


Design Organization Charts

Insert, Org Chart, Chart, Layout

Purpose

Use Layout to design and set the appearance of organization charts.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the chart and choose Layout from the QuickMenu.

3	Select the orientation for your chart.

4	Choose an arrangement for each level.

5	Specify the number of levels to display.

6	Choose Font, set the text font, then choose OK.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Box Options for Organization Charts

Choose Fonts

Connect Organization Levels

Create Staff Positions

Display Flat Organizations

Display Tall Organizations

Set the Top Position


Choose Box Options for Organization Charts

Insert, Org Chart, Chart, Box Options

Purpose

Use Box Options to set box size, justify text, and turn boxes on or off for each level in the organization chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the chart and choose Box Options from the QuickMenu.

3	Select the levels you want to display with boxes around them.

4	Select the height and width of the boxes.

5	Choose justification for text inside boxes.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Box Attributes

Connect Organization Levels

Create Organization Charts

Create Staff Positions

Design Organization Charts

Set the Top Position


Connect Organization Levels

Insert, Org Chart, Chart, Connectors

Purpose

Use Connectors to display connecting lines between levels and positions in an organization chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the chart and choose Connectors from the QuickMenu.

3	Select Display Connectors to display connectors on the chart.

4	Select a style for lines connecting positions.

5	Select a style for lines connecting staff positions.

6	Select a connector color.

7	Select Display Arrows to include arrowheads showing the chart flow.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Box Options for Organization Charts

Choose Box Attributes

Create Organization Charts

Create Staff Positions

Design Organization Charts

Set the Top Position


Create Staff Positions

Insert, Org Chart, Chart, Staff

Purpose

Use Staff to display a link from the main organization chart to an independent position (box).

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Create a new entry as the independent position.

or

Place the insertion point on the position that needs the staff line attached.

3	Right-click the Text Chart Outliner and choose Staff from the QuickMenu.

See Also

Connect Organization Levels

Create Organization Charts

Design Organization Charts

Set the Top Position


 Hint

The word Staff appears in the left column of the outline, showing that this title is now a staff position.

To turn off the Staff feature, choose Staff again.


Set the Top Position

Insert, Org Chart, Chart, Set Top

Purpose

Use Set Top to designate any title as the top of the organization chart. Only that title and its subordinate boxes will display. There can be only one top position in each chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Place the insertion point on the position that will be at the top of the organization chart.

3	Right-click the Text Chart Outliner and choose Set Top from the QuickMenu.

See Also

Connect Organization Levels

Create Organization Charts

Create Staff Positions

Design Organization Charts


Make Objects Transparent

Purpose

With two or more overlapping filled objects on the screen, you can make the object on top transparent. Transparent means that the object underneath shows through the object on top. Only objects with fill patterns can be made transparent. You can also make only the foreground or background colors transparent.

Steps

To create transparent objects,

1	Create two overlapping, filled objects of different colors.

2	Select the top object.

3	Click [image], then select a pattern.

4	Click [image], then select a background color by right-clicking a color.

For best results, choose a color which is not displayed in the overlapping objects or the page color.

To make the background transparent,

1	Choose Fill from the Format menu, then choose Background from the Transparency pop-up list.

2	Choose OK.

To make the foreground transparent,

1	Choose Fill Attributes from the Format menu, then choose Foreground from the Transparency pop-up list.

2	Choose OK.

See Also

Combine Objects


Redraw Charts

Insert, Data Chart or Org Chart, View, Redraw or Auto Redraw

Purpose

Use Redraw and Auto-Redraw to update your chart to reflect the current Datasheet data or text modifications in the chart, and to correct distorted graphics.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Choose Auto-Redraw from the View menu to automatically update your chart.

See Also

Display the Datasheet or Outliner

Exclude Data in Charts

Include Data in Charts

Recalculate Formulas


Display the Datasheet or Outliner

Insert, Data Chart or Org Chart, View, Datasheet or Outliner

Purpose

Use Datasheet and Outline to display the Datasheet or Text Chart Outliner as a floating palette, or to hide it. Clicking the menu option toggles the display off and on.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Choose Datasheet from the View menu to display or hide the Datasheet.

or

Choose Outline from the View menu to display or hide the Text Chart Outliner.

See Also

Redraw Charts


Create Bitmaps

Insert, Bitmap

Purpose

Use Bitmap to create or edit a bitmap image.

Steps

1	Click [image].

2	Drag to create an area large enough for the bitmap.

or

Click once to create a full-page bitmap.

3	Use the tools on the bitmap tool palette to create a bitmap image.

See Also

Bitmaps vs. Vector Objects

Cancel Changes

Clear Bitmaps

Magnify Bitmaps

Paint Tools Menu

Use the QuickArt Gallery


 Hint

Press Shift while dragging to constrain the area you are defining.

Press Alt while dragging to create the area from a center point.

Hold down both the left and the right mouse buttons while dragging to reposition the area.


Use the QuickArt Gallery

Insert, QuickArt

Purpose

Use the QuickArt Gallery to select a figure to place in the current drawing window. You can also add and delete figures from categories.

Steps

To insert a QuickArt figure from the gallery,

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Drag to create an area for the figure.

or

Click once to create a full-page figure.

3	Choose a category of figures.

4	Choose Figures to view thumbnail sketches of the figures.

5	Select Remove Gradients to replace gradient colors with solid colors to speed up display.

6	Select a figure, then choose Insert.

or

Choose Categories to see to the figure categories again.

7	Choose Other File to insert a figure not in the QuickArt gallery, then specify the filename of the figure and choose Insert.

See Also

Add New Gallery Category

Choose Gallery Options

Import Graphics Files as Figures

Open Documents

Save Gallery Figures as .WPG Files


Import Graphics Files as Figures

Insert, QuickArt, Other File

Purpose

Use Other File to insert a graphics file into a figure area.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Drag to create an area for the graphic.

or

Click once to create a full-page graphic.

3	Choose Other File.

4	Specify the filename of the graphics file you want.

5	Choose Insert.

See Also

Use the QuickArt Gallery


 Hint

The figure is proportionally sized to fit the defined area.


Save Gallery Figures as .WPG Files

Insert, QuickArt, Save As WPG

Purpose

Use Save As WPG to save figures from the QuickArt gallery as separate .wpg files in a directory you specify.  Do not convert all figures into .WPG's in the root directory, however, since it is limited in the number of files it can contain.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Drag to create an area for the figure.

or

Click once to create a full-page figure.

3	Choose a figure or figure category.

4	Choose Save As WPG.

5	Select Current Image, Current Category, or All Categories.

6	Specify the directory for the new .wpg files.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Save Documents as Bitmaps

Use the QuickArt gallery


Paint Tools Menu

Insert, Bitmap, Insert, Paint Tools

Purpose

Use the Paint Tools submenu to add drawn objects to bitmap images. Most Paint menu options appear on the Bitmap tool palette. Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

Line

Polygon

Rectangle

Rounded Rectangle

Circle

Circular Arc

Ellipse

Elliptical Arc

Curve

Closed Curve

Bezier

Freehand

Arrow

Regular Polygon

See Also

Create Bitmaps

Drawing Tools Menu


Use the Air Brush

Insert, Bitmap, Insert, Air Brush

Purpose

Use the Air Brush to spray colors and patterns. The slower you drag the mouse, the denser the spray becomes.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Drag the Air Brush to create a continuous stream.

or

Click to paint spots of color.

See Also

Choose Brush Attributes

Choose Colors

Choose Fills for Objects


Erase in Bitmaps

Insert, Bitmap, Insert, Eraser

Purpose

Use the Eraser to change pixels in a bitmap to the current page background color.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Drag the eraser over the pixels you want to erase.

See Also

Choose Brush Attributes

Choose Colors

Selective Replace


Flood Fill in Bitmaps

Insert, Bitmap, Insert, Flood Fill

Purpose

Use Flood Fill to quickly replace the color or pattern of a group of connecting pixels with another color or pattern. You cannot use Flood Fill with color shades, since they are a mixture of colors. To replace a color shades, use Selective Replace.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Click the area that you want to flood fill.

See Also

Choose Colors

Magnify Bitmaps

Pick Up Colors


Spike Removal

Removes spikes and irregular spots on the edges of colors and objects. You can choose low, medium, or high spike removal.


Use the Paint Brush

Insert, Bitmap, Insert, Paint Brush

Purpose

Use the Paint Brush to paint colored lines and patterns in a bitmap.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Drag the paint brush to paint with the currently selected foreground color. (You can also hold down Ctrl to paint with the currently selected background color.)

See Also

Choose Brush Attributes


Pick Up Colors

Insert, Bitmap, Insert, Pickup Color

Purpose

Use Pickup Color to copy the color used in another bitmap or object. Some colors are a mixture of different color pixels. The color you pick up depends on what pixel you are on when you click.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Click the object with the desired color. (You can also hold down Ctrl to pick up the currently selected background color.)

4	Choose a tool on the tool palette to place the picked up color.

See Also

Flood Fill in Bitmaps

Transferring Attributes


Selective Replacing

Insert, Bitmap, Insert, Selective Replace

Purpose

Use Selective Replace to replace the selected color with another, without erasing any other color. For example, you can replace the background color in a pattern while leaving the foreground color untouched.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Click [image], click the color you want to replace, then right-click the color you want to replace it with.

4	Drag the eraser over the area you want to erase.

See Also

Choose Brush Attributes

Choose Colors

Erase in Bitmaps


Equalize

Evens out the contrast between objects and backgrounds


Drawing Tools Menu

Insert, Drawing Tools

Purpose

Use the options on the Drawing Tools submenu to create charts, bitmaps, figures, text, lines, curves, and shapes. Most Drawing menu options appear on the tool palette.

Line

Polygon

Rectangle

Rounded Rectangle

Circle

Circular Arc

Ellipse

Elliptical Arc

Curve

Closed Curve

Bezier

Freehand

Arrow

Regular Polygon

See Also

Bitmap Paint Menu

Chart Menu


 Hint

The Drawing Tools submenu changes to the Paint Tools submenu when you are creating or editing bitmaps.


Use QuickMenus

Purpose

Use the QuickMenu to quickly select, arrange, and access dialog boxes as you create or edit bitmaps, charts, figures, objects, slide shows, and text.

QuickMenus change according to where your pointer is when you right-click.

Steps

To select objects using the QuickMenu,

1	Place the pointer so it does not touch any object in the drawing window.

or

Place the pointer on the object you want to select.

2	Press the right mouse button (right-click) to see the QuickMenu.

3	Choose Select from the QuickMenu, then click an object to select it.

or

Choose Select All from the QuickMenu to select all objects.

To edit an object using the QuickMenu,

1	Place the pointer on the object you want to edit.

2	Right-click.

3	Choose from the options listed.

See Also

Edit Menu


Draw Curves

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Curve

Purpose

Use Curve to draw a continuous curved line.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Click to begin the curved line.

3	Click at each place where the curve should change directions.

4	Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the curve.

5	Double-click to finish the curve.

See Also

Draw Bezier Curves

Draw Circular Arcs

Draw Closed Curves

Draw Elliptical Arcs


 Hint

Press Esc to cancel the object, or press Backspace to remove the most recent anchor point.


Draw Closed Curves

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Closed Curve

Purpose

Use Closed Curve to draw curved shapes filled with the current color and pattern.

Steps

1	Choose a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Click once to begin the curved shape.

4	Click at each place where the curve should change directions.

5	Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the closed curve.

6	Double-click to finish the closed curve.

See Also

Draw Bezier Curves

Draw Circular Arcs

Draw Curves

Draw Elliptical Arcs


Draw Freehand

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Freehand

Purpose

Use Freehand to draw fluid lines as you would with a pen or pencil.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Drag to create the line.

3	Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the line.

4	Release the mouse button to complete the line.

See Also

Draw Curves

Draw Lines


Draw Bézier Curves
Draw Bezier Curves

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Bezier

Purpose

 Use Bezier Curve to create a smooth, curved line with a series of vectors you can move and edit. In this diagram, the points on the curve indicate where you should click to create the curve. Drag the handles outside of the curves to define the height and sweep of the curves.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Click to start the curve.

3	Move the pointer to the place where the curve should change direction.

4	Hold down the mouse button and drag the pointer to display two control handles.

5	Move a handle to change the shape of the curve between the current point and the previous point.

6	Release the mouse button to complete the curve.

7	Repeat steps 3 through 6 to create the next section of the curve.

8	Double-click to finish the curve.

See Also

Draw Circular Arcs

Draw Closed Curves

Draw Curves

Draw Elliptical Arcs

Edit Bezier Curves


 Hint

Press Shift while dragging to constrain the bezier curve angles to 45 degrees.


 Hint

Press Alt while dragging to create a cusp:


Draw Arrows

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Arrow

Purpose

Use Arrow to draw straight arrows. You determine length of arrows and Presentations 3.0 determines width. After you create an arrow, you can modify its width by editing its points or by stretching it.

Steps

1	Choose a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Click once to start the arrow.

4	Move the pointer to where the arrow tail should end.

5	Click to complete the arrow.

See Also

Draw Curved Arrows

Draw Double-Curved Arrows


 Hint

Press Shift while dragging to constrain the direction of the tail to a multiple of 45 degrees.


Draw Curved Arrows

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Arrow

Purpose

Use Arrow to draw curved arrows. You determine length of arrows and Presentations 3.0 determines width. After you create an arrow, you can modify its width by editing its points or by stretching it.

Steps

1	Choose a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Move the pointer to where the arrow head should begin.

4	Drag to specify the angle of the curve, then release the mouse button.

5	Move the pointer to create the curve for the arrow.

6	Click to complete the curved arrow.

See Also

Draw Arrows

Draw Double-Curved Arrows


Draw Double-Curved Arrows

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Arrow

Purpose

Use Arrow to draw double-curved arrows. You determine length of arrows and Presentations 3.0 determines width. After you create an arrow, you can modify its width by editing its points or by stretching it.

Steps

1	Choose a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Move the pointer to where the arrow head should begin.

4	Drag to specify the angle of the curve, then release the mouse button.

5	Move the pointer to create the first curve for the arrow.

6	Click and drag to create the second curve.

7	Release the mouse button to complete the double-curved arrow.

See Also

Draw Arrows

Draw Curved Arrows


Draw Lines

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Line

Purpose

Use Line to draw lines and unfilled angular shapes.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Click to start the line.

3	For a straight line, move the pointer to the end of the line. For a bent or zigzag line, click at each point where the line should change directions.

4	Double-click to complete the line.

See Also

Draw Curves

Draw Freehand

Draw Polygons


Draw Polygons

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Polygon

Purpose

Use Polygon to draw angular shapes filled with the current color and pattern.

Steps

1	Choose a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Click to begin the shape.

4	Move the pointer to the end of one side of the polygon, then click.

5	Repeat step 4 until the shape you want is outlined.

6	Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the polygon.

7	Press Shift to draw exact horizontal, vertical, or 45-degree angle lines.

8	Double-click to complete the shape.

See Also

Draw Lines

Draw Regular Polygons


Draw Regular Polygons

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Regular Polygon

Purpose

Use Regular Polygon to draw angular shapes that have sides with equal lengths, such as triangles and octagons.

Steps

1	Choose a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Specify the number of sides for the shape.

4	Drag to create a shape from the starting point.

5	Release the mouse button to complete the shape.

See Also

Draw Lines

Draw Polygons


 Hint

For example, type 3 to create a triangle.

The Regular Polygon dialog box disappears when you choose another tool on the tool palette or when you choose another object from a menu. You can also close the dialog box by double-clicking its control box.


Draw Rectangles

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Rectangle

Purpose

Use Rectangle to draw rectangles or squares filled with the current color and pattern.

Steps

1	Choose a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Drag to begin the rectangle.

4	Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the rectangle.

5	Press Shift while dragging to constrain the rectangle to a square.

6	Press Alt while dragging to expand the rectangle from a center point.

7	Release the mouse button to complete the rectangle.

See Also

Draw Polygons

Draw Regular Polygons

Draw Rounded Rectangles


Draw Rounded Rectangles

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Rounded Rectangle

Purpose

Use Rounded Rectangle to draw rectangles or squares with rounded corners.

Steps

1	Choose a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Drag to begin the rectangle.

4	Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the rounded rectangle.

5	Press Shift while drawing to constrain the rounded rectangle to rounded square.

6	Press Alt while drawing to draw the rounded rectangle from a center point.

7	Release the mouse button to complete the rectangle.

See Also

Draw Polygons

Draw Regular Polygons

Draw Rectangles


Draw Ellipses

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Ellipse

Purpose

Use Ellipse to draw circles and ellipses.

Steps

1	Choose a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Drag to begin the ellipse.

4	Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the ellipse.

5	Press Shift while drawing to constrain the ellipse to a circle.

6	Press Alt to expand the ellipse from a center point.

7	Release the mouse button to complete the ellipse.

See Also

Draw Circles

Draw Elliptical Arcs


Draw Elliptical Arcs

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Elliptical Arc

Purpose

Use Elliptical Arc to draw pointed, elongated arcs.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Drag to begin the arc.

3	Hold down both mouse buttons to reposition the elliptical arc.

4	Press Shift while drawing to constrain the elliptical arc to a circular arc.

5	Press Alt while drawing to invert the elliptical arc.

6	Release the mouse button to complete the arc.

See Also

Draw Circular Arcs

Draw Bezier Curves

Draw Curves

Draw Ellipses


Draw Circles

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Circle

Purpose

Use Circle to draw circles.

Steps

1	Choose a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] then [image].

3	Drag to begin the circle.

4	Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the circle.

5	Press Alt while drawing to expand the circle from the beginning anchor point.

6	Release the mouse button to complete the circle.

See Also

Draw Ellipses


Draw Circular Arcs

Insert, Drawing Tools or Paint Tools, Circular Arc

Purpose

Use Circular Arc to draw portions of circles.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Click where the arc should begin.

3	Drag to where the arc should end.

4	Move the pointer to create the arc between the two points.

5	Click to complete the arc.

See Also

Draw Bezier Curves

Draw Curves

Drawing Elliptical Arcs


 Hint

Press Shift while dragging to constrain the arc angle to a multiple of 45 degrees.


Tips for Creating Bullet Charts

Bullet charts effectively summarize and reinforce ideas and thoughts. Keep the following points in mind when you create any type of bullet chart:

     	The title should focus on one main topic and capture the interest of your audience.

     	Use no more than eight words per line.

     	Use the same style of bullet throughout a group of charts.

     	Express a single idea on each line.

     	Avoid using more than six bulleted lines of text.

     	Use nouns and action verbs to start your sentences.

See Also

Create Bullet Charts


Edit Backgrounds

Slide, Edit Backgrounds

Purpose

Use Edit Backgrounds to add, delete, name, and link backgrounds.

Steps

1	Choose Master Gallery from the Slide menu.

2	Select the master containing the background you want to edit, then choose Retrieve.

3	Choose Edit Backgrounds from the Slide menu.

4	Select the background you want to edit from the Power Bar.

5	Edit the background by adding or deleting page colors, objects, text, and whatever elements you want.

6	Choose Save from the File menu to save the master (.mst) file with the edited background, specify the master you want, then choose Save.

7	Choose Edit Slides from the Background menu.

See Also

Add Background

Edit Layouts


Menu Bar

Use this feature to select, create, copy, edit, and delete Menu Bars

How to Use It


Save with Even Borders

Format, Page, Size/Margins, Save Options

Purpose

Use Save Options to specify the amount of white space that surrounds a drawing object(s) when you save it. When you insert a .WPG file created in Presentations 3.0 into WordPerfect, saving with even borders is a good way to reduce the amount of white space that appears in the WordPerfect Viewport.

Steps

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Size/Margins from the QuickMenu.

2	Select Size View to Fit Graphic.

3	Specify the amount of white space you want to surround the drawing object(s) when you save the drawing.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Save Documents


Exit Presentations 3.0

File, Exit

Purpose

Use Exit to quit Presentations 3.0 and save each modified file.

Steps

1	Choose Exit from the File menu.

2	Choose Yes to save changes, then choose Close.

or

Specify the drive, directory, and filename for the new document, then choose Save.

See Also

Clear the Drawing Window

Save Documents


 Slide Editor Button

Use this button to edit slides.


 Slide Show Outliner Button

Use this button to create a slide show in outline form.


 Slide List Button

Use this button to display an overview list of the slides in your slide show.


 Slide Sorter Button

Use this button to display an overview of your slide show and to easily change the order of the slides.


Adding to a Gallery Category
Add to a Gallery Category

Purpose

You can create your own figures and add them to the QuickArt Gallery. Gallery category files (such as FIGANIM.SHW) are actually slide show files. To add a figure to a category file, you simply add a slide to the gallery slide show.

Steps

To add the figure,

1	Choose Open from the File menu, specify the category file (*.SHW) you want to edit, then choose Open.

2	Move to where you want to add the slide. (A slide is always added after the one already appearing in the window.)

3	Choose Add Slide from the Slide menu, specify the number of slides to add, then choose OK.

4	Create the figure you want to add.

5	Choose [image].

6	Specify a title for the slide.

7	Choose [image] to return to the slide show.

8	Choose Save from the File menu to save the gallery file with the new figure.

To delete a figure from the gallery,

1	Locate the slide you want to delete.

2	Choose Delete Slide from the Slide menu, then choose Yes.

3	Choose Save from the File menu to save the gallery file.

You cannot undelete a figure. If you delete a figure that came with Presentations 3.0, you can restore it by reinstalling the QuickArt Gallery files.

See Also

Add New Gallery Category


Window Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Window menu to manage open windows.

Cascade

Tile

Slide Show

See Also

Open Documents


Add New Gallery Category

Purpose

You can create your own group of figures and add them as a new category in the QuickArt Gallery.

Steps

1	Create or retrieve the slide show file you want to link to the gallery. Each slide in this file should contain a figure that you want to add.

2	Click [image], then assign a title for each slide.

3	Click [image] to return to the slide show.

4	Choose Save As from the File menu.

5	Specify the directory where your gallery files are stored, then specify a filename ending in .SHW for the slide show.

6	Choose Save.

7	Choose Close from the File menu to close the category file you have created.

See Also

Add to a Gallery Category

Create Cover Slides for New Gallery Categories

Link Graphics to Cover Slides


Switch Between Open Documents

Window, Slide Show or Drawing

Purpose

Use Slide Show or Drawing to switch between open documents.

Steps

1	Choose the name of the document you want to switch to from the Window menu.

See Also

Help Menu


Help Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Help menu to get information about Presentations 3.0 features.

Contents

Search for Help On

How Do I

Macros

Coaches

Upgrade Expert

About Presentations

See Also

Using Help


Create Cover Slides for New Gallery Categories

Purpose

In order to link a new category to the QuickArt gallery, you need to open the gallery .shw file and insert a cover slide into it.

Steps

1	Choose Open from the File menu, specify the FIGURGAL.SHW file, then choose Open.

2	Use the slide list on the Power Bar to move to where you want to add the cover slide. (The slide will be added after the one already appearing in the window.)

3	Choose Add Slide from the Slide menu, specify 1, then choose OK.

4	Create or insert an image to use as your cover slide. This slide will appear in the gallery to represent the new category you are linking to the gallery.

5	Click [image], then type a title for the cover slide (you may want to use the filename of your figure file, such as My Group).

6	Click [image] to return to the slide show.

7	Choose Save from the File menu, then choose Close.

Your new cover slide has now become a part of the main gallery and will appear there.

See Also

Add New Gallery Category

Add to a Gallery Category

Link Graphics to Cover Slides


Link Graphics to Cover Slides

Insert, QuickArt, Link

Purpose

Use Link to link your slide show file to the cover slide. This makes it possible for Presentations 3.0 to find and display your figures when you double-click your cover slide in the QuickArt gallery.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image], then click in the window to view the QuickArt gallery.

2	Select your cover slide, then choose Link.

3	Specify the filename of the slide show containing the figures you want as a new category, then choose OK.

See Also

Add New Gallery Category

Create Cover Slides for New Gallery Categories


radar chart (def)
radar chart

A chart that uses a radial grid to compare data over time and to show variations and trends.

Use radar charts to show data over time and display variations and trends.


Upgrade Expert

Help, Upgrade Expert

Purpose

Use Upgrade Expert to get an explanation of features, terminology, and keystroke information for Presentations 3.0 designed for people making the change to Presentations 3.0.

Steps

1	Choose Upgrade Expert from the Help Menu.

See Also

Use Show Expert


Mail Documents from Presentations 3.0

File, Send

Purpose

Use Send to mail your current document or selected objects from your current document while inside Presentations 3.0 for Windows.

Steps

To mail the current document,

1	Choose Send from the File menu.

2	Select Current Slide Only or Entire Show, then choose OK.

3	Set mail options according to your mail system.

4	Send the mail, then exit to the Presentations 3.0 drawing window.

To mail selected objects from your current document,

1	Select the objects you want to send.

2	Choose Send from the File menu.

The selected objects are inserted into your mail systems Message Box.

3	Set mail options according to your mail system.

4	Send the mail, then exit to the Presentations 3.0 drawing window.

See Also

Object Exchange


Update Linked and Embedded Objects

File, Update

Purpose

Use Update when using Presentations 3.0 as a server application to incorporate the most recent changes to your drawing or chart into the client application. If you do not use Update, your changes will not appear.

Steps

1	Activate a Presentations 3.0 object in another application.

2	Make the changes you want to your drawing or chart.

3	Choose Update from the File menu, then choose Exit and Return to quit Presentations 3.0.

See Also

Close Documents

Exit Presentations 3.0


Use Macros in Presentations 3.0

Tools, Macro

Purpose

Use the options on the Macro menu to record, play, stop, or pause a macro. You can edit macros by retrieving macro files into text areas and saving them in WordPerfect 6.0/6.1 for Windows format.

Steps

To record a macro,

1	Choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Record.

2	Type a name for the macro, then choose Record.

3	Use the keyboard, enter the commands you want recorded.

4	Choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Record to end recording.

To play a macro,

1	Choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Play.

2	Enter the full name of the macro you want to play.

3	Choose Play.

To pause a macro,

1	While a macro is running, choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Pause.

2	Choose Pause again to let the macro continue.

To stop a macro,

1	Choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Stop.

2	Choose the macro you want to stop.

3	Choose Stop.

See Also

Retrieve Text Files


Use the Thesaurus

Tools, Thesaurus

Purpose

Use Thesaurus to replace a word with a synonym (a word with the same meaning) or an antonym (a word with an opposite meaning).

Steps

To use the Thesaurus,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Place the insertion point in the word for which you want a synonym or antonym.

3	Choose Thesaurus from the Tools menu.

4	Select a synonym or antonym.

5	Choose Replace to replace the word.

or

Choose Look Up to find additional synonyms and antonyms, click the desired word, then choose Replace.

To get Help with the Thesaurus,

1	If you want help on a Thesaurus feature, choose Contents from the Thesaurus Help menu.

or

Choose Thesaurus to open Thesaurus Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy the WPSH20US.HLP file that came with your application to your Presentations 3.0 directory.

See Also

Edit Text

Find and Replace Text

Spell-Check Text


 Hint

Additional synonyms and antonyms appear when you click a word with a bullet preceding it.


Bitmaps vs. Vector Objects

A bitmap image is composed of pixels. You can create and edit bitmap images by zooming in and altering each pixel in the image individually.

A vector object is a whole object and is treated as such. Objects created in the drawing window are vector objects.

Bitmap images are formulated pixel by pixel. Because of this, a bitmap image may look jagged when printed or enlarged. Vector objects, on the other hand, are formulated through mathematic calculations and maintain a high resolution when printed or enlarged.

See Also

Create Bitmaps

Edit Bitmaps


Edit Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Edit menu to modify text or graphics. The options on the Edit menu change, depending on object you are editing.

These are the Edit menu options for the drawing window:

Undo

Redo

Delete

Undelete

Cut

Copy

Paste

Select

Paste Special

Links

Edit

Rotate

Find and Replace

Clear

Preferences

These are the Edit menu options for bitmaps:

Undo

Erase

Cut

Copy

Paste

Select Area

Find and Replace

Clear

Preferences

These are Edit menu options for charts:

Insert

Delete

Clear

Clear All

Cut

Copy

Paste

Paste Transposed

Select All

Go To Cell

Edit Cell

Preferences

These are the Edit menu options for organization charts:

Delete

Undelete

Cut

Copy

Paste

Find and Replace

Clear All

Preferences

See Also

Edit Bitmaps

Edit Charts

Edit Figures

Edit Objects

Edit Text


Undo Changes

Edit, Undo

Purpose

Use Undo to reverse changes in a drawing or bitmap.

Steps

1	Choose Undo from the Edit menu. (For bitmaps, you can also right-click and choose Undo from the QuickMenu.)

See Also

Cut, Copy, and Paste Objects and Text

Edit Bitmaps

Erase Areas in Bitmaps

Redo Changes


Redo Changes

Edit, Redo

Purpose

Use Redo to reinstate a change after you used Undo.

Steps

1	Choose Redo from the Edit menu.

See Also

Undo Changes


Delete Objects and Text

Edit, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete to remove objects and text from the drawing window or text charts.

Steps

1	Select the object(s) or text, then choose Delete from the Edit menu.

See Also

Cut, Copy, and Paste Objects and Text

Undo Changes


 Hint

The objects remain on the Clipboard until you use Cut or Copy to replace them with other objects, or until you exit Windows.


Cut, Copy, and Paste Objects and Text

Edit, Cut, Copy, Paste

Purpose

Use Copy to place objects and text on the Clipboard without removing them from your document. Use Cut to remove objects and text from your document to the Clipboard. Use Paste to place objects and text from the Clipboard into the current document.

Steps

To copy and paste objects and text,

1	Select the object(s) or text you want to copy.

or

For bitmaps, choose [image] from the bitmap tool palette, then drag the pointer to select the area you want to copy.

2	Choose Copy from the Edit menu.

3	Choose Paste from the Edit menu to transfer the objects from the Clipboard to the drawing window.

To cut and paste objects or text,

1	Select the object(s) you want to cut.

or

For bitmaps, choose [image] from the bitmap tool palette, then drag the pointer to select the area you want to cut.

2	Choose Cut from the Edit menu.

3	Choose Paste from the Edit menu to transfer the objects from the Clipboard to the drawing window.

See Also

Delete Objects and Text

Duplicate Objects and Areas


 Hint

In the drawing window, the object appears in its original position.

For charts, place the cursor where you want the text to appear.

For bitmaps, you can move the object after you paste it; however, once you deselect it, you must use Select Area to move it again.


List OLE Links

Edit, Links

Purpose

Use Links to display and edit the list of OLE links embedded in your slide show.

Steps

To display links,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

To edit linked objects,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the linked object you want to edit.

3	Choose Open Source.

4	Make the changes you want, then save the file and exit the application.

5	Select Automatic or Manual updating.

To delete a link from an object,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the object whose link you want to delete.

3	Choose Break Link.

To change the source of an object,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the object whose source you want to change.

3	Choose Change Source, then specify the new source file for the object.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Create and Edit Embedded Objects

Create and Edit Linked Objects


 Hint

Every time you change the source file, a corresponding change is made to the destination file.


 Hint

The destination file and object are not deleted, but the files are no longer connected. Changes to the source file will not affect the destination file.


Create and Edit Linked Objects

Edit, Paste Special

Purpose

Use Paste Special to link graphics, text, spreadsheets, and sound clips in a drawing window to another application. When you link an object, you place a copy of the object in your document with a link to the original. Linking is dynamic, meaning that whenever the original is changed, the copy is automatically updated.The data for a linked object remains in the source file.

Steps

To paste linked objects into a Presentations 3.0 document,

1	Create the object you want to link, then save the document.

2	Select the object, then choose Copy from the Edit menu.

3	Open or switch to the Presentations 3.0 document into which you want to paste the object.

4	Choose Paste Special from the Edit menu in Presentations 3.0.

5	Select Paste Link, then select the type of object you want it to be.

6	Select Display As Icon to make the object appear as an icon in the document.

7	Choose OK, choose Save As from the File menu, type a name for the destination document, then choose Save.

To edit an object linked to a Presentations 3.0 document,

1	Select, then double-click the object to open it in the application where you created it.

2	Edit the object.

3	Choose Save or Update from the File menu, then choose Exit.

To edit OLE links in a document,

1	Retrieve a drawing or slide show containing a linked object.

2	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

3	Select the link you want to edit.

4	Choose Update Now to update a manually linked object.

or

Choose Open Source to edit the object in the application in which it was created.

or

Choose Change Source to replace one linked object with another.

or

Choose Break Link to delete the link between the source file and the destination file.  (You cannot re-link the files after you choose this option.)

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Create and Edit Embedded Objects

Display OLE Objects as Icons


Create and Edit Embedded Objects

Insert, Object

Purpose

Use Object to embed text, chart data, or graphics created in another application or file in the current document. When you embed an object, you place a copy of the object in your document without a link to the original so that you can edit the copy without altering the original. When you double-click an embedded object, its source application launches (if it is installed) and you can then edit the object. The data for an embedded object is stored in the destination file.

Steps

To embed an object in a Presentations 3.0 document,

1	Choose Object from the Insert menu.

2	Choose the type of object you want to embed, select Display as Icon to display the object as an icon, then choose OK.

3	Create the object you want to insert in the new application window.

or

Open the file containing the object you want to insert.

4	Choose Update from the File menu in the application window.

5	Choose Exit & Return to OLE Object from the File menu in the application window.

6	Move and size the object.

To embed a Presentations 3.0 object in another application,

1	Create the object you want to embed.

2	Choose Save As from the File menu, then type a filename for the object.

3	Select the object, then choose Copy from the Edit menu.

4	Switch to the application into which you want to embed the object.

5	Choose Paste from the Edit menu of that application.

To edit an embedded object,

1	Select, then double-click the object to open the application where you created it.

2	Edit the object.

3	Double-click outside the object to close it.

See Also

Create and Edit Linked Objects

Display OLE Objects as Icons

In-place Editing vs. Open Editing

List OLE Links


Overlay Text on QuickArt

Purpose

You can overlay text on other objects. Some QuickArt images are designed with blank spaces so that you can overlay them with text to personalize them.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image].

2	Click once to create a full-page graphic.

3	Select a figure category and choose Figures.

4	Select the figure you want to overlay with text, then choose Insert.

5	Click [image], then drag to define a text area over the figure.

6	Choose Font from the Format menu, then select a Font Face, Font Size, Font Style, and font appearance.

7	Choose Attributes, select the text fill type, fill color, fill pattern, and outline options, then choose OK twice.

8	Type the text you want, then click outside the text area to close it.

9	Size, move, or use Perspective from the Edit menu to make the text fit in the available space.

See Also

Move Objects

Stretch and Size Objects

Use Text Areas and Text Lines

Use the QuickArt Gallery


Duplicate Objects and Areas

Purpose

Use Ctrl while dragging to duplicate objects in the current drawing window or an area in a bitmap image. Use Copy to copy an object to another drawing window.

Steps

1	Select the object(s) or bitmap area you want to duplicate.

2	Press Ctrl while dragging to the location where you want to place the copy.

See Also

Create Bitmaps

Cut, Copy, and Paste Objects and Text


Select Objects and Text

Edit, Select, Item, All, Like

Purpose

Use the options on the Select submenu to select one object, all objects, or similar objects for editing. Selected objects are surrounded by small solid squares called handles on the corners and sides.

Steps

To select one object at a time,

1	Click [image], then click the object you want to select.

2	Press Ctrl and click the remaining objects you want to select.

or

Drag to select objects in a specific area.

To select all objects in the drawing window,

1	Choose Select from the Edit menu, then choose All.

To select similar objects,

1	Select an object.

2	Choose Select from the Edit menu, then choose Like.

To select text,

1	Click [image], then double-click the text object you want to edit.

2	Drag the insertion point to block whole words.

or

Press Alt while dragging to block parts of words.

or

Place the insertion point inside a word to apply changes to that word only.

See Also

Use QuickMenus


 Hint

For example, if an arrow is selected when you choose Select Like, Presentations 3.0 selects all other arrows in the drawing, whether they are curved or straight.


Rotate Objects

Edit, Rotate

Purpose

Use Rotate to turn a selected object in any direction.

Steps

To rotate an object manually,

1	Select the object you want to rotate, right-click, then choose Rotate from the QuickMenu.

2	Drag one of the corner rotation handles in the direction you want to rotate the object.

To rotate an object by a specific degree,

1	Select the object you want to rotate, right-click, then choose Rotate from the QuickMenu.

2	Place the pointer on a corner rotation handle, then right-click.

3	Specify the number of degrees you want the object to rotate.

4	Select Copy object(s) to rotate a copy of the object and leave the original unmoved.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Flip Objects

Skew Objects

Stretch and Size Objects

Use QuickMenus


 Hint

You can change the way an object rotates by dragging its rotation axis ( [image]) away from the center of the object.

Press Shift to constrain the rotation angle to 45 degrees.

Press Ctrl while you rotate an object to make a copy of it. The selected object stays in its original position, and the copy is rotated to the degree you specify.


Skew Objects

Edit, Rotate

Purpose

Use Skew to slant a selected object horizontally or vertically.

Steps

To skew an object manually,

1	Select the object you want to skew, right-click, then choose Rotate from the QuickMenu.

2	Drag the top or bottom handles to skew the object horizontally.

or

Drag the left or right side handle to skew the object vertically.

To skew an object by a specific percentage,

1	Select the object you want to skew, right-click, then choose Rotate from the QuickMenu.

2	Place the pointer on a top or bottom handle to skew the object horizontally, or on a side handle to skew the object vertically, then right-click.

3	Specify the percent you want to skew the object.

4	Select Around Center to skew the object around its center.

5	Select Copy object(s) to skew a copy of the object and leave the original unskewed.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Rotate Objects

Stretch and Size Objects


Angle

Sets the angle of the gradient. As the degree value increases, the gradient rotates counterclockwise within the object or on the page.


 Hint

Press Ctrl while skewing to make a skewed copy of the object.

Press Alt while skewing to anchor the object in its center rather than on its side.


Stretch and Size Objects

Purpose

Use Stretch to extend a selected object horizontally or vertically, and use Size to make a selected object larger or smaller.

Steps

To stretch an object,

1	Select the object you want to stretch.

2	Place the pointer on a side handle, then right-click.

3	Specify how much you want the object stretched.

4	Select Around Center if you want to stretch the object from its center.

5	Select Copy object(s) if you want to stretch a copy of the object and leave the original the same size.

6	Choose OK.

To size an object,

1	Select the object you want to size.

2	Place the pointer on a corner handle, then right-click.

3	Specify how much larger or smaller you want the object.

4	Select Around Center if you want to size the object from its center.

5	Select Copy object(s) if you want to size a copy of the object and leave the original the same size.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Rotate Objects

Skew Objects


Edit in the Drawing Window

Edit, Edit

Purpose

Use Edit to activate text, objects, figures, charts, or bitmaps so you can edit them. You can use different tools to edit each type of object. Depending on the type of object you select, the Edit item on the Edit menu changes. For example, if a chart is selected, Edit Chart appears on the Edit menu.

Steps

1	Select, then double-click the object you want to modify.

See Also

Edit Bitmaps

Edit Charts

Edit Figures

Edit Menu

Edit Objects

Edit Text

Select Objects and Text


Return to the Slide Show

Background or Layout, Edit Slides

Purpose

Use Edit Slides to return to the current slide show.

Steps

1	Choose Edit Slides from the Power Bar.

See Also

Edit Backgrounds

Edit Layouts


Overlay an Image

Purpose

You can create combined images by retrieving one QuickArt figure on top of another.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image], then drag to create an area for the figure.

2	Select a figure category and choose Figures.

3	Select a figure, then choose Insert.

4	Repeat steps 1-3 to insert another figure.

5	Select the figures to size and position them.

See Also

Move Objects

Overlay Text

Stretch and Size Objects

Use the QuickArt Gallery


Move to a Slide

Slide, Go To

Purpose

Use Go To to open a specific slide from the current slide show.

Steps

1	Choose Go To from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the slide you want to go to.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Move to a Cell

Sort Slides


 Hint

You can also use the Slide list on the Power Bar to move directly to a slide.


Choose Environment Defaults

Edit, Preferences, Environment

Purpose

Use Environment to set the default language, startup document, beep options, and QuickList for Presentations 3.0.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Environment [image].

2	Choose an interface language for elements such as menus, dialog boxes, Help prompts, and messages.

3	Select Drawing or Slide Show as the default document Presentations 3.0 opens, or select Document Selection Dialog Box.

4	Select Error and Search Failure if you want the computer to beep when an error message comes up or a search fails.

5	Select Use Presentations 3.0 QuickList to use the default QuickList.

6	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Choose Fonts

Choose Language Modules

Start Up Presentations 3.0


Use QuickArt Backgrounds

Insert, QuickArt

Purpose

You can use QuickArt figures for backgrounds and add them to the current master.

Steps

1	Choose Edit Backgrounds from the Slide menu.

2	Choose Add Background, type a name for the background, then choose OK.

3	Click [image] then [image], then click in the drawing window to define the figure area as the entire window.

4	Select a figure to use as a background, then choose Insert.

5	Add elements such as text, bitmaps, charts, drawing objects, and other figures that you want to appear on the background.

6	Size and position the objects as desired.

7	Choose Edit Slides from the Power Bar.

See Also

Create Bitmaps

Create Data Charts

Drawing Tools Menu

Use Text Areas and Text Lines

Use the QuickArt Gallery


Start Up Presentations 3.0

Purpose

Use Start Up to tell Presentations 3.0 what file you want to work on.

Steps

1	Select Create a New Drawing to begin a new drawing.

or

Select Create a New Slide Show to begin a new slide show.

or

Select Create a Slide Show Using Show Expert to get step-by-step guidance in creating a new slide show.

or

Select Work on an Existing File, select the file you want to work on, then choose Open.

or

Select Work on the Last File to open the last slide show or drawing file you worked on.

2	Choose Coach for step-by-step assistance.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Create New Slide Shows

Managing Files

Set Default Preferences


Add QuickArt to Charts

Purpose

You can create a chart, then retrieve it and overlay it with QuickArt figures. Choose your figures carefully to avoid cluttering your chart.

Steps

To create the chart,

1	Click [image] then [image] on the tool palette, then click in the drawing window to define the chart area as the entire window.

2	Select the type of chart you want to use, deselect Use Sample Data, then choose OK.

3	Type your data or retrieve it.

4	Customize your chart as you want it to appear.

5	Click outside the chart.

To add QuickArt to the chart,

1	Click [image] then [image], then drag diagonally across part of the chart to define a figure area.

2	Select a figure category, select a figure, then choose Insert.

3	Repeat steps 1-2 to insert and place the other figures you want to use on the chart.

4	Select a figure, then size and position it on the chart.

5	Repeat steps 1-4 to size and position the other QuickArt figures.

See Also

Chart Menu

Create Data Charts

Move Objects

Stretch and Size Objects

Use the QuickArt Gallery


Use QuickArt with Text

Purpose

When creating a slide with a lot of text, you can add QuickArt figures for emphasis.

Steps

To create a title and text,

1	Click [image], then drag diagonally across the window to define a text area for a title.

2	Choose Font from the Format menu, select a Font Face, Font Style, and Font Size, then choose OK.

3	Type your title, then click outside the text area to close it.

4	Repeat steps 1-3 to create a text area for the body of your slide.

To draw a line between the title and body,

1	Choose Line Attributes from the Format menu, choose the options you want to apply to the line, then choose OK.

2	Click [image].

3	Draw the line to separate the title from the rest of the slide.

To add QuickArt figures,

1	Click [image] then [image], then drag diagonally across the window to define a figure area.

2	Select a figure category, select a figure, then choose Insert.

3	Repeat steps 1-2 to insert and place the other figures you want to use.

4	Select a figure, then size and position it in relation to the text.

6	Repeat steps 4-5 to size and position the other figures.

See Also

Align Objects

Drawing Lines

Use Text Areas and Text Lines

Use the QuickArt Gallery


Create QuickArt Bullets

Purpose

Use QuickArt figures as bullets in bullet charts. Many of the figures can be used in place of a typical round bullet on a text chart. Figures can add interest to your text chart and underscore the importance of an idea.

Steps

To create the bullet chart,

1	Click [image] then [image], then click in the drawing window to define the chart area as the entire window.

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, choose Spacing, select the spacing you want, then choose OK.

3	Type your text.

4	Right-click, choose Define Bullets/Fonts from the QuickMenu, choose Font, then set the font, color, and justification for each level.

5	Select Bullets, select the bullet character, then press Delete.

6	Choose OK.

To add figures as bullets,

1	Click [image] then [image], then drag diagonally to define a figure area in front of the first item on the list.

2	Select the figure category you want, select a figure, then choose Insert.

3	Select the figure, then size and position it in relation to the text.

5	Select the figure, then press Ctrl while dragging it in front of the remaining items to make copies of it.

6	Select all the figure bullets, choose Align from the Graphics menu, then choose Center Left/Right.

7	Choose Space Evenly from the Graphics menu, then choose Top/Bottom to evenly space the figures to match your text lines.

See Also

Center Objects

Create Bullet Charts

Design Bullet Charts

Move Objects

Space Objects Evenly

Use the QuickArt Gallery


Choose Language Modules

Edit, Preferences, Language

Purpose

Use Language to select a language module to use in entering and editing text. Language does not change the interface language, but it does tell Presentations 3.0 which language module to use for Spell-Checker, Thesaurus, Dates, and so on. To change the interface language, choose Environment.

      	At least one additional language module must be installed in order to use this feature. You can purchase language modules separately.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Language [image].

2	Choose a language code.

or

Choose Other, then specify a language code.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Choose Environment Defaults

Spell-Check Text

Use the Thesaurus


Create Pictographs

Purpose

Use QuickArt figures to replace bars and add interest to bar charts. A pictograph is a bar chart that uses images instead of bars.

Steps

To create the bar chart,

1	Click [image], then click in the drawing window to define the chart area as the entire window.

2	Select Bar, select the style you want, deselect Use Sample Data, then choose OK.

3	Enter your data in the Datasheet.

4	Customize your chart as you want it to appear.

5	Click outside the chart to close it.

To add figures to the chart,

1	Click [image] then [image], then drag diagonally to define a figure area.

2	Select the figure category you want, select a figure, then choose Insert.

3	Select the figure.

4	Size the figure, then move it over one of the bars.

5	Repeat steps 1-3 to insert and place the other figures you want to use on the bars of the chart.

6	Select all the figures on a bar, choose Space Evenly from the Graphics menu, then choose Top/Bottom.

To remove the original bars,

1	Select the chart.

2	Choose Separate from the Graphics menu, then choose OK.

3	Click outside the exploded chart to deselect it.

4	Click each part of the bar, then choose Delete from the Edit menu.

5	Repeat step 4 to delete the other bars.

See Also

Change Charts into Objects

Create Data Charts

Move Objects

Stretch and Size Objects

Use the QuickArt Gallery


File Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the File menu to manage and print documents, open and close windows, and to mail and publish documents.

These are the File menu options for the drawing window and charts:

New

Open

Close

Save

Save As

Print

Send

Publish

Exit

These are the File menu options for bitmaps:

Cancel

Return

See Also

Set Default Preferences


Create New Documents

File, New

Purpose

Use New to open a blank drawing window for a drawing or slide show.

Steps

1	Choose New from the File menu.

2	Select Create a New Drawing to create a drawing (.wpg file), then choose OK.

or

Select Create a New Slide Show to create a slide show (.shw file), choose a master and a template, then choose OK.

or

Select Create a Slide Show Using Show Expert to let Presentations 3.0 walk you through creating a slide show, then choose OK.

or

Select Work on an Existing File, choose OK, specify a file you have already saved, then choose Open.

or

Select Work on Last File, select the file you want to work on, then choose OK.

See Also

Insert Files

Open Documents

Start Up Presentations 3.0


 Hint

If you have enough memory available, you can open up to nine drawing windows at the same time.


Clear the Drawing Window

Edit, Clear

Purpose

Use Clear to erase objects in the current slide or slide show without opening a new window. Clear does not return temporary settings to the defaults. For backgrounds and layouts, use Clear to erase objects in the current master.

Steps

1	Choose Clear from the Edit menu.

2	In the drawing window, select Slide Show to clear your entire slide show.

or

Select Slide to clear the current slide only.

3	For layouts or backgrounds, select Master to clear your entire master.

or

Select Current Layout or Background to clear the current screen only.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Clear Bitmaps

Clear the Datasheet

Close Documents

Delete Objects and Text

Exit Presentations 3.0


 Hint

Retrieving a graphics file by choosing Open from the File menu disables the slide show mode. Convert to Slide Show converts a single image to a slide in a slide show and restores the slide show mode.


Close Documents

File, Close

Purpose

Use Close to exit the active drawing window and save the file if you have made changes, without exiting Presentations 3.0.

Steps

To close an unmodified document,

1	Choose Close from the File menu.

To close a document that is new or has been modified,

1	Choose Close from the File menu.

2	Choose Yes, specify the drive and directory where you want the file to be saved, type a filename, then choose Save.

or

Choose No to close the document without saving the changes.

See Also

Clear the Drawing Window

Exit Presentations 3.0

Save Documents

Save Documents as New Files


Drawing Floor Plans
Draw Floor Plans

Purpose

You can use the architecture QuickArt figures to design floor plans, create landscaping, or draw buildings. Use Grid and Snap to Grid to help you draw with precision.

Steps

1	Choose Grid/Snap from the View menu, then choose Grid.

2	Choose Grid/Snap from the View menu, then choose Snap to Grid.

3	Click [image], then select a line width.

4	Click [image], then draw the walls of your floor plan, leaving openings for doors and windows.

5	Click [image] then [image], then drag diagonally to define a figure area.

6	Select the Architecture category.

7	Select a figure such as a table, door, tree, and so on, then choose Insert.

8	Size the figure, then move it to position it in the plan.

9	Select an object such as the patio area, choose Fill from the Format menu, select a pattern, then choose OK.

10	Repeat steps 5-9 to insert, position, and edit the other figures you want to use in the plan.

See Also

Choose Fills for Objects

Duplicate Objects and Areas

Flip Objects

Move Objects

Stretch and Size Objects

Use the QuickArt Gallery


Save Documents

File, Save

Purpose

Use Save to save new or modified drawings or slide shows without closing the active drawing window or quitting Presentations 3.0. Unless you save your bitmaps, charts, drawings, figures, and text as a file, they will no longer exist when you exit Presentations 3.0.

Steps

To save a new document,

1	Choose Save from the File menu.

2	Select a drive and directory.

3	Type a filename.

4	Choose Save.

To save changes to a modified document,

1	Choose Save from the File menu.

See Also

Close Documents

Exit Presentations 3.0

Save Documents as New Files


Scan Images into Presentations 3.0

 Insert, Acquire Image

Purpose

Use Acquire Image to scan an image (photograph, drawing, and so on) directly into Presentations 3.0 as a bitmap image where you can size, rotate, and skew the image, or double-click it to edit it with the bitmap tools.

      	You must have an image scanner with a TWAIN compatible driver. Each scanner has different capabilities which will affect how you can use it. Please refer to your image scanner manual for more information.

Steps

1	Choose Acquire Image from the Insert menu.

2	Select Page Bounded, Area Bounded, or Fixed Size to size your image to the scanning area.

3	Select Close Image Source After Acquiring Image to exit your scanning software after scanning the image.

4	Consult your scanner software documentation for instructions on manipulating the image and pasting it to Presentations 3.0.

See Also

Edit Bitmaps

Set Up a Scanner


Set Up a Scanner

Insert, Select Image Source

Purpose

Use Image Source Setup to select your image scanning device.

      	You must have an image scanner connected to your computer to use this feature. Depending on the scanner you are using, the dialog box will vary. Choose the Help button in the dialog box for more information, or consult your scanner manual.

Steps

1	Choose Select Image Source from the Insert menu.

2	Highlight the image scanner you want, then choose Select.

See Also

Scan Images into Presentations 3.0


Open Documents

File, Open

Purpose

Use Open to open as many as nine previously saved documents in separate windows in Presentations 3.0.

Steps

1	Choose Open from the File menu.

2	Specify the file you want to open.

3	Choose Open.

See Also

Insert Files

Save Documents


Insert Files

Insert, File

Purpose

Use Insert File to insert files (charts, bitmaps, text and figures) into the current slide show.

Steps

To retrieve and insert a document,

1	Choose File from the Insert menu.

2	Select the filename of the file you want.

3	Choose Retrieve.

To retrieve and insert text,

1	Choose [image], drag to define the insertion area, then choose File from the Insert menu.

2	Follow steps 2 and 3 above.

To retrieve and insert a figure,

1	Choose [image] then [image], then drag to define the insertion area.

or

Click once to define a full-page figure area.

2	Select a figure category, choose Figures, then select the figure you want.

or

Choose Other File, then specify the figure file you want.

3	Choose Insert.

See Also

Use Text Areas and Text Lines

Use the QuickArt Gallery


Format Pages

Format, Page, Size/Margins

Purpose

Use Size/Margins to set the page size, margins, whitespace amount, and printing orientation for the current document or as defaults.

Steps

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Size/Margins from the QuickMenu.

2	Choose a pre-defined paper size.

or

Specify a custom Width and Height.

3	Specify new margin settings.

4	Select Size View to Fit Graphic, then specify the amount of whitespace you want to display around graphics imported into other applications.

5	Select a printing orientation.

6	Choose Use as Default to use the current settings as defaults.

7	Choose OK.

8	Select the sizing option you want if you have changed the page size of a previously saved document, then choose OK.

See Also

Choose Page Colors

Poster


Make Faces

Insert, QuickArt

Purpose

Use the QuickArt Gallery to choose various facial shapes, eyes, noses, and mouths to create faces you want to add to your drawings.

Steps

1	Click [image] then [image], then drag diagonally to define a figure area.

2	Select the Faces category, select a head, then choose Insert.

3	Repeat steps 2 and 3 to insert the facial features you want.

4	Select each facial feature, then size and position it on the face.

5	Flip, rotate, and skew the images to make them fit better or to create special effects.

6	Right-click the drawing window, then choose Select All from the QuickMenu.

7	Choose Group from the Graphics menu to convert the face into a single figure you can move, size, and rotate as a whole.

8	Double-click the face when you want to edit it.

See Also

Flip Objects

Group Objects

Rotate Objects

Stretch and Size Objects

Use the QuickArt Gallery


Use Foreground and Background Colors in Bitmaps

All patterns consist of two colors--a foreground color and a background color. You can press the Ctrl key to quickly reverse these colors when creating or editing a bitmap image.

For example, suppose you are using the rectangle tool to create an image that resembles a brick wall. After selecting the rectangle tool, you select the brick pattern from the Fill Pattern palette, then you select gray as the foreground color (for gray mortar) and red as the background color (for red bricks). But wait, suppose you change your mind and want gray bricks with red mortar. Instead of having to select new foreground and background colors, you can hold down the Ctrl key while drawing the rectangle to reverse the current foreground and background colors. When you release the Ctrl key, the colors return to the previous setting.

See Also

Bitmaps vs. Vector Objects

Edit Bitmaps


Choose Page Colors

Format, Page, Color, Solid or Gradient

Purpose

Use Page Color to select a solid or gradient background color for the current document for as the default.

Steps

To choose a solid background color,

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Color from the QuickMenu.

2	Select Solid, then select a page color.

3	Choose Use as Default to use the current settings as defaults.

4	Choose OK.

To choose a gradient background color,

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Color from the QuickMenu.

2	Select Gradient.

3	Select a Center Color and an Outer Color.

4	Choose a gradient Type, then specify the Angle the colors will slant on.

5	Select Auto-Step Blending or specify the amount of Fixed Blending you want.

6	Specify X and Y Center values to position the center of the gradient.

7	Choose Use as Default to use the current settings as defaults.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Fills for Objects

Format Pages


Size Bitmap Frames

Purpose

If you run out of room while creating bitmaps, you can enlarge the bitmap frame. Changing the size of the frame not only alters the bitmap image, but also changes its size and position when you return it to the drawing window.

You can also use the bitmap frame to cut away parts of the bitmap image, such as extra white space or unwanted parts of the image.

      	Any part of the image moved outside the resized frame is deleted when you return the bitmap image to the drawing window.

Steps

To enlarge the frame,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Move the pointer over one of the handles until it changes to a double arrow.

3	Drag the corner handles to size the bitmap frame proportionally.

or

Drag the side handles to stretch the frame.

4	Click Close to close the bitmap.

To crop the bitmap,

1	Move the pointer over any handle of the bitmap frame until it changes to a double arrow.

2	Drag the frame over the unwanted portion of the image.

3	Click Close to close the bitmap.

See Also

Create Bitmaps

Edit Bitmaps


 Hint

The values represent (in percentage) how far your pattern is displaced from the left and top of the screen. For the X axis, 0 is the left edge, 50 is mid-screen, and 100 is the right edge. For the Y axis, 0 is the top, 50 is mid-screen, and 100 is the bottom.


Move Bitmap Areas

Purpose

Use Select Area to designate the area of the bitmap image you want to move to another location.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Click [image].

3	Drag the pointer to designate the area you want to move.

4	Drag the area to where you want it.

5	Click outside the selected area to deselect it.

See Also

Clear Bitmaps

Edit Bitmaps

Size Bitmap Frames


 Hint

For example, if you have plotted data in four columns, with each column representing a financial quarter in the year, type 2 as the Number to Forecast to forecast two quarters ahead, then choose OK.


Create Posters

Format, Page, Size/Margins, Poster

Purpose

Use Poster to enlarge your current drawing, text, or chart and print it across several pages. You can print only individual drawings as posters; if you open or create a slide show, Poster will be dimmed. You can also make posters from slides.

Steps

To create a poster,

1	Choose New from the File menu, then choose Drawing.

or

Retrieve a drawing saved as a .WPG file.

2	Create your poster.

3	Right-click the drawing window and choose Size/Margins from the QuickMenu.

4	Click the Poster button and drag to specify how many pages across and down you want your poster to be. The maximum size for a poster is 6 rows by 6 columns.

5	Choose OK.

To make a poster from a slide,

1	Create or retrieve the slide you want.

2	Choose Save As from the File menu, then type a filename for your poster.

3	Select WPG as the Format, then choose Save.

4	Choose Open from the File menu, select the name of your poster, then choose Open.

5	Right-click the drawing window and choose Page Format from the QuickMenu.

6	Choose Poster, specify the poster size in pages, then choose OK.

See Also

Format Pages

Open Documents

Print Documents


Set Default Preferences

Edit, Preferences

Purpose

Use Preferences to change your default settings.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu.

2	Double-click the icons and make any changes you want.

3	Choose Close.

Choose from the following options for more information:

	Files
	Environment
	Display
	Date Format
	Language
	Keyboard
	Menu Bar
	Toolbar
	Slide Show
	Print
	Backup

See Also

Choose Page Colors

Choose Fonts

Format Pages


Set Backup Defaults

Edit, Preferences, Backup

Purpose

Use Backup to select backup options to save your files automatically and prevent loss in the event of power outages or machine failures. Backup options affect documents in the drawing window, but do not work for active charts or bitmaps. Timed Document Backup continues working while you switch to other applications, so the application you are using may slow down during the backup interval.

Steps

To set backup defaults,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Backup [image].

2	Select Timed Document Backup, then specify the number of minutes between backups.

3	Select Original Document Backup.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close.

To recover a backed-up document,

1	Start Presentations 3.0 again.

To recover a file saved as a .BAK backup file,

1	Open the file.

2	Specify a new name without a .BAK extension.

If you turn off Original Document Backup, the next time you save a file, any backup files with the same filename are deleted. Recover any original backup files you want before you turn off Original Backup.

See Also

Choose Default Directories


 Hint

If there are any existing backup files when you open Presentations 3.0, a dialog box appears asking if you want to Rename, Delete, or Open existing backup files. Choose any of these options to continue.

If you choose Delete, there is no way to recover the deleted file (short of using a disk utility application).


Choose Display Defaults

Edit, Preferences, Display

Purpose

Use Display to change the default settings for display options.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Change any of the following default display settings:

Display Ruler on Startup

Display Grid on Startup

Display Pointer Position

Auto Select Drawn Item

Crosshair Pointer

Hide Pointer While Drawing

Snap to Grid Point

Display Menu Shortcut Keys

Display Last Open Filenames

Units of Measure

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Choose Environment Defaults

Display in Draft Mode


Display Ruler on Startup

Displays the Ruler each time you enter Presentations 3.0.

To hide the Ruler temporarily, choose Ruler from the View menu. Choose Ruler again when you want to turn it back on.


Make Bitmap Colors Transparent

Insert, Bitmap, Format, Color

Purpose

Use Color Attributes to make a bitmap color transparent so that objects under the color show through. You can designate only one color at a time as transparent. The transparent color appears as gray crosshatch while you are editing the bitmap.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate bitmaps:

2	Choose Color Attributes from the Format menu.

3	Select Bitmap Transparent Color, then choose a color from the Color palette.

4	Select Transparent Color On.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Colors

Create Bitmaps

Edit Bitmaps


Display Grid on Startup

Displays the grid each time you enter Presentations 3.0.

To turn off the Grid temporarily, choose Grid/Snap from the View menu, then choose Grid. Choose Grid again when you want to turn it back on.


Size Text

Purpose

When working in a text area, Presentations 3.0 sizes the area for you to accommodate the amount of text you type. When returned to the drawing window, text becomes an object that you can size and move as you would a drawing object. When you size text this way, it stretches or expands and contracts like a drawing object.

Steps

To size text areas,

1	Click [image], then drag to create a small text area.

2	Fill the text area with text.  The area expands downward as long as you type.

3	Click outside the text area to close it.

To size text objects,

1	Click anywhere outside the text area.

2	Select the text object.

3	Drag a corner handle to size the text proportionally.

or

Drag a side handle to stretch the text horizontally, or a top or bottom handle to stretch it vertically.

See Also

Edit Text

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Snap to Grid Point

Automatically aligns created, modified, or moved objects to grid points. Selecting this option will turn on Snap to Grid Point each time you enter Presentations 3.0.

To turn off the Snap to Grid Point option temporarily, choose Grid/Snap from the View menu, then choose Snap to Grid. Choose Snap to Grid again when you want to turn it back on.


Position Text as Superscript or Subscript

Format, Font, Position

Purpose

Use Font to position lines of text as superscripts or subscripts.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Place the insertion point where you want to begin typing superscript or subscript text.

or

Select the text you want changed.

3	Choose Font from the Format menu.

4	Choose Superscript or Subscript from as a Position option.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Change the Relative Size of Text


Crosshair Pointer

Helps you create, align, and size objects with precision. A crosshair pointer replaces the pointer and displays as a plus sign that extends the length and width of the drawing window.

To temporarily turn off the Crosshair Pointer, choose Crosshair from the View menu. Choose Crosshair again when you want to turn it back on.


Change the Relative Size of Text

Format, Font, Relative Size

Purpose

Use Font to change the size of text relative to the rest of the text in a text area or text line. You can select from several options to make text fine, small, normal, large, very large, or extra large compared to other text in the same font.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Place the insertion point where you want to type text in a different size.

or

Select the text you want changed.

3	Choose Font from the Format menu.

4	Choose a relative size option.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Position Text as Superscript or Subscript


Hide Pointer While Drawing

Turns off the display of the pointer while you draw objects.


Auto Select Drawn Item

Automatically selects objects as soon as you finish drawing them.


Units of Measure

Sets the units used for displaying and entering values in dialog boxes, and the units used in the grid and ruler.


Rearrange Text

Purpose

You can select any active text and drag it to a new position. For example, you can quickly rearrange the order of bullets in a bullet chart by simply dragging bullet text to a new position.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Select the text you want to move.

3	Drag the selected text to a new position.

A flashing bar indicates the position the text will take when you release the mouse button.

See Also

Create Bullet Charts

Edit Text


Display Pointer Position

Displays the position of the pointer in all new documents. The position display appears at the bottom right of the screen.

To turn off the position display temporarily, choose Position Display from the View menu. Choose Position Display from the View menu again when you want to turn it back on.


Align Text

Format, Line or Paragraph

Purpose

Use the Align options to make text line up within text areas. When you align text, you affect the current line. In the case of Indent, you affect the current paragraph. You can also apply Center or Flush Right to the lines that you select. These commands change the first line of your text in which any characters are selected, and the last line that is entirely selected, but not necessarily all the characters you select.

Steps

To align text in a text area,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Place the insertion point in the text where you want the alignment change to begin.

3	Choose Line or Paragraph from the Format menu, then choose an alignment option.

4	Type your text, then press Enter to end the feature.

See Also

Edit Text

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Display Menu Shortcut Keys

Displays keystrokes next to the feature names on the menus. For example, Ctrl+W for WordPerfect Characters.


Display Last Open Filenames

Displays filenames of the last four files you worked on. The filenames are listed at the bottom of the File menu, and you can re-open the files by clicking them.


Choose Default Directories

Edit, Preferences, Files

Purpose

Use Files to tell Presentations 3.0 where to store and access your files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Files [image].

2	Specify the pathname for the following categories:

Backup Files

Drawings/Slide Shows

Figures/QuickArt

Masters/Galleries

Macros

Sound Clips

Quick Galleries

Color Palettes

Keyboards/Menus/Toolbars

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Toolbar Editor

Keyboard Editor

Menu Bar Editor

Save and Retrieve Color Palettes


 Hint

If you do not specify a Backup directory, Presentations 3.0 saves all backup files in the directory where Presentations 3.0 program files are located.


Backup Files

The directory for your timed backup files. Original document backup files are stored in the same directory as the original file. Location of Files does not affect them.


Macros

The directory for your macro (.wcm) files


Drawing/Slide Shows

The directory for your drawing (.wpg) and slide show (.shw) files


Masters/Galleries

The directory for your master (.mst) and gallery (.shw) files


Figures/QuickArt

The directory for your figure (.wpg) and QuickArt files


Sound Clips

The directory for your sound (.wav, .mid, .avi) files


Quick Galleries

The directory for your quick gallery files. Quick Gallery files contain bitmap representations of your gallery files, which Presentations 3.0 uses to speed up gallery display.


Keyboards/Menus/Toolbars

The directory for your keyboard layout, Toolbar, and menu bar files


Choose Print Defaults

Edit, Preferences, Print

Purpose

Use Preferences Print to change the default print options.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Print [image].

2	Specify the number of copies you want to print as a default.

3	Choose Presentations 3.0 or the printer to generate print jobs.

4	Specify the amount of space you want to leave on the left margin for binding.

5	Select Adjust Image to Print Black and White to make images print more cleanly in black and white.

6	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Choose What to Print

Print Documents


Color Palettes

Use Color Palettes to specify which directory your color palette files are in.


 Hint

For example, if you want to print five copies of each document every time you print, then change the default number to 5.


Check Grammar

Tools, Grammatik

Purpose

Use Grammatik to check your document for spelling, grammar, punctuation errors, and style flaws.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Choose Grammatik from the Tools menu.

3	If you want help on a Grammatik feature, choose Contents from the Grammatik Help menu.

or

Choose Grammatik to open Grammatik Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy the GKW60US.HLP file that came with your application to your Presentations 3.0 directory.

See Also

Spell-Check Text

Use the Thesaurus


Choose Slide Show Defaults

Edit, Preferences, Slide Show

Purpose

Use Slide Show to set the starting view, the number of slides per row that are shown in the Slide Sorter, and the default master and template for all new slide shows.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Slide Show [image].

2	Choose from the following slide views:

Slide Editor

Slide Outliner

Slide List

Slide Sorter

3	Specify a default master file, then choose a default template.

4	Select Use Slide Show Options Dialog Box to use the settings from this dialog box for your slide shows.

5	Specify the number of slides you want the Slide Sorter to display per row.

6	Choose Save Slide List Layout on Exit to make the Slide List stay as you left it.

7	Select page settings and margins.

8	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Sort Slides

Use the Master Gallery


Print Documents

File, Print

Purpose

Use Print to select print options and to print drawings, slide shows, and other documents from the screen or disk.

You can use Print with the same Windows printer driver that you use with other Windows applications. You must select a Windows printer before you can print in Presentations 3.0.

Steps

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Print from the QuickMenu.

2	Select the options you want for your print job.

3	Choose Print.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Current Printer

Print Document Options

Number of Copies

Generated By

Binding Offset

Adjust for Printing

Slide Range

See Also

View Documents Before Printing


Select a Printer

File, Print

Purpose

Use Select to change the current printer.

      	You must select a Windows printer before you can print in Presentations 3.0.

Steps

To see which printer is selected,

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Print from the QuickMenu.

To select a different printer,

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Print from the QuickMenu.

2	Choose Select from the Print dialog box.

3	Select the Printer you want to use.

4	Choose Select to make this printer the current printer.

5	Choose Setup to select setup options, then choose OK.

6	Choose Print.

See Also

Print Documents


Choose What to Print

File, Print

Purpose

Use the Print pop-up list in the Print dialog box to specify which documents, or what portion of the documents, you want to print.

Steps

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Print from the QuickMenu.

2	Choose from the following options:

Full Page

Current View

Slides

Slide List

Handouts

Speaker Notes

Selected Objects

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Print Documents


Full Page

Prints the current drawing or slide


Current View

Prints only what is currently shown on your screen. For example, if your document is in Zoom In view, Current View prints only the portion of your document that is currently showing on the screen.


Slides

Prints all or part of a slide show


Slide List

Prints the title and options used for each slide in a slide show


Handouts

Prints accompanying handouts for a slide show. Specify the number of slides you want on each handout page. Choose the pages you want to print. Select Print Slide Title or Print Slide Number to print titles and numbers with each slide. Selecting both places the title to the right and the number to the left under each slide; selecting one centers it under the slide.


Speaker Notes

Prints thumbnail sketches with notes for each slide. Specify the number of thumbnail sketches and speaker notes you want on each page. Choose the pages you want to print. Select Print Slide Title or Print Slide Number to print titles and numbers with each slide. Selecting both places the title to the right and the number to the left under each slide; selecting one centers it under the slide.


Selected Objects

Prints only the objects you select from within a group of objects


Export Text

File, Save As

Purpose

Use Save As to save text created in Presentations 3.0 in a different text format.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Select the text you want to save in a text area or text line.

3	Choose Save As from the File menu.

4	Choose a format.

5	Specify the drive and directory.

6	Type a filename for the text file.

7	Choose Save.

See Also

Retrieve Text Files


Change a Series Color

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Series

Purpose

You can change a series color in a chart. This is useful when you want to use brighter colors for important data and darker colors for minor data. You can also use a fill pattern or gradient in a chart. This is useful if you are printing in black and white or if you want to focus your readers' attention on important data.

Steps

To choose a new series color ,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Select a series in the chart.

3	Click [image], then choose a color for the series.

To choose a fill pattern or gradient,

1	Select a series in the chart.

2	Click [image], then select a pattern or gradient for the series.

3	Click [image], select a foreground color, then right-click the background color.

See Also

Choose Series Options


Add More Information to Organization Charts

Insert, Org Chart

Purpose

You can add additional information, such as a telephone number, a FAX number, or a department name, to any position in your organization chart. Keep any additional information short and simple to avoid cluttering your chart with too much text.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Move the insertion point to the end of the position to which you want to add information, then press Enter.

3	Press Backspace to delete the paragraph number codes.

4	Type a name, title, telephone number, or other information.

5	Right-click the chart and Text Chart Outliner to choose editing options from the QuickMenu.

6	Choose Redraw to view your changes.

7	Click outside the chart to close it.

See Also

Create Organization Charts

Design Organization Charts


Create Linear Regression Trend Charts

Insert, Data Chart, Bar

Purpose

You can create a linear regression trend chart to predict such things as future costs or sales potential. By using a statistical function and data plotted on a chart, you can calculate a trend line.

Steps

1	Create a 3-D bar chart with your data.

2	Size the Datasheet.

3	Select a cell in a blank row where you want the results of the trend to appear.

4	Choose Formulas from the Data menu, then select Fit Linear.

5	Type the number of the row that contains the data to which you want to apply the formula.

6	Specify the number you want to forecast beyond the last column of data, then choose OK.

7	Add additional labels to the Datasheet if the number you forecast was 1 or more.

8	Size or move the Datasheet to view the chart.

9	Add a chart title, legend, and other options, then click outside the chart to close it.

See Also

Change Series Types

Choose Legend Options

Create and Edit Chart Titles


Change Series Types

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Layout

Purpose

Use Series to change the characteristics of a selected series. Sometimes you may find that a series (a row of data) in a chart is better displayed as a bar, line, or area. Changing a series adds emphasis to the data.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Double-click the series you want to change.

3	Select the series type you want for the series.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Change a Series Color

Choose Series Options


Change Bar Shapes

Insert, Data Chart, select Bar, Chart, Series

Purpose

Use Series to display a variety of bar shapes to add interest and emphasis to a bar chart.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Double-click the series you want to change.

3	Select the bar shape you want.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Change a Series Color

Choose Series Options


Use Two Y Axes

Insert, Data Chart, Chart, Axis

Purpose

Use Axis to create a chart with two different Y axes. You can use two Y axes to compare series of data that differ in numeric type. For example, you could measure dollars on the Y1 axis and units sold on the Y2 axis.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Double-click a series.

3	Select Y2 as the axis for this series.

4	Choose a different series Type to further distinguish the data on the Y2 axis from the data on the Y1 axis.

5	Choose OK.

6	Double-click the Y2 axis, set the axis options you want, then choose OK.

See Also

Choose Series Options

Create Data Charts


Edit Bulleted Items

Edit, Edit Chart

Purpose

You can edit any bullet chart that you create by adding, deleting, and changing bullet levels. You can also delete a bullet character at any level in a chart.

Steps

To activate the chart,

1	Select, then double-click the bullet chart you want to edit.

To add a bullet to a chart,

1	Place the insertion point at the end of the line above where you want to add the new bullet.

2	Press Enter, then type the text you want for that bullet.

To delete a bullet from a chart,

1	Place the insertion point at the end of the line above where you want to delete a bullet, then drag downward to select the bullet and text you want to delete.

2	Press Delete.

To delete a bullet character,

1	Right-click the bullet chart, then choose Define Bullets/Fonts.

2	Select Bullets, select a bullet level, then delete the bullet character(s).

3	Choose OK.

To change a bullet level,

1	Place the insertion point at the beginning of the text of the bullet you want to change.

2	Press Tab to move the bullet down a level (to the right).

or

Press Shift+Tab move the bullet up a level (to the left).

See Also

Create Bullet Charts

Define Bullets

Design Bullet Charts


Use Background Slides

Templates, Background

Purpose

Use a background slide when you do not want a layout for text or charts. After selecting a background template, you can add charts, drawings, QuickArt, or text to make a slide.

Steps

1	Choose a background from the templates list on the Power Bar.

2	Click [image].

3	Type a description of the slide's contents.

4	Click [image].

5	Add drawings, charts, QuickArt, text areas, or text lines to the background.

See Also

Add Background

Create Slide Shows

Edit Backgrounds


Use Title Slides

Templates, Title

Purpose

Use a title slide to introduce your subject or serve as a divider between subjects in your slide show.

Steps

1	Choose Title from the template list on the Power Bar.

2	Click [image].

3	Type a title and subtitle.

4	Click [image].

5	Double-click the text areas to edit them.

6	Click outside either text box to close it.

See Also

Choose Fonts

Edit Text


Change Level Justification in Bullet Charts

Insert, Bullet Chart, Format, Define Bullets/Fonts, Bullets

Purpose

Use Level Justification to justify the text at each level in your bullet chart.

Steps

1	Select and right-click the bullet chart, then choose Define Bullets/Fonts.

2	Select Font, then select a level.

3	Select the justification you want.

4	Repeat steps 2-3 to change the justification for the other bullet levels in your chart.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Fonts for Bullet Charts

Define Bullets

Edit Bulleted Items


Print a Range of Pages

File, Print

Purpose

Use Range to specify the pages you want to print. Range is dimmed when you are working on a drawing.

Steps

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Print from the QuickMenu.

2	Deselect Full Range, then specify the Starting and Ending page numbers of the pages you want to print.

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Print Documents


Print Multiple Copies

File, Print

Purpose

Use Number of Copies to print more than one copy of your document.

Steps

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Print from the QuickMenu.

2	Specify the number of copies you want to print.

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Choose Print Defaults

Generate Print Jobs

Print Documents


Generate Print Jobs

File, Print

Purpose

Use Generated By to let your printer quickly process multiple copy printings.

      	Your printer must have the capability to generate a print job in order to use this feature.

Steps

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Print from the QuickMenu.

2	Choose Presentations 3.0.

or

Choose Printer.

or

Select Network for network copies.

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Choose Print Defaults

Print Documents

Print Multiple Copies


Choose a Binding Offset

File, Print

Purpose

Use Binding Offset to shift the objects on a page away from the bound edge. For example, 2" moves the contents of each page two inches from the bound edge or inside margin.

Steps

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Print from the QuickMenu.

2	Specify the amount of space to leave for binding.

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Print Documents


Adjust for Printing

File, Print, Adjust Image to Print Black and White, Don't Print Background

Purpose

You can adjust your document to print more clearly on monochrome printers. Use Adjust Image to Print Black and White to adapt your colored drawing or slide for printing in black and white. Use Don't Print Background to print only the objects and layout of your document without the background colors.

Steps

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Print from the QuickMenu.

2	Select Adjust Image to Print Black and White.

3	Select Don't Print Background.

4	Choose Print.

See Also

Choose What to Print

Display in Draft Mode


 Hint

If you are printing to a laser printer and your drawing does not print completely, your printer may not have enough memory.


View Documents Before Printing

File, Print, View

Purpose

Use View to display your document as it will appear when printed.

Steps

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Print from the QuickMenu.

2	Choose View.

3	Click anywhere on the screen to return to the Print dialog box.

See Also

Print Documents


Save Documents as New Files

File, Save As

Purpose

Use Save As to save your work as a new file without closing the active drawing window or quitting Presentations 3.0. You can change the filename or path to which you save a file, or save the file in another format.

Steps

1	Choose Save As from the File menu.

2	Choose a format if you want to save the document to a format other than a Presentations 3.0 file.

3	Specify the drive and directory where you want the saved file.

4	Type a filename.

5	Choose Save.

See Also

Save Documents as Bitmaps


Use Bullet Chart Slides

Templates, Bullet Chart

Purpose

Use bullet chart slides to effectively summarize and reinforce major points in a slide show.

Steps

1	Choose Bullet Chart from the template list on the Power Bar.

2	Click [image].

3	Type a title and subtitle.

4	Click [image].

5	Double-click the title and subtitle text areas to edit them.

6	Double-click the bullets text area, then type in the text for the first bullet.

7	Press Enter to add another bullet item on the same level.

or

Press Enter, Tab to add a subordinate level bullet.

or

Press Enter, Shift+Tab to add a superior level bullet.

8	Continue adding bullets until your chart is complete, then click outside the chart to close it.

See Also

Create Bullet Charts

Edit Bulleted Items


Save Documents as Bitmaps

File, Save As, Format

Purpose

You can save slides as bitmaps and edit them as bitmaps or export them to another application.

Steps

1	Choose Save As from the File menu.

2	Select a bitmap format (.BMP, .PCX, .TIF, and so on).

3	Select the drive and directory.

4	Type a filename for the bitmap. Presentations 3.0 will automatically add a .BMP, .PCX, or .TIF extension, depending on the format you chose.

5	Choose Save.

6	Choose a pre-defined size, or specify the units of measure and values for the width and height of the image.

7	Choose a resolution, then select a color option.

8	Select Compressed to reduce the amount of disk space the image needs.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Change Bitmaps into Objects

Create Bitmaps


Display Tall Organizations

Purpose

Adjusting box heights and decreasing top and bottom margins allow you to shorten or create more space for a tall organization chart (one with few boxes and many levels). Adjusting the box is particularly helpful if some boxes contain two or more lines of text while others contain only one. Decreasing the top and bottom margins of your page increases the amount of space in your chart.

Steps

To adjust box height,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the chart and choose Box Options from the QuickMenu.

3	Select a level, then select Fit To Text as the Height option.

4	Choose OK.

To adjust margin settings,

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Size/Margins from the QuickMenu.

2	Specify a small top and bottom margin measurement, then choose OK.

You may also want to try:

     	Changing the font type

     	Changing the chart orientation

     	Using various level arrangements in the second, middle, and last levels of your chart

     	Using only one line of text in each box

     	Breaking up a chart into separate charts for each department

     	Changing the number of levels you want to display or print in an organization chart

     	Using Poster to print a tall organization chart on several pages

     	Using a portrait paper size

See Also

Choose Box Options for Organization Charts

Create Organization Charts

Create Posters

Design Organization Charts

Display Flat Organizations


Display Flat Organizations

Purpose

Adjusting box heights and decreasing left and right margins allow you to narrow a wide organization chart (one with many boxes and few levels). Adjusting the box is particularly helpful if some boxes contain shorter lines of text than others. Decreasing the left and right margins of your page increases the amount of space in your chart.

Steps

To adjust box width,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate charts:

2	Right-click the chart and choose Box Options from the QuickMenu.

3	Select a level, then select Fit To Text as the Width option.

4	Choose OK.

To adjust margin settings,

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Page Format from the QuickMenu.

2	Specify a small left and right margin measurement, then choose OK.

You may also want to try:

     	Using the first initial of a name and the full last name

     	Abbreviating position titles and department names

     	Using two or more short text lines if you are adding information to a box

     	Varying level arrangements in the second, middle, and last levels of your chart

     	Breaking up a chart into separate charts for each department

     	Using Poster to print a wide organization chart on several pages

     	Changing the chart orientation

See Also

Choose Box Options for Organization Charts

Create Organization Charts

Create Posters

Design Organization Charts

Display Tall Organizations


Create New Slide Shows

File, New, Slide Show

Purpose

Use New Slide Show to select the master, template, and default settings you want to use for a new slide show.

Steps

1	Choose New from the File menu, then choose Create a New Slide Show.

2	Choose Gallery, select the master you want, then choose Retrieve.

3	Choose a template.

4	Choose Preferences to set default options for your slide show, then choose OK.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Slide Show Defaults

Choose Templates for Slide Shows

Use the Master Gallery


About Presentations 3.0

Help, About Presentations

Purpose

Presentations 3.0 for Windows is a presentation graphics package you can use to create colorful charts, graphs, drawings, slides, overhead transparencies, speaker notes, handouts, and sound-accompanied on-screen slide shows.

Use About Presentations 3.0 to see the Presentations 3.0 logo, the product version number and copyright, your license number, and the program and Shared .DLL release dates.

Steps

1	Choose About Presentations from the Help menu.

2	Choose OK.

See Also

Display and Edit Your License Number


Use Text Slides

Templates, Text

Purpose

Use text slides when you want to add long sentences or full paragraphs to your slide show.

Steps

1	Choose Text from the template list on the Power Bar.

2	Click [image].

3	Type a title and subtitle.

4	Click [image].

5	Double-click the title and subtitle text areas to edit them.

6	Double-click the body text area, then type in the text.

See Also

Edit Text

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Display and Edit Your License Number

Help, About Presentations, Edit Serial Number/PIN

Purpose

Use Edit License/PIN Number to record or edit your license number and personal identification number. You can enter your license number when you install Presentations 3.0 or at a later time.

Steps

1	Choose About Presentations from the Help menu, then choose Edit Serial Number/PIN.

2	Type the license number that is printed on your registration card.

3	Type your personal identification number.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

About Presentations 3.0


 Air Brush Tool

Use this bitmap tool to spray colors and patterns.


alignment guides (def.)
alignment guides

Lines that you can drag from the Ruler to help you align objects.


anchor handles (def.)
anchor handles

The handles found on a selected bezier object that let you size and shape segments of the object.


Strategies for Successful Slide Shows

Establish Your Purpose

     	How much does your audience already know about the subject?  What do they expect or want to know?

     	What is the audience's education, age, and career orientation?

     	Do you want to entertain, motivate, sell, or instruct?

Write Your Objectives

Writing objectives can also serve as a way to evaluate your slide show and guide you in determining the content of your slides and speaker notes.

     	What do you want the audience to learn or be able to do at the conclusion of your slide show?

     	Start each objective with a noun or action verb and be specific as to the results you expect.

     	Are your objectives realistic and attainable by your audience?

Organize and Create Your Slides Using the Outliner

Start by choosing a slide show master that sets the tone for your presentation. Then create your slides using the Outliner.

Your slide outline should typify the three basic divisions of a presentation:

     	Opener. Your title or text slide should make a statement about the subject of your slide show and its final objective.

     	Get the attention of your audience by using a title slide with a thought-provoking question or challenging statement. Then, use a text slide with an anecdote or famous quote to lead in to the main body of your slide show.

     	Main Body. Present your information, facts, and figures by creating bullet, text, organization, data, or combination chart slides in the Outliner.

Combine title slides with QuickArt figures to separate and introduce the main sections of a slide show.

Use the Speaker Notes feature to prepare speaker notes for each slide. You can also use these notes as handouts for the audience.

     	Conclusion. Use bullet charts to summarize and reinforce the key points you made during the  slide show. A title chart with a QuickArt figure can serve as a closing slide.

Practice, Review, and Edit Your Slide Show

     	Is the pacing of your slides and spoken words adequate to hold the attention of your audience?

     	Do the slide contents relate to your objectives?

     	Does each slide present one concept?  Is the concept clear and direct?

     	Are the slides in the right order?  Use the Slide Sorter feature if you need to rearrange them.

     	Avoid using more than five slide transition types for an entire slide show.

     	Does the slide show master fit the tone of the slide show?

     	Where appropriate, use drawings or QuickArt figures with your slides to add impact to text or data.

     	Check the spelling in the Outliner using the Spell Checker.

     	Anticipate questions asked by the audience.

Present

     	When the audience arrives, have the title slide of your slide show on the monitor.

     	Be enthusiastic, genuine, and understandable.

     	Keep eye contact with your audience while you speak. Use your speaker notes only occasionally.

     	Vary the tone of your voice to add interest and maintain audience attention.

     	Ask for questions from the audience periodically.

     	Use the Highlighter to emphasize figures in a data chart or to call attention to a particular point in a text chart.

     	End your slide show on time.

     	Hand out copies of your speaker notes or slides at the end of the slide show.

Evaluate

This can help you refine and improve the objectives, slide content, speech material, and your own effectiveness as a presenter.

     	Did you accomplish your objectives?  How do you know?

     	What were the audience's thoughts and feelings about the slide show?

     	What worked well during your slide show?  What could be improved?

See Also

Create Slide Shows

Helps and Hints for Stand-Alone Slide Shows

Save Slide Shows

Select Templates


arc (def.)
arc

A segment of an ellipse or circle.


 Arrow Tool

Use this drawing tool to draw arrows.


aspect ratio (def.)
aspect ratio

The ratio of the width of an object in the drawing window to the length of the drawing or slide. To avoid distorting an object while sizing, use the constrain feature.


Auto-Step Blending

Automatically assigns the number of blending steps between the chosen colors.


axes (def.)
axes

The horizontal (X axis) or vertical (Y axis) lines used as reference points for plotting data charts.

The scale of a chart is like the scale of a map. Instead of indicating that 1 inch = 50 miles, the chart scale indicates that the length of the Y axis equals a given amount, such as $10,000. The Y axis is marked much like a ruler--it is broken up into units by marks called tick marks. Next to each tick mark is the amount or value at that point of the axis.


axis label (def.)
axis label

The value of a tick on an axis.


Original Document Backup (def.)
Original Document Backup

A backup copy of your document that is created when you save a document. Each time you save a document with changes you have made, the old backup file is replaced with the newest backup file.

When you make changes to a drawing, you have two versions of the file:  the one on disk, and the edited one onscreen. Every time you save, the file onscreen replaces the one on disk. When you save a drawing with Original Document Backup on, the file on disk is renamed with a .BK! extension. If you want to recover the original, you can retrieve the .BK! file.

If you use Original Backup, you should give files different names, not just different extensions. For example, Original Backup renames both PRES.1 and PRES.2 to PRES.BK!. Therefore, PRES.BK! is the backup file only for the last file you saved.


Timed Document Backup (def.)
Timed Document Backup

A backup copy of your current document which is created at the time interval you specify. Each new backup replaces the previous backup.

Timed backup files are named ~{Prn.TMP, where n is the number of the drawing window. They are saved to the directory you specify in Location of Files, or where Presentations 3.0 program files are if you do not specify another location.

When you exit Presentations 3.0 normally, timed backup files are deleted. If a power failure or other system failure occurs, the most current backup files remain on disk so you can recover your work up to the point of the last backup.


base (def.)
base

A box at the bottom of a 3-D chart. The chart appears to rest on top of the base.


bevel (def.)
bevel

A joint or angle in a line with a flat corner, like a jewel facet.


Bezier curve (def.)
bezier curve

A smooth curved line that can be easily moved and edited with control handles that appear at various points in the curve.


bitmap (def.)
bitmap

A graphics image formed by a series of dots (pixels). A bitmap image is also referred to as a paint image or a raster image. Scanned photographs and images created in "paint" applications are bitmap images.


Create or Activate Bitmaps

Steps

To create a bitmap image

1	Click [image] on the tool palette.

2	Drag to create an area large enough for the bitmap image.

or

Click once to create a full page bitmap.

To activate an existing bitmap image for editing,

1	Click [image] on the tool palette, then double-click the bitmap.


 Bitmap Tool

Use this drawing tool to define an area for a bitmap.


Blend

A procedure used to create new color shades between two colors by mixing them. A blend is like pouring two cans of different colored paint towards each other so the paint flows to a central point. At that point, the paint mixes evenly. But at either end, one color is more intense than the other.


Block Mode

Selects a rectangular cross-section of the color palette.


Create Slide Shows

Purpose

Use the Slide Show feature in Presentations 3.0 to create and organize charts, drawings, and other graphics images called slides, then display each slide on a monitor one at a time.

Presentations 3.0 comes with a collection of slide show masters in the Master Gallery. Each slide show master consists of a set of templates, or sample slides, that you can retrieve and use to create your own slides. These professionally designed templates provide you with a layout and background to help you get started.

Steps

To open a new slide show and choose a master,

1	Open Presentations 3.0.

2	Select Create a New Slide Show.

3	Choose Gallery.

4	Click the down scroll arrow to view the slide show masters in the gallery.

5	Select a slide show master, then choose Retrieve.

6	Select a template for the first slide in your slide show from the template list on the Power Bar.

7	Create your slide using data charts, bitmaps, text, figures, and other elements, then add the transitions and sound you want.

8	Choose Add Slides from the Slide menu, then repeat steps 6-7 for each slide in your slide show.

9	When you finish creating your slide show, choose Save As from the File menu, type a name for the slide show with a .shw extension, then choose Save.

10	Choose Play from the slide menu, choose the play options you want, then choose Play to see your slide show.

See Also

Add a Slide

Add Sound to a Slide Show

Choose Transitions between Slides

Create Bitmaps

Create Data Charts

Create Drawn Objects

Play Slide Shows

Select Templates

Use Text Areas and Text Lines

Use the QuickArt Gallery


border (def.)
border

The outer edge of a window or frame that can be moved to enlarge or reduce its size.


bullet chart (def.)
bullet chart

A chart containing text objects that are marked with bullets.


 Bullet Chart Tool

Use this charting tool to display your data as a bulleted list.


Tools Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Tools menu to select text and effects tools. The options on the Tools menu change, depending on the object you are creating or editing.

These are the Tools Menu options for the drawing window:

Spell Check

Thesaurus

Grammatik

QuickCorrect

Object Exchange

Macro

These are the Tools menu options for bitmaps:

Spell Check

Thesaurus

Grammatik

QuickCorrect

Macro

Special Effects

This is the Tools menu option for charts:

Macro

These are the Tools menu options for organization charts:

Spell Check

Thesaurus

Grammatik

QuickCorrect

Macro

See Also

Insert Menu


cell format (def.)
cell format

How data appears in the Datasheet. The data can be a number or a date.


center point (def.)
center point

The point around which an object is rotated, or the point toward which or away from which an object is sized.


CGM (def.)
CGM

Computer Graphic Metafile. A standard format for graphics images that can be shared among different applications.


chart (def.)
chart

A diagram that contains graphed data, lines of text, or a table. You create charts using a Datasheet.


 Chart Tool

Use this drawing tool to define an area for a chart.


Create and Activating Charts
Create or Activate Charts

Steps

To create a chart,

1	Click [image] or [image] on the tool palette.

2	Drag to create an area large enough for the chart.

or

Click once to create a full page chart.

3	Select the type of chart you want to create and choose OK.

To create a bullet chart,

1	Click [image] then [image] on the tool palette.

2	Drag to create an area large enough for the chart.

or

Click once to create a full page chart.

To activate an existing chart for editing,

1	Click [image] on the tool palette, then double-click the chart.


circular arc (def.)
circular arc

A portion of a circle.


Change Text into Objects

Graphics, Text to Curves

Purpose

Use Text to Curves to change text into a series of independent objects that you can size, move, and edit separately.

      	When you trace text, it becomes a series of objects and cannot be edited as text.

Steps

1	Select the text you want to change into objects.

2	Choose Text to Curves from the Graphics menu.

See Also

Contouring Text


 Closed Curve Tool

Use this drawing tool to draw a curved object that is completely enclosed and can be filled with a color or pattern.


closed object (def.)
closed object

An object in which all points connect such as a circle, square, polygon, and text. A closed object can be filled with color and patterns.


cluster (def.)
cluster

A bar chart style that categorizes objects being compared. Each category is represented by a cluster of bars.


CMYK (def.)
CMYK

Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black. A system that uses varying amounts of these four basic colors to produce all colors in printed output modeled after the colors that print shops use for color separations. When all colors are at their maximum level, the color produced is black. An absence of colors produces white.


color palette (def.)
color palette

A set of colors displayed on a rectangular grid. These colors can be used to add color to drawings or slides.


column (def.)
column

A vertical set of cells in a Datasheet designated by consecutive letters of the alphabet.


complement (def.)
complement

The opposite of a specific color. Colors that are opposite each other on the color wheel are complementary colors, (such as red and green, yellow and blue).


constrain (def.)
constrain

To maintain control over mouse movement as you create and edit objects and areas by holding down the Ctrl key. For example, when drawing an ellipse you can constrain it to a perfect circle, or you can constrain a bitmap area to the shape of a perfect square.


coordinates (def.)
coordinates

The address that identifies a cell in a Datasheet or spreadsheet by its column and row (for example, "A1").


correlation coefficient (def.)
correlation coefficient

The relationship between values on the two axes in a data chart.


crosshair pointer (def.)
crosshair pointer

A pointer that appears as a cross with lines that extend to the edges of the window. The crosshair pointer can help you create, align, and size objects with precision, especially when used with the Ruler.


 Curve Tool

Use this drawing tool to draw a curved line.


cusp (def.)
cusp

A pointed corner where two bezier segments meet at different angles.


data chart (def.)
data chart

A chart created with data you enter in the Datasheet. Data charts include table, scatter, high/low, surface, radar, pie, bar, line, and area charts.


data label (def.)
data label

A name assigned to a tick on the Y axis or a label box that displays the data value above or below the corresponding part of a chart (bar, pie slice, line, and so on).


data series (def.)
data series

Each row in the Datasheet is a series. There are three types of data series:

Date Series start with the date in the Start Value text box and multiply by the Step number, using the units you specify. For example, if the step value is 3, and the date step is Week, the interval is 3 weeks.

Linear Series start with the Start Value and add the Step number to create each new number in the series. For example, if the step value is 3, the difference between each cell in the fill is 3.

Growth Series start with the Start Value and multiply by the Step number to create each new number in the series. For example, if the step value is 3, the interval is a multiple of 3:  1, 3, 9, 27...


Select Templates

Power Bar, Templates

Purpose

Templates are pre-defined page layouts and backgrounds for your slides. When you select a template, you can concentrate on the content of your slides rather than on their layout and background. Choose from any of the following templates and perform the steps to create the slide:

Background

Title

Bullet Chart

Text

Org Chart

Data Chart

Combination

See Also

Create Slide Shows


Save Slide Shows

File, Save As

Purpose

Use Save to save a newly created slide show, update changes you have made to a slide show, save a single slide in a slide show as a .WPG file, save a slide show in a different directory, and rename a slide show.

Steps

To save a slide show,

1	Choose Save from the File menu, type a filename, then choose Save.

2	Choose No to rename the slide show.

or

Choose Yes to overwrite the existing slide show.

To save a slide as a .WPG file,

1	Choose Save As from the File menu, then type a filename.

2	Select .WPG as the Format, then choose Save.

To save a slide show in a different directory,

1	Choose Save As from the File menu.

2	Select a drive and directory.

3	Type a filename, then choose Save.

See Also

Create Slide Shows

Play Slide Shows

Strategies for Successful Slide Shows


Helps and Hints for Stand-alone Slide Shows

Slide, Make Runtime

Copy Slide Shows to Disk

Most slide shows fit on a high-density 3 1/2 or 5 1/4 disk. If a slide show you are copying is unusually large, you will get an error message telling your there is insufficient disk space. Since a runtime slide show can run off only one disk, you must copy it onto the hard drive of the computer to show the slide show.

You can store more than one slide show on a disk; your only restriction is disk space.

Sound Compatibility

To properly play a runtime slide show with sound files on another computer, a sound card capable of playing the type of sound files used in the slide show must be installed on that computer. For example, if you create a runtime slide show with .WAV files in it, the computer you play it on must be capable of playing .WAV files.

See Also

Play Stand-alone Slide Shows

Create Stand-alone Slide Shows

Strategies for Successful Slide Shows


delay time (def.)
delay time

The amount of time each slide is left on the screen during a slide show.


Tool Palettes

Purpose

Use the Tool Palettes in Presentations 3.0 to select bitmap and drawing tools. Click the tools on the tool palette to select them. The currently selected tool appears on the palette.

These are the tools available on each palette:

Drawing Tool Palette	Bitmap Tool Palette


double-Y axes chart (def.)
double-Y axes chart

A chart with one X axis and two Y axes. Useful when you want to compare two objects; for example, sales for a particular region during two different sales periods.


DPI (def.)
DPI

Acronym for dots (pixels) per inch. Determines the clarity of a graphics image on the monitor or when printed. The greater the dots per inch, the more detail is visible.


drawing tools (def.)
drawing tools

The tools on the tool palette that can be used whenever you are creating or editing a drawing.


drawing window (def.)
drawing window

The window where you create a single drawing or multiple slides in a slide show. When Presentations 3.0 starts, a new document window opens inside the application window. You can open as many as nine document windows inside the application window.


ellipse (def.)
ellipse

An elongated circle.


 Ellipse Tool

Use this drawing tool to draw ellipses.


elliptical arc (def.)
elliptical arc

A pointed, elongated arc.


 Elliptical Arc Tool

Use this drawing tool to draw an arc.


EPS (def.)
EPS

Encapsulated PostScript File. EPS is a graphics or text file stored using instructions written in PostScript. An EPS file lets you print at the highest possible resolution to a PostScript laser printer.


 Eraser Tool

Use this drawing tool to change all pixels touched by the tool to one color.


Import Slide Shows

File, Open

Purpose

You can import slide shows from other applications into Presentations 3.0. Presentations 3.0 supports Harvard Graphics 2.3 and 3.0 (DOS) and PowerPoint 2.0 and 3.0 (Windows). A copy of the imported file is converted into the Presentations 3.0 slide show format (.SHW). You can then edit and save the file as you would any other slide show in Presentations 3.0.

Steps

To import a slide show,

1	Choose Open from the File menu.

2	Select the file you want to import, then choose Open.

3	Edit the slide show as you would any other slide show in Presentations 3.0.

To save the slide show,

1	Choose Save As from the File menu.

2	Type a path and filename for the imported file.

The file is saved with a .shw extension (the Presentations 3.0 slide show format).

See Also

Create Slide Shows

Play Slide Shows


fade (def.)
fade

To slowly change from one slide to the next.


Create Arcs and Wedges

Edit, select a Circle, Edit Points

Purpose

Use Edit Points to edit circles to create wedges or arcs.

Steps

1	Select, then double-click a circle.

2	Keep the pointer inside the circle while dragging the editing handle to create a wedge.

or

Keep the pointer outside the circle while dragging the editing handle to create an arc.

See Also

Draw Circles

Draw Circular Arcs

Draw Elliptical Arcs


figure area (def.)
figure area

An area you define for retrieving graphics files into the drawing window. A figure area can be sized, rotated, and moved.


 Figure Tool

Use this drawing tool to insert a graphics image into a figure area anywhere in the drawing window.


fill (def.)
fill

A color or pattern you can add to a closed object or data chart series.


fill color (def.)
fill color

A color that fills a closed object or data chart series.


Fill Color Palette (def.)
 Fill Color Palette

Use this drawing tool to choose foreground and background colors from a color palette.


fill gradient (def.)
fill gradient

The filling of a closed object or data chart series in which one color gradually blends into another.


Fill Method

The method you use to apply a fill to an object. If outlines cross in a filled object, they create cells in the object. If a cell borders directly on other cells in the object, the bordered cells may be left empty or filled, depending on the fill method you use.

  Alternate:  fills every other enclosed area.

  Winding:  fills the enclosed areas, including overlapping areas.


fill pattern (def.)
fill pattern

A design, such as dots or diagonal lines, that fills a closed object or data chart series.


fit (def.)
fit

A formula used to forecast trend lines and regression types.


fit exponential

A formula that fits the data in a row or column to an exponential curve: 1n(y)=a+bx.


fit linear

A formula that fits the data in a row or column to a straight line:  y=a+bx.


fit log

A formula that fits the data in a row or column to a logarithmic curve:  y=a+bx(In(x)).


fit polynomial

A formula that fits the data in a row or column to polynomial curves:  y+c0+c1*x+c2...+cn*xn (where n is the order of the fit).

The higher the order you specify, the more curvature is allowed. The order can be any number up to one less than the number of data points charted.

If your charted data is inconsistent and fluctuates up and down, this formula might provide the closest fit for your data, since it is more accurate than the other fit formulas in these cases. Fit polynomial is useful for filling in the unknown Y data points along a curve, but is not as useful for forecasting.


fit power

A formula that fits the data in a row or column to a power curve:  y=axb.


Fixed Blending

Lets you indicate the number of blending steps between two colors.


 Flood Fill Tool

Use this bitmap tool to change the color or fill attributes of an area.


forecast (def.)
forecast

To predict future trends in a chart using the fit types.


foreground color (def.)
foreground color

The color that appears on top of the background in a fill pattern.


Move Slides to Other Slide Shows

Edit, Cut, Copy, and Paste

Purpose

Use Cut, Copy, and Paste in the Slide Sorter or Slide List to move or copy slides from one slide show to another.

Steps

1	Click [image].

or

Click [image].

2	Select a slide or multiple slides.

3	Choose Copy from the Edit menu to copy the slide(s) to another slide show.

or

Choose Cut from the Edit menu to move the slide(s) to another slide show.

4	Switch to another slide show, then enter the Slide Sorter or Slide List.

5	Select the position where you want to insert the slide(s).

6	Choose Paste from the Edit menu.

See Also

Import Slide Shows

Sort Slides


frame (data chart) (def.)
frame (data chart)

A group of lines enclosing a side of a chart. Chart frames can be on the back, front, left, right, top, or bottom of a chart. Each line in a chart frame represents a data value.


frame (def.)
frame (text, chart, bitmap, or figure)

A box that defines an area in the drawing window for activated text, charts, bitmaps, or figures while you are editing them. You can increase or decrease the size of the frame by dragging one of the handles surrounding it.


 Freehand Tool

Use this drawing tool to draw freehand lines. Freehand lines follow the exact trail of the mouse.


gallery (def.)
gallery

A dialog box that exhibits small sketches of charts, figures, templates, and master slides so you can view them together. The figure gallery consists of two levels. The first level is like a directory that displays categories or types of figures. The second level displays the figures.


gradient (def.)
gradient

A gradual change in the color of an object or a page.


Type

Lets you choose the shape of the color blend. Linear gives a series of flat lines, while Circular and Rectangular bend the color bands around straight or curved lines.


gray scale (def.)
gray scale

The various shades of gray that appear in a drawing when it is printed or displayed in black and white.


grid (def.)
grid

A set of dotted lines, similar to those found on graph paper, that display on the screen to help you measure and align objects. Grid lines do not print.


grid line (chart) (def.)
grid line (chart)

A line that represents a value increment in a chart frame, parallel to the X axis or Y axis in a chart. Grid lines are grouped as either major or minor. Major grid lines usually have labels, while minor lines fall between the labels.


handout (def.)
handout

A printed copy of a slide show.


Control the Printer

Purpose

When you send a drawing or slide show to the printer, Presentations 3.0 displays the Current Print Job dialog box which contains information about your print job. The Current Print Job dialog box also lets you cancel the job until the job actually leaves the print buffer in Presentations 3.0.

Steps

To cancel a currently running print job,

1	Click Cancel Print Job.

You can stop and start a print job, and view a list of all current print jobs using the Windows Print Manager. See your Windows manual for more information.

See Also

Print Documents

Select a Printer


Export Files to Different Formats

File, Save As

Purpose

You can export a Presentations 3.0 file to a variety of graphics formats, including WPG 1.0, WPG 2.0, MST 2.0, BMP, CGM, EPS, PCX, TIFF, and WMF format.

If your file contains bitmap objects, the objects are preserved only when exporting to WPG, PCX, TIFF, and BMP format. For other formats, you must first convert bitmap objects to vector objects.

Steps

1	Create or retrieve the file you want to export.

2	Select any bitmap object, then choose Trace Bitmap from the Graphics menu.

3	Choose Save As from the File menu.

4	Choose the format for the file.

5	Select a drive and directory.

6	Type a filename with the extension assigned to the format you chose.

7	Choose Save to save the file in the new format.

8	If you chose a bitmap format (BMP, PCX, or TIFF), specify size and format options, then choose OK to save the file in the new bitmap format.

See Also

Change Bitmaps into Objects

Save Documents as Bitmaps

Save Documents as New Files


Print to Plotters and Film Recorders

File, Print

Purpose

If you have a film recorder or HPGL plotter connected to your computer, you can print to it in much the same way you print to a regular printer. A film recorder can create better color graphics with higher resolution than a computer screen or printer. An HPGL plotter can recreate line drawings from most of the drawing features in Presentations 3.0. However, it cannot reproduce bitmap images, fonts, or overlapping images as they appear onscreen.

          	Before you proceed with the following steps, you must set up your film recorder or plotter according to the directions in your film recorder or Windows manual.

If you plan to have someone else print your file to a film recorder, or if you plan to deliver your file to a slide service make slides or transparencies for you, you need to export your file to disk in the format that is supported by the film recorder or specified by the slide service.

Steps

To print to a film recorder,

1	Right-click, choose Print from the QuickMenu, then choose Select.

2	Highlight your film recorder, then choose Select.

3	Choose Print.

4	Select the options such as film type, camera backs, and exposure times you want, then choose Print (or the given command to execute printing).

To print to your plotter,

1	Select any bitmap object, choose Effects from the Arrange menu, then choose Trace Bitmap.

2	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

3	Highlight your plotter, then choose Select.

4	Choose Print.

5	Select the options you want, then choose Print.

See Also

Change Bitmaps into Objects

Export Files to Different Formats

Print Documents


histogram (def.)
histogram

A bar chart that shows the distribution of various elements being compared. For example, a histogram could compare the monthly sales for three sales regions during a one-year period.


HLS (def.)
HLS

Hue, Lightness, and Saturation (qualities of colors). Defines colors in the context of a monitor. Changing any of these affects the intensity of the color. You can think of the three settings as the hue, brightness, and contrast adjustments on your television. Hue adjusts the color (0=red, 120=green, 240=blue, 360=red), Lightness adjusts the amount of white and gray, and Saturation adjusts the amount of color.


Import QuickArt Files

File, Open or Insert, File

Purpose

You can import a graphic that has been saved in another program into the active slide or drawing window or into a new slide or drawing window. After importing a file, you can edit it in the drawing window.

Steps

To import a graphic into the active window,

1	Choose File from the Insert menu.

2	Specify the file you want to import, then choose Insert.

3	Edit the graphic if necessary.

4	Choose Save As from the File menu, type a filename, then choose Save.

To import a graphic into a new window,

1	Choose Open from the File menu.

2	Specify the file you want to import, then choose Open.

3	Edit the graphic if necessary.

4	Choose Save As from the File menu, type a filename, then choose Save.

See Also

Import Graphics Files as Figures

Insert Files

Open Documents


hue (def.)
hue

Colors and combinations of colors (for example, red, blue, purple). The hue corresponds to the color as you go around the color wheel.


Use Organization Chart Slides

Templates, Org Chart

Purpose

Use organization chart slides to show the structure of positions and span of control in a business, department, agency, group, division, or office.

Steps

1	Choose Org Chart from the template list on the Power Bar.

2	Click [image].

3	Type a title and subtitle.

4	Click [image].

5	Double-click the title and subtitle text areas to edit them.

6	Double-click the chart area, then choose a chart type.

7	Deselect Use Sample Data, then choose OK.

8	Type the position title or name that will appear at the top of the chart.

9	Press Enter to add a subordinate position under the top position, then type the title or name for the subordinate position.

10	Complete your organization chart using these keystrokes:

Press:	When you want to:
Enter	Add another position at the same level
Enter, Tab	Add a subordinate position.
Enter, Shift+Tab	Add a superior position.
Enter, Backspace	Add additional lines of text to current position
Backspace	Delete the previous character.
11	Click outside the chart to close it.

See Also

Add More Information to Organization Charts

Create Organization Charts

Edit Charts


Use Data Chart Slides

Templates, Data Chart

Purpose

Use data chart slides to visually depict percentages, trends, market shares, and relationships.

Steps

1	Choose Data Chart from the template list on the Power Bar.

2	Click [image].

3	Type a title and subtitle.

4	Click [image].

5	Double-click the title and subtitle text areas to edit them.

6	Double-click the data chart area, then choose a chart type.

7	Deselect Use Sample Data, then choose OK.

8	Type the name for each row of data in the Legend column, then type the labels for the X axis in the Labels row, starting with column A.

9	Type your data in the appropriate cells.

10	Choose Redraw from the View menu to view your changes

11	Click outside the chart to close it.

See Also

Create Data Charts

Edit Charts


Use Combination Slides

Templates, Combination

Purpose

Use combination slides to add bulleted text along the side of a data chart.

Steps

1	Choose Combination from the template list on the Power Bar.

2	Click [image].

3	Type a title and subtitle.

4	Click [image].

5	Double-click the title and subtitle text areas to edit them.

6	Double-click the bullet chart text area, type in the text for the first bullet, then continue adding text for subsequent bullets until the text portion of your chart is complete.

7	Double-click the data chart area, then choose a chart type.

8	Deselect Use Sample Data, then choose OK.

9	Enter your data in the Datasheet, then click outside the chart to close it.

See Also

Create Bullet Charts

Create Data Charts

Edit Bulleted Items

Edit Charts


interval value (def.)
interval value

A value that defines which grid points you want to display. For example, if you specify 5, every fifth grid point is visible on the screen.


Joins

Lets you modify angles in a line. A mitered join has a sharp point at the angle. A rounded join has a rounded angle. A beveled join flattens the point of the angle.


Create Slide Show Masters

Purpose

You can create a slide show master by designing your own group of backgrounds and layouts. A slide show master consists of a group of sample slides that share similar background designs and provide layouts with pre-defined styles, settings, and data which you can edit later when creating slides. Create a background, then create templates, such as text and data charts, and link them to the background for a consistent look.

Steps

To create a background for your master,

1	Choose Edit Backgrounds from the Slide menu.

2	Choose Clear from the Edit menu, select Master, then choose OK.

3	Choose Name from the Background menu, type a name for the first background, then choose OK.

4	Add colors, QuickArt figures, a company logo, and other items you want to the background.

5	Choose Add Background from the Backgrounds menu, type a name for the background, choose OK, then repeat steps 3-5 for each background you want in your master.

6	Choose Save from the File menu, type a filename with a .MST extension, and choose Save.

7	Choose Edit Layouts from the Background menu.

To create templates for your master,

1	Choose Open from the File menu, then type the filename of your new master.

2	Choose Name from the Layout menu, type a name for the first layout, then choose OK.

3	Click [image], [image] or [image], then drag diagonally across the window to add a chart, figure, or text area to your layout.

4	Create each basic element of your layout.

5	Choose Assign Background from the Layout menu, select the layout, choose the background you want to assign, then choose OK.

6	Choose Add Layout from the Layout menu, type a name for the layout, choose OK, then repeat steps 3-6 to create additional layouts with other types of charts, figures, bitmaps, or text areas.

7	Choose Save As from the File menu, specify the filename of your slide show master, choose Save, then choose Yes.

8	Choose Close from the File menu.

See Also

Add Master to the Master Gallery

Use the Master Gallery


Add Master to the Master Gallery

Purpose

After creating your own masters, you can add them to the Master Gallery by creating a cover slide to appear in the gallery and linking the backgrounds and templates in the master to the cover slide.

Steps

To create a cover slide,

1	Choose Open from the File menu, select the master (.mst file) you want to add to the Master Gallery, then choose Open.

2	Choose a template from the Layout Selection list on the Power Bar to represent your master in the Master Gallery.

3	Choose Save As from the File menu, type a filename with a .WPG extension for the template, choose .WPG format, then choose Save.

4	Choose Close from the File menu.

To add the cover slide to the Master Gallery,

1	Choose Open from the File menu, select MASTRGAL.SHW, then choose Open.

2	Scroll to where you want to add the cover slide. (The cover slide will be added after the one already appearing in the window.)

3	Choose Add Slide from the Slide menu, specify 1 as the Number of Slides, then choose OK.

4	Choose File from the Insert menu, select the filename of the cover slide, then choose Insert.

5	Click [image], type a title for the cover slide, then click [image] to return to the slide show.

6	Choose Save from the File menu to add the cover slide to the MASTRGAL.SHW file, then choose Close.

To link your master to the cover slide,

1	Choose Master Gallery from the Slide menu, select the master you want to link your master file to, then choose Links.

2	Type the filename of your new slide show master, then choose OK.

See Also

Create Slide Show Masters

Use the Master Gallery


label (def.)
label

Text that shows the numeric value, time period, or category of a bar, line, pie slice, or other object in a data chart.


label leader

A line that attaches a data label to a slice in a pie chart. Label leader is sometimes referred to as a slice pointer.


label scale factor (def.)
label scale factor

A number by which the maximum value in a bar chart is divided. Using a smaller maximum value can make some charts easier to read.


landscape (def.)
landscape

A page orientation in which the long edge of the page runs horizontally.


legend (def.)
legend

A list of the colors, patterns, or symbols used in a chart to show which series label corresponds to which bar, line, pie slice, and so on.


lightness (def.)
lightness

A measure of how close to white a pure color is. The higher the lightness value, the lighter the color.


 Line Color Palette

Use this drawing tool to choose colors for lines and object outlines from a color palette.


 Line Style Palette

Use this drawing tool to choose from a palette a thickness and style for the lines around objects.


 Line Tool

Use this drawing tool to draw horizontal, vertical, diagonal, or combination lines.


linear (def.)
linear

A way to display the values on an axis in even increments. For example, using the linear method for an axis might result in values of 1, 2, 3, and so on, all equal distances apart.


logarithmic (def.)
logarithmic

A way to exponentially increase the values on an axis. For example, using the log method for an axis might result in values of 10, 100, 1000, and so on, all equal distances apart.


Loop

Lets a selected sound file play continuously during a slide show until a subsequent file begins


marker (def.)
marker

A small graphics device that marks each X, Y point in a scatter chart or line chart.


master (def.)
master

A slide show master consists of a set of templates and backgrounds. A template is a professionally designed slide with predefined styles, settings, and data. A template is stylistically consistent with other templates and backgrounds that are part of a slide show master.  Backgrounds may include a border, a gradient background, or related images.


miter (def.)
miter

A joint or angle in a line with a sharp point like a picture frame.


 Hint

Depending on the film recorder or plotter you are using, the dialog box that appears when you select Print will vary. Choose the Help button in the film recorder or plotter dialog box for more information.


MT32

Ensures consistency among sound files written according to the MT32 standard.


object (def.)
object

An item you can draw using one of the drawing tools.


On Disk

Conserves disk space by using a single audio file with multiple slide shows.


organization chart (def.)
organization chart

A diagram that shows the hierarchical levels of work tasks, employees, or groups.


 Organization Chart Tool

Use this charting tool to display your data in a form that shows the relationships of people in organizations.


overlay (def.)
overlay

Places one slide over another one.


 Paint Brush Tool

Use this bitmap tool to paint colored lines and patterns.


 Pattern Palette

Use this drawing tool to choose a fill pattern for the area inside objects.


 Pickup Color Tool

Use this bitmap tool to select a color directly from any part of a bitmap.


pixel (def.)
pixel

Short for Picture Element. A pixel is the smallest dot that can be represented on a screen or in a paint (bitmap) graphic.


polygon (def.)
polygon

A closed object that has at least three sides.


 Polygon Tool

Use this drawing tool to draw polygons.


Backup

Use this feature to control how and when a backup copy of your current slide show or drawing file is made.

How to Use It


Date Format

Use this feature to set the default date format for Presentations 3.0.

How to Use It


Display

Use this feature to control how certain display features appear and function as default settings.

How to Use It


Environment

Use this feature to determine the default startup document, beep options, font, QuickList, save options, and language your computer uses.

How to Use It


Keyboard

Use this feature to select, create, copy, edit, and delete a keyboard layout.

How to Use It


Language

Use this feature to set the default language module you want to use for Presentations 3.0.

How to Use It


Files

Use this feature to tell Presentations 3.0 where to store and access specific types of files.

How to Use It


Print

Use this feature to set your default print options, number of copies, document quality, and binding offset.

How to Use It


Slide Show

Use this feature to set the default number of slides per row, master, template, and save options for all new slide shows.

How to Use It


rainbow (def.)
rainbow

An array of colors displayed following the color spectrum from red to violet.


range (def.)
range

A rectangular region in a spreadsheet file defined by the cell in the upper-left corner and the cell in the lower-right corner, sometimes with a specific range name. When you specify a range you want to import into a chart, the cell coordinates for the upper-left cell and the lower-right cell should be separated by a colon.


 Rectangle Tool

Use this drawing tool to draw rectangles.


regression type (def.)
regression type

A predicted value for one variable based on the pattern set by another variable.


results row or column (def.)
results row or column

The row or column in a Datasheet where the results of a formula are placed. The results row or column is marked by a plus sign (+) at the row or column number or letter.


RGB (def.)
RGB

Red, Green, or Blue. Uses the primary colors of light to define colors. When each color is at its maximum intensity, the color defined is white. RGB is commonly used for on-screen slide shows.


 Rounded Rectangle Tool

Use this drawing tool to draw rectangles with rounded corners. If you want to draw rounded boxes with four equal sides, press Shift to constrain while drawing.


row (def.)
row

A horizontal set of cells in a Datasheet.


ruler (def.)
ruler

A graphic representation of a ruler that appears on the drawing window to help you place objects in specific locations. It displays units of measure according to the default set in Preferences. The Ruler does not appear on the printed page.


saturation (def.)
saturation

The purity of a color. For example, a high saturation of blue produces a brilliant blue, while a low saturation produces a dull blue.


scale (def.)
scale

To increase or decrease the size of a figure or text box.


 Select Area Tool

Use this bitmap tool to define an area within a bitmap.


 Select Tool

Use this drawing tool to mark or choose an object. When an object in the drawing window is selected, small handles surround the object.


 Selective Replace Tool

Use this bitmap tool to change pixels of one color to another color without affecting the rest of the bitmap.


series (def.)
series

A row of data in the Datasheet.


shortcut keys (def.)
shortcut keys

A series of keys that perform a specific action; sometimes called accelerator keys or keystrokes. Shortcut keys are used in place of a mouse.


slide show (def.)
slide show

A series of drawing windows containing communication tools such as charts, bitmaps, text, and drawings presented in slide, transparency, or handout formats. You can add links, transitions, sound, notes, and titles for each slide.


standard deviation (def.)
standard deviation

The square root of the variance of the values in a series.


startup options (def.)
startup options

Commands you can set to be executed when you start Presentations 3.0. These commands are in two categories:  some are for your convenience and others are necessary for certain hardware setups.


Stream Mode

Selects a notched cross-section of the color palette.


template (def.)
template

A pre-designed page layout you can use to make different slides look consistent with each other and to automatically format each slide.


text chart (def.)
text chart

A chart that uses and displays words instead of numerical data. Text charts include bullet and organization charts.


Text Chart Outliner (def.)
Text Chart Outliner

The lined area that appears as a floating palette in which you enter text that appears in organization charts.


Create or Activate Text

Steps

To create text,

1	Click [image] or [image] on the tool palette.

2	Drag to create an area large enough for the text.

3	Type your text.

or

Retrieve text from a file or from the Clipboard.

To activate existing text for editing,

1	Click [image] on the tool palette, then double-click the text.


 Text Tool

Use this drawing tool to choose a line, area, or bullet chart in which to type or insert text into the drawing window.


thumbnail sketch (def.)
thumbnail sketch

A miniature version of a slide, chart, figure, or master. Galleries and the Slide Sorter use thumbnail sketches to let you view several slides, masters, or figures at once.


tick (def.)
tick

A small line parallel to the X axis or Y axis used in data charts to mark off amounts such as dollars, distances, or numbers of objects. Ticks are grouped as either major or minor. Major tick marks usually have labels, while minor marks fall between the labels. For example, on a ruler the inch marks would be major tick marks and the fraction marks would be minor tick marks. Tick marks on an axis are one-half the font height you specify for the label of that axis.


transition (def.)
transition

The way you move from one slide to another in a slide show. Transitions are sometimes called screen wipes.


Transparency

Makes the top or bottom color of fill patterns transparent.


vector (def.)
vector

A line segment or curve created with a mathematic equation. All Presentations 3.0 images (except for bitmaps) are vector images.


vector image (def.)
vector image

A figure created through a series of vector lines. A vector image is treated as a whole object and cannot be broken down into individual elements (such as a portion of a circle).


vertical alignment (def.)
vertical alignment

The alignment of text or graphics within a defined space, such as a cell or row. There are three common vertical alignments:  top, bottom, and middle.


wipe (def.)
wipe

A slide transition that moves from one slide to another using a horizontal or vertical wiping motion.


Datasheet (def.)
Datasheet

The matrix of rows and columns that is the basic working element for creating data charts. Data you type in the Datasheet appears in the data chart you are creating or editing.


X axis (def.)
X axis

The horizontal line of a vertical data chart. If you are using a horizontal chart, the X axis is a vertical line.


Y axis (def.)
Y axis

The vertical line of a vertical data chart. If you are using a horizontal chart, the Y axis is a horizontal line. It is possible to have more than one Y axis in a chart.


Y1 and Y2 axes (def.)
Y1 and Y2 axes

The left and right vertical axes in a double-Y data chart. Y1 is the left vertical axis, and Y2 is the right vertical axis. The Y2 axis lets you chart one or more components on a different scale from the other components. For example, if you use a bar chart on the Y1 axis to show the income of individual regions over a period of time, you could use a line chart on the Y2 axis to show the total income for all regions during that period. You would use Y2 because the scale could be as much as four times larger than the Y1 scale.


Use Keystrokes in Presentations 3.0

Use the following keyboard topics to help you access features using the keyboard:

Dialog Boxes	using the keyboard in dialog boxes
Drawing	using the keyboard to draw objects
Menus	using the keyboard in menus
Shortcuts	displaying keystrokes on menus


Display Shortcut Keys

Purpose

Use Shortcut Keys, sometimes called accelerator keys, to access the most commonly used features from the keyboard. For example, type Ctrl+B to type bold text.

Some shortcut keys are shown on the pull-down menus next to various menu commands. You can modify existing shortcut keys or create new ones using the Keyboard Editor.

Steps

To display shortcut keys,

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Select Display Shortcut Keys.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Use Keystrokes in Presentations 3.0


Use Keystrokes in Menus

Purpose

Use the keyboard to choose commands from menus.

Steps

To access menus using the keyboard,

1	Hold down the Alt key and type the underlined letter for the menu you want to open. For example, type Alt+E to open the Edit menu.

2	Type the underlined letter for the menu option you want.

or

Use the arrow keys to move from menu to menu and option to option, then press Enter to choose a highlighted option.

See Also

Use Keystrokes for Drawing

Use Keystrokes in Dialog Boxes


Use Keystrokes in Dialog Boxes

Purpose

Use the keyboard to choose options in dialog boxes.

Steps

To choose options in a dialog box using the keyboard,

1	Press Alt and then type the mnemonic for the option you want.

or

Use the Tab key to move from option to option.

Radio buttons are selected or deselected.

Check boxes are selected or deselected.

Text boxes are selected so you can type information.

Pop-up lists are selected, and pressing the space bar opens them.

2	Choose OK or Close, then press Enter.

or

Press Esc to cancel any options you have selected.

See Also

Use Keystrokes for Drawing

Use Keystrokes in Menus


Use Keystrokes for Drawing

Purpose

Use the keyboard to draw objects.

Steps

To draw objects using the keyboard,

1	Press Alt+I to select the drawing tool you want from the Insert menu, type R, then type the underlined letter for the tool you want to use.

2	Position the pointer where you want the object to begin using the arrow keys.

3	Press the space bar to place the first handle.

4	Hold down the space bar and use the arrow keys to reposition the pointer.

5	Release the space bar to place another handle, then press it again to continue drawing with the arrow keys.

or

Press Enter to stop drawing.

Releasing the space bar while drawing objects with only one handle (squares, circles, arcs, and so on) finishes the object.

See Also

Use Keystrokes in Dialog Boxes

Use Keystrokes in Menus


Link Slides to Keys

Slide, Go to Keys

Purpose

Use Go to Keys to create an interactive slide show. You can adapt a slide show for your audience by defining and assigning a key for each slide. When you press that key, the specified slide appears.

Steps

1	Create or retrieve a slide show.

2	Choose Go to Keys from the Slide menu.

3	Specify the number of the slide you want to assign links to using the arrow buttons.

4	Type a letter or number for the key.

5	Choose the slide you want to link to that key, then choose Add.

6	Repeat steps 3-5 to add other connections.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Change Key Assignments for Slides

Choose Transitions between Slides


 Hint

You can choose a slide to which all other keys will go from the Other Keys Go To drop-down list.


 Hint

When using Go to Keys you need to advance your slides manually. To select advance features, use Slide Transition from the Slide menu.


Change Key Assignments for Slides

Slide, Go to Keys, Change

Purpose

Use Change to edit keys you have linked as connections in your slide show.

Steps

1	Choose Go to Keys from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the slide you want to edit using the arrow buttons.

3	Highlight the link you want to edit, then choose Change.

4	Type a new key or select the new slide assignment, then choose Add.

5	Select an entry in the Key List, then choose Remove to delete a key assignment.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Link Slides to Keys


Slide Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Slide menu to create slide shows.

Add Slides

Delete Slide(s)

Go To

Master Gallery

Apply Template

Re-apply Template

Edit Layouts

Edit Backgrounds

Speaker Notes

Transition

Sound

Go to Keys

OLE Play Settings

Override

Make Runtime

Play Slide Show

See Also

Background Menu

Layout Menu


Add a Slide

Slide, Add Slide

Purpose

Use Add Slide to add a specified number of slides to your slide show. The slides are added after the current slide.

Steps

1	Choose Add Slide from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the number of slides you want to add.

3	Choose the template you want.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Templates for Slide Shows

Delete Slides


Delete Slides

Slide, Delete Slide

Purpose

Use Delete Slide to delete a slide from a slide show. The other sequential slides are automatically renumbered.

Steps

1	Choose the slide you want to delete from the Slide list on the Power Bar.

2	Choose Delete Slide from the Slide Menu.

3	Choose Yes to delete the selected slide.

See Also

Add a Slide


Create Stand-alone Slide Shows

Slide, Make Runtime

Purpose

Use Make Runtime to copy a slide show with necessary program files to a disk so you can run it on computers that do not have Presentations 3.0 installed.

Steps

1	Create or retrieve a slide show.

If you created a new slide show, save it before continuing.

2	Choose Make Runtime from the Slide menu.

3	Name the slide show file and specify the location (disk drive) for the file.

4	Choose OK to create the quick show file of your slide show.

5	Choose OK to copy the sound drivers if you included sound in your slide show.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Play Slide Shows

Play Stand-alone Slide Shows

Save Documents as New Files

Save Slide Shows as Bitmaps


 Hint

Your slide show is stored as two files, one with a .SHW extension and one with a .PRW extension. If you want to rename your slide show, be sure to rename both files and keep the file extensions the same.


Play Stand-alone Slide Shows

Purpose

Use Show Runtime to show your stand-alone slide show on any computer that has Windows 3.1 or higher installed.

      	You must have created a Runtime slide show before you can play it.

Steps

1	Choose Run from the Program Manager File menu, and type show30.exe after the drive and directory where your slide show file is located (for example, a:\show30.exe).

or

Double-click the Runtime icon in Program Manager.

2	Type the name of the show you want to view.

or

Choose Other File to select the slide show you want to view.

3	Choose OK.

4	Stop the slide show at any time by pressing Esc.

See Also

Advance Slides

Play Slide Shows

Create Stand-alone Slide Shows


Use the Master Gallery

Slide, Master Gallery

Purpose

Use Master Gallery to display or retrieve pre-designed masters. These .mst files include sets of page colors, chart styles, and page arrangements.

Steps

1	Right-click in the drawing window and choose Master Gallery from the QuickMenu.

2	Select the Master you want.

3	Choose Retrieve to apply a pre-designed master to your current slide show, or choose Other File to retrieve a master you previously created.

See Also

Choose Gallery Options

Choose Templates for Slide Shows

Create Slide Show Masters

Import Slide Show Masters

Insert Files


 Hint

The set of templates you selected is now available on the template list on the Power Bar.


Import Slide Show Masters

Slide, Master Gallery, Other File

Purpose

Use Other File to retrieve and use a slide show master (.mst) file you previously created.

Steps

1	Right-click the drawing window and choose Master Gallery from the QuickMenu.

2	Choose Other File.

3	Select the .mst file you want.

4	Choose Insert.

See Also

Choose Templates for Slide Shows

Create Slide Show Masters

Use the Master Gallery


Choose Gallery Options

Purpose

Use Gallery Options to specify how many columns of images the galleries display and to tell Presentations 3.0 to create Quick Gallery files for faster gallery display. Your changes remain in effect for all galleries until you change the options again.

Steps

1	Open a gallery, then choose Options.

2	Specify the Number of Columns you want the gallery to display.

3	Select Create Quick Galleries to speed up gallery display by saving the .SHW file as bitmaps.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Save Slide Shows as Bitmaps

Use the Chart Gallery

Use the QuickArt gallery

Use the Master Gallery


Create Speaker Notes

Slide, Speaker Notes

Purpose

Use Speaker Notes to prepare notes for your slide show. Notes can be placed on the same page as thumbnail sketches of each slide and printed to give an overview of your slide show.

Steps

1	Choose Speaker Notes from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the number of the slide you want using the arrow buttons.

3	Type a note for the slide.

4	Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have typed all the notes you want.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Add a Slide

Print Documents


Choose Transitions between Slides

Slide, Transition

Purpose

Use Slide Transition to choose transitions between each slide in your slide show.

Steps

To choose transitions for individual slides,

1	Choose Transition from the Slide Menu.

2	Specify a slide number using the arrow buttons.

3	Choose the type of transition you want, then choose a size or direction if needed.

4	Select Cascade Bullets, then select Transition Bullets Only for the transition options you selected to affect bulleted lines.

5	Select Overlay if you want the current slide to be imposed on the previous slide.

6	Select Manual to advance the slides using the space bar.

or

Select Timed, then specify the Seconds to Delay between each slide.

7	Select Skip Current Slide to leave a slide out.

8	Choose Preview to see the result of the transition you chose.

9	Choose OK.

To choose transitions for ranges of slides,

1	Click [image].

2	Select the slides to which you want to apply the transition.

3	Right-click the Transition column.

4	Follow steps 3-6 above, then choose OK.

See Also

Add Sound to a Slide Show

Advance Slides

Link Slides to Keys

Override Transitions

Play Slide Shows


Advance Slides

Slide, Transition, Advance

Purpose

Use Advance to determine the way your slides move forward. You can advance slides manually or time them to delay for a specified number of seconds.

Steps

1	Choose Transition from the Slide Menu.

2	Specify the slide number you want using the arrow buttons.

3	Select Manual to advance slides yourself.

or

Select Timed, then specify the Seconds to Delay between each slide.

4	Select Skip Current Slide to leave a slide out.

5	Repeat steps 2-4 for other slides.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Link Slides to Keys


Override Transitions

Slide, Override

Purpose

Use Override to apply one transition and delay combination to all slides in the current slide show. You must deselect Override Transition to return to the original transitions.

Steps

1	Retrieve an existing slide show that contains transitions or delays you want to override.

2	Choose Override from the Slide menu, then select Override Transition.

3	Choose the transition you want to override all others, then choose a Size or Direction if needed.

4	Select Cascade Bullets, then select Transition Bullets Only for the override options you selected to affect bulleted lines.

5	Select Manual to advance the slides using the space bar.

or

Select Timed, then specify the Seconds to Delay between each slide.

6	Choose Preview to see the result of the transition you chose.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Advance Slides

Choose Transitions for Slides


Play Slide Shows

Slide, Play Slide Show

Purpose

Use Play Slide Show to play your slide shows.

Steps

1	Create or retrieve a slide show.

2	Choose Play Slide Show from the Slide menu.

3	Specify the starting slide number.

4	Select Repeat Slide Show to let your slide show run continuously.

5	Choose Play to run your slide show.

6	Press Esc to stop your slide show.

See Also

Create Stand-alone Slide Shows

Highlight During Slide Shows

Play OLE Objects

Speed Up Slide Show Display


Speed Up Slide Show Display

Slide, Play Slide Show, Create Quick Show

Purpose

Use Create Quick Show to save an entire slide show as bitmaps for quicker display. Slides from a Quick Show file appear on the screen with no delay time, but quick files use far more memory than regular slide show files. If you change any part of the slide show, you will have to re-create the Quick Show file.

Steps

1	Choose Play Slide Show from the Slide menu.

2	Choose Create Quick Show.

3	Select Use Quick Show, then choose Play to play the Quick Show.

See Also

Choose Transitions between Slides

Create Stand-alone Slide Shows

Play Slide Shows


Highlight During Slide Shows

Slide, Play Slide Show, Highlighter

Purpose

Use Highlighter to draw attention to a portion of a slide while you are showing your slide show. Drag the highlighter across text or areas of the slides to mark them. The highlight does not permanently mark your slides.

Steps

1	Choose Play Slide Show from the Slide menu.

2	Select a highlighter color.

3	Specify a Line Width.

or

Click the line width icon to select a line width.

4	Choose Play.

See Also

Play Slide Shows


 Hint

Click the mouse button without dragging to advance to the next slide when you have Advance set to Manual, or right-click to go back one slide.


Add Sound to a Slide Show

Slide, Sound

Purpose

Use Sound to add sound to a slide show. You can add MIDI, digital audio, or CD audio sound files to one or more slides. If your sound board allows it, you can play MIDI, digital files, and CD files simultaneously, for example playing one file for background music while playing another file with narration in the foreground. You can also use sound playback options.

      	You must have sound hardware compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards installed in your computer to record or play sound. See your computer manual for information on sound hardware.

Steps

1	Choose Sound from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the slide you want to add sound to using the arrow buttons.

3	Choose Digital Audio, MIDI, or CD Audio.

4	Set the Volume controls for Digital Audio, MIDI, and CD Audio.

5	Choose Options for each type of sound file.

6	Choose Record for new Digital Audio sound files.

7	Choose Play to hear the current sound clip, then choose Stop when you are finished.

See Also

Choose Sound Options

Play Slide Shows

Record Digital Sound

Use CD Sound Clips

Use Digital Sound Clips

Use MIDI Sound Clips


Use MIDI Sound Clips

Slide, Sound, MIDI

Purpose

Use MIDI to add MIDI sound clips to a slide show. Each MIDI sound clip is stored as a file containing the instructions that enable a computer to recreate a sound, usually with a .MID extension. You cannot record sound with MIDI files.

      	You must have sound hardware and drivers compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards installed in your computer to record or play back sound. Please see your computer manual for information on sound hardware.

Use the MIDI Mapper in Windows' Control Panel to ensure that the correct channel mappings for your sound card are selected. Choose Help inside MIDI Mapper for more information about MIDI settings.

Steps

1	Choose Sound from the Slide menu, then specify the slide you want to add sound to using the arrow buttons.

2	Type the filename of the MIDI sound clip you want to use.

3	Choose Options, select the options you want to include, then choose OK.

4	Choose Play to hear the current sound clip, then choose Stop when you are finished.

5	Move the Volume button to adjust the playback volume.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Sound Options

Troubleshooting for MIDI Sound

Use CD Sound Clips

Use Digital Sound Clips


Use Digital Sound Clips

Slide, Sound, Digital Audio

Purpose

Use Digital Audio to add digital sound clips to a slide show. Each digital audio sound clip is stored as a file, usually with a .WAV extension. You can also record your own digital audio clips and attach them to a slide show.

      	You must have sound hardware compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards installed in your computer to record or play back sound. See your computer manual for information on sound hardware.

Steps

1	Choose Sound from the Slide menu, then specify the slide you want to add sound to using the arrow buttons.

2	Type the filename of the digital audio sound clip you want to use.

3	Choose Options, select the options you want to include, then choose OK.

4	Choose Play to hear the current sound clip, then choose Stop when you are finished.

5	Move the Volume button to adjust the playback volume.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Sound Options

Record Digital Sound

Use CD Sound Clips

Use MIDI Sound Clips


Record Digital Sound

Slide, Sound, Digital Audio, Record

Purpose

Use Record Digital Sound to record digital audio sound clips to accompany your slide show.

      	You must have sound hardware compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards installed in your computer to record or play back sound. See your computer manual for information on sound hardware.

Steps

1	Choose Sound from the Slide menu, then specify the slide you want to add sound to using the arrow buttons.

2	Type the filename of the digital audio sound clip you want to record.

3	Choose Record.

4	Choose Record (the button with the microphone on it), then speak into the computer's microphone.

5	Use the Play and Stop buttons or the scroll bar to insert sound in a particular place in a file.

6	Choose Stop.

7	Choose Save As from the File menu to save a new file. Specify the filename, then choose OK.

8	Choose Play to hear the current sound clip, then choose Stop when you are finished.

9	Move the Volume button to adjust the playback volume.

10	Choose OK.

See Also

Use Digital Sound Clips


 Hint

The Windows Sound Recorder has its own Help system. If you need further instructions on recording or modifying digital sound, refer to your Windows manual.


Use CD Sound Clips

Slide, Sound, CD Audio

Purpose

Use CD-Audio to add CD sound clips to a slide show.

      	You must have a CD player and sound hardware compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards connected to your computer to use this feature. See your computer manual for information on sound hardware.

Steps

1	Choose Sound from the Slide menu, then specify the slide you want to add sound to using the arrow buttons.

2	Click the CD icon, then specify the track number.

3	Specify the locations in each track where you want the clip to start and end.

4	Type a name for the sound clip, then choose OK.

5	Choose Options to set CD Audio options.

6	Choose Play to hear the current sound clip, then choose Stop when you are finished.

7	Move the Volume button to adjust the playback volume.

8	Choose Reset to cancel all changes.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Sound Options

Use Digital Sound Clips

Use MIDI Sound Clips


Choose Sound Options

Slide, Sound, Sound Options

Purpose

Use Sound Options for MIDI, digital audio, or CD audio sound files.

      	You must have sound hardware compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards installed in your computer to record or play back sound. See your computer manual for information on sound hardware.

Steps

1	Choose Sound from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the slide you want to add sound to using the arrow buttons.

3	Choose Options.

4	Choose from the following options for Digital Audio, MIDI, or CD Audio sound clips:

Loop Sound

MT32

On Disk

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Use CD Sound Clips

Use Digital Sound Clips

Use MIDI Sound Clips


Create and Edit Slide Titles

Purpose

Use the Slide Show Outliner to give each slide in your slide show a title.

Steps

1	Click [image].

2	Click the line for the slide you want.

3	Type a title for the slide.

4	Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have given each slide a title.

5	Click [image] to return to the slide show.

See Also

Create Speaker Notes


Choose Templates for Slide Shows

Slide, Apply Template, Re-Apply Template

Purpose

Use Apply Template to use pre-designed backgrounds, colors, and layouts for one or more slides in your slide show.  Use Re-Apply Template to re-apply the selected layout to the current slide.

Steps

1	Choose Apply Template from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the slide number you want the template to apply to using the arrow buttons.

3	Select the template you want.

4	Specify which slides you want the template to apply to.

6	Choose OK.

or

Choose Detach to remove the link between a template and its master so you can edit its components, then choose Yes.

7	Choose Re-Apply Template from the Slide menu to re-apply the template to the current slide after you have detached it.

See Also

Create Layouts

Use the Master Gallery


 Hint

If you want the template to apply to only some of the slides, select Slide Range, then specify the range of slides you want the template to apply to by specifying the Start and End slide numbers (for example, 3-7 to include slides 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7).


 Hint

You must assign the template to a slide before detaching it. The template format (page color, charts, text boxes, and so on) becomes a permanent part of the slide. You can edit all the components of the template (change the colors, explode charts, and so on).

Any objects drawn in the slide now appear behind the layout or background objects. Use the options on the Order submenu to arrange the objects.


Layout Menu

Slide, Edit Layout, Layout

Purpose

Use the options on the Layout menu to add, delete, or modify layouts.

Add Layout

Delete Layout

Assign Background

Assign Background

Name

Edit Slides

Edit Backgrounds

See Also

Background Menu


Add Layout

Slide, Edit Layouts, Layout, Add Layout

Purpose

Use Add Layout to create and add a new layout to the current master.

Steps

1	Choose Edit Layouts from the Slide menu.

2	Choose Add Layout from the Layout menu.

3	Type a name for the new layout, then choose OK.

4	Create your layout by adding text, drawn objects, bitmaps, charts, and whatever elements you want.

5	Choose Save As to save the master (.mst) file with the added layout.

6	Choose Edit Slides from the Layout menu.

See Also

Add Background

Assign Background to Layout

Delete Layouts

Name Layouts

Use the Master Gallery


Delete Layouts

Slide, Edit Layouts, Layout, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete to remove a layout from the current master.

Steps

1	Choose Edit Layouts from the Slide menu.

2	Choose the layout you want to delete from the template list on the Power Bar.

3	Choose Delete from the Layout menu.

4	Choose Yes.

5	Choose Save As from the File menu to save the master (.mst) file without that layout.

6	Choose Edit Slides from the Layout menu.

See Also

Add Layouts

Assign Background to Layout

Name Layouts

Use the Master Gallery


Assign Background to Layout

Slide, Edit Layouts, Layout, Assign Background

Purpose

Use Assign Background to link a background to each layout in a master.

Steps

1	Choose Edit Layouts from the Slide menu.

2	Choose Assign Background from the Layout menu.

3	Select the layout you want to link to a background.

4	Choose the available background you want to assign.

5	Choose OK.

6	Choose Save As from the File menu to save the master (.mst) file with the new layout.

7	Choose Edit Slides from the Layout menu.

See Also

Add Layout

Delete Layouts

Name Layouts

Use the Master Gallery


Name Layouts

Slide, Edit Layouts, Layout, Name

Purpose

Use Name to assign a new name to an existing layout.

Steps

1	Choose Edit Layouts from the Slide menu.

2	Choose Name from the Layout menu.

3	Specify the layout you want to rename using the arrow buttons.

4	Type the a name for the layout and choose OK.

5	Choose Save As from the File menu to save the master (.mst) with the renamed layout.

6	Choose Edit Slides from the Layout menu.

See Also

Add Layout

Assign Background to Layout

Delete Layouts

Use the Master Gallery


Use Text Areas and Text Lines

Insert, Text

Purpose

Use a Text Line to create or edit one line of text. You can type or insert only one line of text when using a text line; text will not wrap to another line. Use a Text Area to create or edit two or more lines of text.

      	Text created in a bitmap can be edited only as painted letters, not as text.

Steps

1	Click [image], then drag the area to the width you want.

or

Click [image] then [image], then click the drawing window to start the text line.

2	Type your text.

or

Choose File from the Insert menu, specify the filename of the text you want to insert, then choose Insert.

3	Click outside of the text area or select another tool to close it.

or

Press Enter or select another tool to close the text line..

See Also

Choose Fonts

Edit Text


 Hint

While the text area or text line is open, you can choose text menu options to control the appearance, content, and layout of the text. You can size the text area when it is activated or selected.


Retrieve Text Files

Insert, File

Purpose

Use File to retrieve a text file into a text line or text area.

Steps

To retrieve a text file,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Choose File from the Insert menu.

3	Specify the filename of the text file you want to retrieve.

4	Choose Insert.

To retrieve text from the Clipboard,

1	Define a text area or text line.

2	Choose Paste from the Edit menu.

See Also

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Date Documents

Insert, Date

Purpose

Use Date to place the current date/time as static text or as a code in a text line or text area. The date/time is placed according to the current date and time information stored in your computer.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Choose Date from the Insert menu.

3	Choose Text to insert the current date/time as text characters you can edit and apply attributes to.

or

Choose Code to insert the current date/time as a code that is updated to the current date and time each time you retrieve or print the file.

See Also

Format Dates

Set Default Preferences


Format Dates

Insert, Date, Date Format

Purpose

Use Date Format to change the appearance of date text inserted with the Date Text or Date Code options. Date Format applies to the current slide only.

Steps

To use a pre-defined date format,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Choose Date from the Insert menu, then choose Format.

3	Choose a pre-defined date format.

To create a custom date format,

1	Choose Date from the Insert menu, choose Format, then choose Custom.

2	Select the date and time codes you want, then choose Insert. You can delete the unwanted codes.

or

Type a date format.

You can type text [except for numbers, the dollar sign ($), or the percent sign (%)], but you cannot type date or time codes.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Set Default Preferences


 Hint

If you want to change the Date Format for all new documents, choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Date Format. Make your changes, then choose OK.


Adjust Text Kerning

Format, Manual Kerning

Purpose

Use Manual Kerning to adjust the horizontal position of text from the insertion point position and the spacing of letters within a text area or text line. If you do not specify a unit of measure, the default unit of measure is used.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Choose Manual Kerning from the Format menu.

3	Specify a positive number to expand the spaces between letters.

or

Specify a negative number to compress the spaces between letters.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Line Spacing

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Justify Text

Format, Justification

Purpose

Use the options on the Justification submenu to position your text paragraphs right, left, or center in relation to the sides of a text area. Justification settings affect all text until you change them.

Steps

To choose justification for new text,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Right-click the text and choose a Justification option from the QuickMenu.

3	Type the text.

To justify existing text,

1	Select the paragraph you want to justify.

2	Right-click and choose a Justification option from the QuickMenu.

See Also

Adjust Text Kerning


Choose Fonts

Format, Font

Purpose

Use Font to determine the style of lettering in your document. You can choose one or more fonts in a text area or text line.

Steps

To choose a font while typing or editing text,

1	Right-click and choose Font from the QuickMenu.

2	Select a font and a point size.

3	Select font style and appearance options.

4	Choose position and relative size options.

5	Choose Attributes to set the color and pattern, then choose OK.

6	Choose OK.

To apply font changes to existing text,

1	Select the text object.

or

Double-click the text, then select the words you want to change.

2	Choose Font from the Text menu.

3	Follow steps 2-6 above.

To set the default font,

1	Choose Font from the Format menu.

2	Follow steps 2-6 above.

3	Select Use as Default.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Choose Text Attributes

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Center Text

Format, Line, Center

Purpose

Use Center to center one line of text between the left and right edges of a text area. You can center all or part of a line, but it applies only to the current line. To center more than one line, use Justification.

Steps

To create centered text,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Center.

3	Type the text.

4	Press Enter to end the centered line and begin a new line.

To center existing text,

1	Place the insertion point to the left of the text you want to center.

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Center.

See Also

Justify Text

Right-Justify Text

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Right-Justify Text

Format, Line, Flush Right

Purpose

Use Flush Right to align text at the right edge of a text area. You can apply flush right to all or part of a line, but it applies only to the current line. To right justify more than one line, use Justification.

Steps

To create flush right text,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Flush Right.

3	Type the text.

4	Press Enter to end the flush right alignment and begin a new line.

To use flush right on existing text,

1	Place the insertion point to the left of the text you want to align at the right edge.

2	Choose Line from the Format menu, then choose Flush Right.

See Also

Center Text

Justify Text

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Indenting Text
Indent Text

Format, Paragraph

Purpose

Use the options on the Paragraph submenu to indent text. Indent moves text 1/2 inch from the left margin. Double Indent moves text 1/2 inch from both the left and right margin. Hanging Indent creates a bibliography entry indent. The first line starts at the margin, while subsequent lines wrap to the indention point (1/2 inch from the left margin). Entering a hard return ends the paragraph and indention. Back Tab moves text 1/2 to the left of the margin.

Steps

To create indented text,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Choose Paragraph from the Format menu, then choose the Indent option you want.

3	Type the text.

4	Press Enter to end the paragraph.

To indent existing text,

1	Move the insertion point to the beginning of the line of text.

2	Choose Paragraph from the Format menu, then choose the Indent option you want.

See Also

Release Margins

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Release Margins

Format, Paragraph, Back Tab

Purpose

Use Back Tab to move the insertion point one tab stop to the left in a text area.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Place the insertion point where you want the margin to move one tab stop.

3	Choose Paragraph from the Format menu, then choose Back Tab.

See Also

Use Text Areas and Text Lines


Find and Replace Text

Edit, Find and Replace

Purpose

Use Find and Replace to search for specific words or phrases in a text area or text line, and replace them with other words or phrases. Find and Replace is case-sensitive and finds the search text wherever it appears. Press the space bar before and after the word you are searching for to avoid finding the letters you have typed within other words ("the" appearing in "these," "therefore," and "other").

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Choose Find and Replace from the Edit menu.

3	Type the word or phrase you want to search for.

4	Type the replacement word or phrase.

5	Choose Forward to search from the cursor to the end of the document.

or

Choose Backward to search from the cursor to the beginning of the document.

6	Choose Replace to replace the word or phrase currently selected.

or

Choose Replace All to replace the word or phrase changed every time it appears.

or

Choose Find Next to find the next appearance of the word or phrase.

7	Choose Close when the search is completed.

See Also

Choose Environment Defaults

Spell-Check Text

Use the Thesaurus


Spell-Check Text

Tools, Spell Check

Purpose

Use Spell Checker to check for misspelled words and to search for double words and irregular capitalization.

Steps

To use Spell Checker,

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Open or create the document you want to check.

3	Choose Spell Check from the Tools menu.

4	When the spell-check is done, choose Yes.

To get Help with Spell Checker,

1	If you want help on a Spell Checker feature, choose Contents from the Spell Checker Help menu.

or

Choose Spell Checker to open Spell Checker Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy the WPSH20US.HLP file that came with your application into your Shared Code (wpc20) directory.

See Also

Find and Replace Text

Use the Thesaurus


 Hint

If the Spell Checker finds a problem with your document, you have several options available. For detailed help on the available Spell Checker options, use Spell Checker's Help while spell-checking.

You can edit your document without closing the Spell Checker. To do this, click anywhere in the drawing window. You can then return to the Spell Checker by clicking in the Spell Checker application window.


Display Button Bars
Display Toolbars

View, Toolbar

Purpose

Use the Toolbar to access commands you use often.

Steps

1	Right-click the bottom of the application window, then choose Toolbar from the QuickMenu.

See Also

Toolbar Editor

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences


Tips for Creating Data Charts

The following suggestions can help you create effective data charts with X and Y axes:

     	The chart title should appear at the top and focus on one main topic.

     	Limit the number of items to 6 or less; if you must have more items, break up the data into separate charts.

     	Use the same font throughout a chart.

     	Use a legend for clarity.

     	Position data labels inside the bars to show their value.

See Also

Create Data Charts

Edit Charts


Display a Crosshair Pointer

View, Crosshair

Purpose

Use the Crosshair Pointer to create, align, and size objects with precision. A crosshair replaces the mouse pointer and appears as a plus sign that extends the length and width of the drawing window. The crosshair is especially useful when the Ruler is displayed.

Steps

1	Choose Crosshair from the View menu.

See Also

Choose Display Defaults

Display the Ruler


 Hint

If you want to use the Crosshair in all new documents, choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Display. Make your changes and choose OK, then choose Close.


Display in Draft Mode

View, Draft Mode

Purpose

Use Draft Mode to display only the outline of the drawn objects but not the fill colors, patterns, or other attributes. Draft mode changes your view of drawn objects on your screen, but it does not change the actual objects when printed or used in a slide show.

Steps

1	Choose Draft Mode from the View menu.

See Also

Adjust for Printing


 Hint

If you want to use Draft Mode in all new documents, choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Display. Make your changes and choose OK, then choose Yes in the Update Page Settings dialog box. Choose Close.


View Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the View menu to change what you see in the Presentations 3.0 window. The options on the View menu change depending on the object you are creating or editing.

These are the View menu options for the drawing window:

Slide Editor

Outliner

Slide List

Slide Sorter

Grid/Snap

Zoom

Toolbar

Ruler

Reveal Codes

Draft Mode

Crosshair

These are the View menu options for bitmaps:

Zoom

Toolbar

Reveal Codes

These are the View menu options for charts:

Datasheet

Redraw

Auto Redraw

Toolbar

These are the View menu options for organization charts:

Outline

Redraw

Auto Redraw

Toolbar

Reveal Codes


Edit Slides

View, Slide Editor

Purpose

Use Slide Editor to view, create, and modify individual slides in your slide show.

Steps

1	Click [image].

See Also

List Slide Information

Outline Slide Shows

Sort Slides


Outline Slide Shows

View, Outliner

Purpose

Use the Outliner to create or view a slide show in outline form.

Steps

1	Click [image].

2	Choose Master Gallery from the Slide menu, select the master you want, then choose Retrieve.

3	Choose the template you want from the template list on the Power Bar.

4	Type a title for the first slide, then press Enter.

5	Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have created all the slides in the slide show.

6	Click [image] to create or edit a slide once the outline is complete.

See Also

Edit Slides

List Slide Information

QuickMenu

Sort Slides


List Slide Information

View, Slide List

Purpose

Use List to display the number, title, transition, and advance option (such as delays) for each slide in the current slide show.

Steps

To open the slide list,

1	Click [image].

To change the order of slides in the list,

1	Click and drag slide number to where you want it.

To customize the List heading bar,

1	Right-click the heading bar, then choose an option from the QuickMenu to add that object.

2	Drag column headings to reposition them.

3	Drag the column headings off the heading bar to remove them.

4	Drag the edge of the column headings to the left or right to resize them.

To change the information in the list,

1	Place the pointer on the item you want to edit.

2	Right-click, make the changes, then choose OK.

To exit the list and view the selected slide,

1	Click [image].

See Also

Edit Slides

Outline Slide Shows

Sort Slides


Sort Slides

View, Slide Sorter

Purpose

Use the Slide Sorter to display an overview of your slide show. You can also change the slide order in both the Slide Sorter and Slide List. Presentations 3.0 automatically reorders and renumbers each slide.

Steps

To move a single slide,

1	Click [image].

2	Drag the slide to a new position.

3	Click [image] to return to the current slide show.

To move multiple slides,

1	Select the first slide in the range, then hold down Shift and select the last slide in the range.

or

Select the first slide, then hold down Ctrl while you select the rest of the slides if they are not consecutive.

2	Drag the slides to a new position.

3	Click [image] to return to the currently selected slide.

See Also

Choose Slide Show Defaults

Edit Slides

List Slide Information

Outline Slide Shows


Reveal Codes

View, Reveal Codes

Purpose

Use Reveal Codes to display text formatting codes on the line of text where the insertion point is located.

Steps

1	Click here for steps to create or activate text:

2	Choose Reveal Codes from the View menu.

3	Choose Reveal Codes from the View menu again to turn it off.

See Also

Find and Replace Text

Retrieve Text Files


Display the Ruler

View, Ruler

Purpose

Use Ruler to display a ruler. The Ruler can help you create and align objects with precision. It shows the measurements of the current page using the default unit of measure.

Steps

1	Right-click the bottom of the application window, then choose Ruler from the QuickMenu.

2	Right-click the Ruler and choose Ruler again to remove the Ruler from the screen.

See Also

Display a Crosshair Pointer

Display the Grid

Use Alignment Guides


Display the Grid

View, Grid/Snap, Grid

Purpose

Use Grid to display a grid in the drawing window. Use the grid to help you position objects and text in your document.

Steps

1	Right-click bottom of the application window, then choose Grid from the QuickMenu.

2	Right-click bottom of the application window and choose Grid again to remove the Grid from the screen.

See Also

Align Objects with the Grid

Choose Grid and Snap Options

Display a Crosshair Pointer

Use Alignment Guides


Choose Grid and Snap Options

View, Grid/Snap, Grid/Snap Options

Purpose

Use Grid/Snap Options to change the structure and display of the grid. You can also define the snap zone for alignment guides you create.

Steps

1	Choose Grid/Snap from the View menu, then choose Grid/Snap Options.

2	Select Display Grid to display

3	Select Snap to Grid to force objects to align with the grid.

4	Specify the amount of space you want between points on the horizontal and vertical axes.

5	Specify the interval between grid lines displayed on the screen.

6	Specify a snap zone value to define the area in which objects snap to alignment guides.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Align Objects with the Grid

Display the Grid

Display the Ruler

Use Alignment Guides


Grid/Snap Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Grid/Snap submenu to make objects snap to the grid and to set grid options.

Grid

Snap to Grid

Grid/Snap Options

Clear Guides

See Also

Align Objects


Use Alignment Guides

View, Snap/Grid, Clear Guides

Purpose

Use up to 31 vertical and 31 horizontal alignment guides to help you align objects you create or edit. The alignment guides do not appear on the printed page. Use Snap to Grid to position alignment guides precisely on the current grid setting.

Steps

To place an alignment guide,

1	Choose Ruler from the View menu if the Ruler is not displayed on the screen.

2	Place the pointer on the top Ruler, then drag to place a horizontal alignment guide.

or

Place the pointer on the left Ruler, then drag to place a vertical alignment guide.

To remove alignment guides,

1	Select, then click the alignment guide you want to remove.

2	Drag the alignment guide off the drawing window.

or

Right-click the Ruler and choose Clear Guides from the QuickMenu.

See Also

Align Objects with the Grid

Choose Grid and Snap Options

Display the Grid


Align Objects with the Grid

View, Grid/Snap, Snap to Grid

Purpose

Use Snap to Grid to use a magnet-like force to align objects you draw, size, or move with the grid points. Snap to Grid works whether or not the grid is displayed.

Steps

1	Right-click the Ruler and choose Snap to Grid from the QuickMenu.

See Also

Choose Grid and Snap Options

Display the Grid

Display the Ruler

Use Alignment Guides


Screen Size

Displays the all objects in the slide as the size they will be when you play the slide show


Zoom

View, Zoom

Purpose

Use the options on the Zoom submenu to magnify or reduce the view of the document. Zoom does not change the actual size of the text or graphics.

Steps

1	Choose Zoom from the View menu, then choose one of the following options:

Zoom Area

Margin Size

Screen Size

Full Page

Selected Objects

Actual Size (100%)

Previous View

Zoom In

Zoom Out

See Also

Magnify Bitmaps

Stretch and Size Objects


Zoom Area

Magnifies your view of an area in your drawing. Zoom Area changes your vantage point in your drawing, but it does not size objects.

The pointer appears as a magnifying glass: . Move the cross symbol in the magnifying glass pointer to the starting point of the area you want to enlarge, then drag to define the area.


Full Page

Displays an entire page of the document


Selected Objects

Magnifies your view of objects you have selected. Selected Objects changes your vantage point in your drawing, but it does not size objects.


Actual Size (100%)

Displays your drawing in the size it would appear if printed


Previous View

Displays the drawing as it appeared before you last used Zoom


Zoom In

Magnifies your view of the objects in the drawing window by 20 percent. Zoom In changes your vantage point in your drawing, but it does not size objects.


Zoom Out

Reduces your view of objects in the drawing window by 20 percent. Zoom Out changes your vantage point in your drawing, but it does not size objects.


Margin Size

Displays the entire drawing area in the drawing window. This is the default view.


Importable Spreadsheet Formats

These are the spreadsheet formats you can import into Presentations 3.0:

Quattro Pro for Windows

Quattro Pro (versions 2.0-4.0)

Lotus for Windows

Lotus 123 (versions 2.01-3.1)

Microsoft Excel (versions 2.1-4.0)

PlanPerfect (versions 3.0-5.1)

See Also

Import Data


 Hint

Many printers have a minimum margin setting to allow for an unprintable region. If you specify a smaller margin than is allowed for the selected printer, Presentations 3.0 changes the margins to the smallest margin allowed. For example, if the left unprintable region for your printer is .25" and you specify 0" as your left margin, Presentations 3.0 changes your left margin to .25".


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Select Objects

Select Single Objects

Select All Objects

Select Similar Objects

Use Undo and Redo

Undo Changes

Redo Changes

Use Delete and Cancel

Delete Backgrounds

Delete Layouts

Delete Objects and Text

Delete Rows and Columns

Delete Slides

Cancel Changes

Cut, Copy, and Paste

Cut Data and Text

Cut Objects and Text

Copy and Paste Colors

Copy Data and Text

Copy Objects and Text

Paste Data and Text

Paste Objects and Text

Align and Position Objects

Display the Grid

Align Objects with the Grid

Use Alignment Guides

Display the Ruler

Constrain while Drawing

Use and Create Color Palettes

Define Color Palettes

Blended or Rainbow Colors

Retrieve Color Palettes

Save Color Palettes

Choose Colors

Save Drawings and Slide Shows

Save Documents

Save Documents as Bitmaps

Save Gallery Figures As .WPG Files

Save with Even Borders

Save Selected Objects

Draw and Edit Objects

Move, Size, and Shape Objects

Move an Object

Size or Stretch an Object

Rotate an Object

Skew an Object

Make an Object Appear 3-D

Shape an Object

Duplicate, Group, and Align Objects

Duplicate an Object

Group Objects

Align Objects

Space Objects

Change Attributes and Edit Objects

Change Fill Color

Change Fill Pattern

Change Fill Gradient

Change Line Color

Fill Arcs

Make Objects Transparent

Add Shadows

Edit Points

Create Bezier Curves

Draw Bezier Curves

Create a Cusp

Edit Bezier Points

Change Angles to Bezier Curves

QuickArt

Retrieve and Save QuickArt

Save a Figure as a .WPG File

Retrieve a Figure from the Gallery

Import QuickArt

Adding a Figure to a Gallery Category

Add to a Gallery Category

Add New Gallery Category

Create Cover Slides for New Gallery Categories

Link Your Figures to the Cover Slide

Use QuickArt

Overlay Text

Use a QuickArt Background

Add QuickArt to Charts

Use QuickArt with Text

Create QuickArt Bullets

Create a Pictograph

Draw Floor Plans

Make Faces

Group and Separate Objects

Group

Separate

Bitmaps

Create Bitmaps

Create a Bitmap Image

Use Foreground and Background Colors

Size a Bitmap Frame

Make a Color Transparent

Change Brush Attributes

Apply Special Effects

Edit Bitmaps

Edit a Bitmap

Move Areas

Duplicate Areas

Erase Areas

Edit Text in a Bitmap

Zoom to Edit Pixels

Erase Colors and Lines

Pick Up Colors

Convert Bitmaps

Convert a Bitmap to Vector

Convert Vector Images to Bitmap Images

Text

Create and Edit Text

Create Text

Activate Text

Edit Text

Size Text

Change Text Appearance

Change Fill Patterns

Change Gradient Fills

Rearrange Text

Align and Space Text

Position Text as Superscript or Subscript

Change the Relative Size of Text

Change Line Spacing

Align Text

Justify Text

Adjust Spacing Between Words and Letters

Text as Drawing Objects

Contour Text

Convert Text to Curves

Use Text Tools

Check for Misspelled Words

Use the Thesaurus

Use Grammatik

Retrieve and Save Text

Import Text

Export Text

Data Charts

Create Data Charts

Which Data Chart Should I Use?

Create a Data Chart

Add the Chart Data

Import Data from a Spreadsheet or Table

Add a Chart Title

Add a Legend

Add the Labels

Close the Chart

Edit Data Charts

Edit Chart Data

Insert Rows and Columns

Delete Rows and Columns

Change the Column Width

Clear Cell Data

Cut Cell Data

Copy Cell Data

Paste Cell Data

Use XY Charts

Use Two Y Axes

Tips for Creating an XY Chart

Create a Linear Regression Trend Chart

Change the Chart Design

Change a Series Type

Change Bar Shapes

Display Data Labels

Use Pie Charts

Tips for Creating Pie Charts

Create a Pie-Column Chart

Explode a Pie Slice

Change Pie Options

Change the Angle of a Pie

Sort Slices of a Pie

Size a Pie

Change Pie Labels

Change Chart Appearance

Change a Series Color, Pattern, or Gradient

Change the Text Font

Add a QuickArt Figure

Change Axis, Grid, and Tick Options

Change Axis Options

Change the Grid/Tick Marks

Save and Convert Charts

Save a Chart Style

Export Data

Explode a Chart

Text Charts

Create a Bullet Chart

Tips for Creating a Bullet Chart

Create a Bullet Chart

Define Bullets

Import a WordPerfect Document

Design Bullet Charts

Edit a Bullet Chart

Edit a Bullet Chart

Change Text Font and Attributes

Change Bullet Options

Change the Justification of a Level

Change Box Options

Change Box Attributes

Create an Organization Chart

Tips for Creating an Organization Chart

Create an Organization Chart

Add More than One Line of Text to a Position

Import a WordPerfect Document

Edit an Organization Chart

Change the Box Attributes

Change the Base Font

Change the Font Color

Change the Connector Lines

Change the Chart Orientation

Display Organization Charts

Display Part of a Chart

Display a Tall Organization

Display a Flat Organization

Slide Shows

Slide Show Basics

Strategies for a Successful Slide Show

Helps and Hints

Create a Slide Show

Create a Slide Show

Select a Template

Retrieve an Outline from WordPerfect

Sort Slides

Create Speaker Notes

Add Slide Transitions

Set Advance Options

Override the Transition and Advance Options

Use Slide Show Masters

Create a Slide Show Master

Add a Slide Show Master to the Master Gallery

Edit Layouts

Edit Backgrounds

Add Sound to Slide Shows

Add Sound Clips

Record Your Own Voice

Play a Slide Show and Runtime Slide Shows

Play a Slide Show

Use the Highlighter

Create a Runtime Slide Show

Play a Runtime Slide Show

Helps and Hints

Retrieve and Save a Slide Show

Import a Slide Show

Move Slides to Another Slide Show

Save a Slide Show

Print and Format Documents

Select and Control Printers and Output Formats

Select a Printer

Control Your Printer

Print to Film Recorders and Plotters

Export Files to Other Formats

Print Drawings and Slide Shows

Preview a Drawing

Print a Drawing

Print a Slide Show Saved to a Disk

Print Slide Show Handouts or Speaker Notes

Print a Poster

Formatting Pages

Change Margins

Change Page Size

Change to Landscape or Portrait

Create Posters

Change Page Colors

Change Image Settings


How Do I

Basics

Select Objects

Use Undo and Redo

Use Delete and Cancel

Cut, Copy, and Paste

Align and Position Objects

Use and Create Color Palettes

Save Drawings and Slide Shows

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

Move, Size, and Shape Objects

Duplicate, Group, and Align Objects

Change Attributes and Edit Objects

Create Bezier Curves

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Retrieve and Save QuickArt

Adding a Figure to a Gallery Category

Use QuickArt

Group and Separate Objects

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Create Bitmaps

Edit Bitmaps

Convert Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Create and Edit Text

Align and Space Text

Text as Drawing Objects

Use Text Tools

Retrieve and Save Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Create Data Charts

Edit Data Charts

Use XY Charts

Use Pie Charts

Change Chart Appearance

Change Axis, Grid, and Tick Options

Save and Convert Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Create a Bullet Chart

Edit a Bullet Chart

Create an Organization Chart

Edit an Organization Chart

Display Organization Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Slide Show Basics

Create a Slide Show

Use Slide Show Masters

Add Sound to Slide Shows

Play a Slide Show and Runtime Slide Shows

Retrieve and Save a Slide Show

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents

Select and Control Printers and Output Formats

Print Drawings and Slide Shows

Formatting Pages


How Do I

Basics

Select Objects

Select Single Objects

Select All Objects

Select Similar Objects

Use Undo and Redo

Use Delete and Cancel

Cut, Copy, and Paste

Align and Position Objects

Use and Create Color Palettes

Save Drawings and Slide Shows

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Select Objects

Use Undo and Redo

Undo Changes

Redo Changes

Use Delete and Cancel

Cut, Copy, and Paste

Align and Position Objects

Use and Create Color Palettes

Save Drawings and Slide Shows

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Select Objects

Use Undo and Redo

Use Delete and Cancel

Delete Backgrounds

Delete Layouts

Delete Objects and Text

Delete Rows and Columns

Delete Slides

Cancel Changes

Cut, Copy, and Paste

Align and Position Objects

Use and Create Color Palettes

Save Drawings and Slide Shows

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Select Objects

Use Undo and Redo

Use Delete and Cancel

Cut, Copy, and Paste

Cut Data and Text

Cut Objects and Text

Copy and Paste Colors

Copy Data and Text

Copy Objects and Text

Paste Data and Text

Paste Objects and Text

Align and Position Objects

Use and Create Color Palettes

Save Drawings and Slide Shows

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Select Objects

Use Undo and Redo

Use Delete and Cancel

Cut, Copy, and Paste

Align and Position Objects

Display the Grid

Align Objects with the Grid

Use Alignment Guides

Display the Ruler

Constrain while Drawing

Use and Create Color Palettes

Save Drawings and Slide Shows

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Select Objects

Use Undo and Redo

Use Delete and Cancel

Cut, Copy, and Paste

Align and Position Objects

Use and Create Color Palettes

Define Color Palettes

Blended or Rainbow Colors

Retrieve Color Palettes

Save Color Palettes

Choose Colors

Save Drawings and Slide Shows

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Select Objects

Use Undo and Redo

Use Delete and Cancel

Cut, Copy, and Paste

Align and Position Objects

Use and Create Color Palettes

Save Drawings and Slide Shows

Save Documents

Save Documents as Bitmaps

Save Gallery Figures As .WPG Files

Save with Even Borders

Save Selected Objects

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

Move, Size, and Shape Objects

Move an Object

Size or Stretch an Object

Rotate an Object

Skew an Object

Make an Object Appear 3-D

Shape an Object

Duplicate, Group, and Align Objects

Change Attributes and Edit Objects

Create Bezier Curves

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

Move, Size, and Shape Objects

Duplicate, Group, and Align Objects

Duplicate an Object

Group Objects

Align Objects

Space Objects

Change Attributes and Edit Objects

Create Bezier Curves

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

Move, Size, and Shape Objects

Duplicate, Group, and Align Objects

Change Attributes and Edit Objects

Change Fill Color

Change Fill Pattern

Change Fill Gradient

Change Line Color

Fill Arcs

Make Objects Transparent

Add Shadows

Edit Points

Create Bezier Curves

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

Move, Size, and Shape Objects

Duplicate, Group, and Align Objects

Change Attributes and Edit Objects

Create Bezier Curves

Draw Bezier Curves

Create a Cusp

Edit Bezier Points

Change Angles to Bezier Curves

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Retrieve and Save QuickArt

Save a Figure as a .WPG File

Retrieve a Figure from the Gallery

Import QuickArt

Adding a Figure to a Gallery Category

Use QuickArt

Group and Separate Objects

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Retrieve and Save QuickArt

Adding a Figure to a Gallery Category

Add to a Gallery Category

Add New Gallery Category

Create Cover Slides for New Gallery Categories

Link Your Figures to the Cover Slide

Use QuickArt

Group and Separate Objects

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Retrieve and Save QuickArt

Adding a Figure to a Gallery Category

Use QuickArt

Overlay Text

Use a QuickArt Background

Add QuickArt to Charts

Use QuickArt with Text

Create QuickArt Bullets

Create a Pictograph

Draw Floor Plans

Make Faces

Group and Separate Objects

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Retrieve and Save QuickArt

Adding a Figure to a Gallery Category

Use QuickArt

Group and Separate Objects

Group

Separate

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Create Bitmaps

Create a Bitmap Image

Use Foreground and Background Colors

Size a Bitmap Frame

Make a Color Transparent

Change Brush Attributes

Apply Special Effects

Edit Bitmaps

Convert Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Create Bitmaps

Edit Bitmaps

Edit a Bitmap

Move Areas

Duplicate Areas

Erase Areas

Edit Text in a Bitmap

Zoom to Edit Pixels

Erase Colors and Lines

Pick Up Colors

Convert Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Create Bitmaps

Edit Bitmaps

Convert Bitmaps

Convert a Bitmap to Vector

Convert Vector Images to Bitmap Images

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Create and Edit Text

Create Text

Activate Text

Edit Text

Size Text

Change Text Appearance

Change Fill Patterns

Change Gradient Fills

Rearrange Text

Align and Space Text

Text as Drawing Objects

Use Text Tools

Retrieve and Save Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Create and Edit Text

Align and Space Text

Position Text as Superscript or Subscript

Change the Relative Size of Text

Change Line Spacing

Align Text

Justify Text

Adjust Spacing Between Words and Letters

Text as Drawing Objects

Use Text Tools

Retrieve and Save Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Create and Edit Text

Align and Space Text

Text as Drawing Objects

Contour Text

Convert Text to Curves

Use Text Tools

Retrieve and Save Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Create and Edit Text

Align and Space Text

Text as Drawing Objects

Use Text Tools

Check for Misspelled Words

Use the Thesaurus

Use Grammatik

Retrieve and Save Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Create and Edit Text

Align and Space Text

Text as Drawing Objects

Use Text Tools

Retrieve and Save Text

Import Text

Export Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Create Data Charts

Which Data Chart Should I Use?

Create a Data Chart

Add the Chart Data

Import Data from a Spreadsheet or Table

Add a Chart Title

Add a Legend

Add the Labels

Close the Chart

Edit Data Charts

Use XY Charts

Use Pie Charts

Change Chart Appearance

Change Axis, Grid, and Tick Options

Save and Convert Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Create Data Charts

Edit Data Charts

Edit Chart Data

Insert Rows and Columns

Delete Rows and Columns

Change the Column Width

Clear Cell Data

Cut Cell Data

Copy Cell Data

Paste Cell Data

Use XY Charts

Use Pie Charts

Change Chart Appearance

Change Axis, Grid, and Tick Options

Save and Convert Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Create Data Charts

Edit Data Charts

Use XY Charts

Use Two Y Axes

Tips for Creating an XY Chart

Create a Linear Regression Trend Chart

Change the Chart Design

Change a Series Type

Change Bar Shapes

Display Data Labels

Use Pie Charts

Change Chart Appearance

Change Axis, Grid, and Tick Options

Save and Convert Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Create Data Charts

Edit Data Charts

Use XY Charts

Use Pie Charts

Tips for Creating Pie Charts

Create a Pie-Column Chart

Explode a Pie Slice

Change Pie Options

Change the Angle of a Pie

Sort Slices of a Pie

Size a Pie

Change Pie Labels

Change Chart Appearance

Change Axis, Grid, and Tick Options

Save and Convert Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Create Data Charts

Edit Data Charts

Use XY Charts

Use Pie Charts

Change Chart Appearance

Change a Series Color, Pattern, or Gradient

Change the Text Font

Add a QuickArt Figure

Change Axis, Grid, and Tick Options

Save and Convert Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Create Data Charts

Edit Data Charts

Use XY Charts

Use Pie Charts

Change Chart Appearance

Change Axis, Grid, and Tick Options

Change Axis Options

Change the Grid/Tick Marks

Save and Convert Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Create Data Charts

Edit Data Charts

Use XY Charts

Use Pie Charts

Change Chart Appearance

Change Axis, Grid, and Tick Options

Save and Convert Charts

Save a Chart Style

Export Data

Explode a Chart

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Create a Bullet Chart

Tips for Creating a Bullet Chart

Create a Bullet Chart

Define Bullets

Import a WordPerfect Document

Design Bullet Charts

Edit a Bullet Chart

Create an Organization Chart

Edit an Organization Chart

Display Organization Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Create a Bullet Chart

Edit a Bullet Chart

Edit a Bullet Chart

Change Text Font and Attributes

Change Bullet Options

Change the Justification of a Level

Change Box Options

Change Box Attributes

Create an Organization Chart

Edit an Organization Chart

Display Organization Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Create a Bullet Chart

Edit a Bullet Chart

Create an Organization Chart

Tips for Creating an Organization Chart

Create an Organization Chart

Add More than One Line of Text to a Position

Import a WordPerfect Document

Edit an Organization Chart

Display Organization Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Create a Bullet Chart

Edit a Bullet Chart

Create an Organization Chart

Edit an Organization Chart

Change the Box Attributes

Change the Base Font

Change the Font Color

Change the Connector Lines

Change the Chart Orientation

Display Organization Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Create a Bullet Chart

Edit a Bullet Chart

Create an Organization Chart

Edit an Organization Chart

Display Organization Charts

Display Part of a Chart

Display a Tall Organization

Display a Flat Organization

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Slide Show Basics

Strategies for a Successful Slide Show

Helps and Hints

Create a Slide Show

Use Slide Show Masters

Add Sound to Slide Shows

Play a Slide Show and Runtime Slide Shows

Retrieve and Save a Slide Show

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Slide Show Basics

Create a Slide Show

Create a Slide Show

Select a Template

Retrieve an Outline from WordPerfect

Sort Slides

Create Speaker Notes

Add Slide Transitions

Set Advance Options

Override the Transition and Advance Options

Use Slide Show Masters

Add Sound to Slide Shows

Play a Slide Show and Runtime Slide Shows

Retrieve and Save a Slide Show

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Slide Show Basics

Create a Slide Show

Use Slide Show Masters

Create a Slide Show Master

Add a Slide Show Master to the Master Gallery

Edit Layouts

Edit Backgrounds

Add Sound to Slide Shows

Play a Slide Show and Runtime Slide Shows

Retrieve and Save a Slide Show

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Slide Show Basics

Create a Slide Show

Use Slide Show Masters

Add Sound to Slide Shows

Add Sound Clips

Record Your Own Voice

Play a Slide Show and Runtime Slide Shows

Retrieve and Save a Slide Show

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Slide Show Basics

Create a Slide Show

Use Slide Show Masters

Add Sound to Slide Shows

Play a Slide Show and Runtime Slide Shows

Play a Slide Show

Use the Highlighter

Create a Runtime Slide Show

Play a Runtime Slide Show

Helps and Hints

Retrieve and Save a Slide Show

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Slide Show Basics

Create a Slide Show

Use Slide Show Masters

Add Sound to Slide Shows

Play a Slide Show and Runtime Slide Shows

Retrieve and Save a Slide Show

Import a Slide Show

Move Slides to Another Slide Show

Save a Slide Show

Print and Format Documents


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents

Select and Control Printers and Output Formats

Select a Printer

Control Your Printer

Print to Film Recorders and Plotters

Export Files to Other Formats

Print Drawings and Slide Shows

Formatting Pages


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents

Select and Control Printers and Output Formats

Print Drawings and Slide Shows

Preview a Drawing

Print a Drawing

Print a Slide Show Saved to a Disk

Print Slide Show Handouts or Speaker Notes

Print a Poster

Formatting Pages


How Do I

Basics

Draw and Edit Objects

QuickArt

Bitmaps

Text

Data Charts

Text Charts

Slide Shows

Print and Format Documents

Select and Control Printers and Output Formats

Print Drawings and Slide Shows

Formatting Pages

Change Margins

Change Page Size

Change to Landscape or Portrait

Create Posters

Change Page Colors

Change Image Settings


Using Help

The following information explains basic features of a Help topic (this screen is a Help topic).

Pop-up definitions are dot-underlined, colored words and phrases that you click to see a "pop-up" window that displays information. The pop-ups below explain the buttons on the top of this Help screen, and are examples of the pop-ups found in Help. Click once to read them, then click again to close them.

Contents

Search

Back

History

Print

Close

Jump terms are underlined, colored words and phrases that move you to another Help topic. To read the topic about Context-sensitive Help, click this jump term:  context-sensitive Help, then click the Back button to return to this Help topic.

	The light bulb is an icon containing a hint. Click the light bulb to read the hint.
	Text following a route icon shows the menus and buttons you choose to access a feature.
	Text following an exclamation point is important information.
	Text following a reference icon directs you to the printed documentation.
Many Help topics contain graphics you can click to display a pop-up definition.


object linking and embedding (OLE) (def)
object linking and embedding (OLE)

The process of creating a document in one application (client or container application) that contains text or graphics created in another application (server application). When a linked object is altered in the server application, it is automatically updated in the client/container application. Embedded objects are not updated.


Search

Help, Search for Help On

Purpose

Use Search to find topics by feature name or keyword.

Steps

1	Choose Search for Help On from the Help menu.

Choose the Search button in the Help screen.

2	Type or select the word or phrase you want to search for.

3	Double-click a term from the list of terms.

Choose Show Topics.

4	Double-click an item from the list of topics.

Select the topic you want to view, then choose Go To.

See Also

Using Help


Close button (def)
Close button

A Help button you can use to close the Help window.


ODMA Support

Purpose

ODMA (Open Document Management API) lets you use other ODMA-supporting document management systems you have installed instead of WordPerfect's file management dialog.

Steps

To use a WordPerfect file management dialog,

1	Request a WordPerfect file management dialog box from the current document management system.

To return to your document management system,

1	Open a WordPerfect file management dialog box.

2	Choose the appropriate button.

See Also

Managing Files


route (def)
 route

The path that indicates where a feature is found. The hand icon points to the steps you take to access the feature.


jump term (def)
jump term

A graphic or underlined, colored word or phrase you can choose to go to a related Help topic.


Open a Copy of a File

Purpose

Use Open As Copy to open a document as a read-only copy. You can read the document and make changes to it, but you must save it with a different filename.

Steps

1	Choose Open from the File menu, then select Open As Copy.

2	Specify the filename you want, then choose Open.

3	Read the file or make changes to it.

4	Choose Save As from the File menu, type a new name for the file, then choose Save.

See Also

Opening Files


Context-Sensitive Help

Purpose

Use Shift+F1 or F1 to get context-sensitive Help in a dialog box, menu, or window. Shift+F1 requires a mouse and provides more specific help than F1.

Steps

To use Shift+F1,

1	Press Shift+F1 in a dialog box, menu, or window.

2	Click the item or control you want information about.

To use F1,

1	Press F1 while a menu item is highlighted or when a dialog box or window is open.

or

Choose the Help button in a dialog box.

See Also

Using Help


 Hint

Find allows you to use multiple wildcard characters (* and ?) in your search string.


Assign Characters to Keys

Purpose

Use the Keyboard Editor and the Characters feature to assign characters in other alphabets to combinations of keys (such as A+Alt) on your keyboard.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the Edit menu, then choose Keyboard.

2	Select the existing keyboard layout you want to add the characters to, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, type a name for the new keyboard layout, then choose OK.

3	Click in the list of possible key combinations, then select the key combination you want to assign to a character by scrolling or typing the letter.

4	Select Play a Keyboard Script, then click in the text box.

5	Press Ctrl+W to bring up the Characters dialog box.

6	Choose the character set you want to use, then select the character you want to assign.

7	Choose Insert and Close.

8	Choose Assign Script.

9	Choose OK, choose Select to use the new keyboard layout, then choose Close.

See Also

WordPerfect Characters


Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder, Concepts

Purpose

Use Concept Builder to expand your QuickFinder searches by including alternative forms of words such as conjugations, synonyms, and other spellings.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box.

2	Type the word(s) you want to Search For, then choose Concepts.

3	Select the search term for which you want to include alternate words.

4	Choose from the following options:

Word Forms

Thesaurus

Thes. -> Word Forms

Typo

Phonetic

5	Select the original or alternative words you do not want to use and choose Disable. (Select disabled words and choose Enable to include them again.)

6	Choose OK to include the enabled alternative words in the search.

7	Choose Find to begin the search including the alternative words.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Search For

QuickFinder Search In

Refine QuickFinder Searches


Select Directory

Purpose

Use the folder icon to select the directory you want. It appears next to text boxes where you need to specify a directory name. When you choose OK, the directory you selected appears in the text box.

Steps

1	Click the folder icon.

2	Select the drive and directory you want to list the files in.

or

Choose a QuickList entry.

3	Choose OK.


Filename

Purpose

Use the Filename text box to specify the file you want. You can type in the full pathname of a file, or select it from the list of files in the current directory. You can also use the History list to access a list of previously opened files or selected directories.

Steps

To select a particular filename,

1	In a directory dialog box, select the drive and directory you want to list the files in.

or

Choose a QuickList entry.

2	Specify the name of the file you want to open, select or save.

3	Choose OK.

or

Right-click on the files list, then choose the option you want.

To select a previously selected filename or directory,

1	In a directory dialog box, click the arrow to the right of the Filename text box.

2	Select the name of the file you want to open, or the directory you want to use.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Directories List

Drives

File List

File Options

QuickList


List Files of Type

Purpose

Use the List Files of Type drop-down list to choose the type of files you want to display. For example, choosing Text Files (*.txt) displays all the files in the current directory with a .TXT extension.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, choose the file type you want to display in the file list.

See Also

Directories List

Drives

File List

QuickList

Save File As Type


Drives

Purpose

Use the Drives drop-down list to choose the drive in which you want to list directories and files.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, choose the drive you want.

See Also

Directories List

File List

QuickList


File List

Purpose

Use the file list box to view the files in the currently selected drive and directory, and to select the files you want to use.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the type of files you want to list.

2	Select the drive and directory whose files you want to list.

or

Select a QuickList item.

3	Select the file(s) you want.

4	Choose OK.

or

Right-click on the files list, then select the option you want.

See Also

Directories List

Drives

File List Display

File Options

List Files of Type

QuickList

Save File As Type


QuickList

Purpose

Use the QuickList to access directories or files without entering the full path every time. Use the QuickList options to change the default directory display in your directory dialog boxes and to edit your QuickList.

Steps

To display the QuickList,

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose QuickList.

2	Choose Show QuickList, Show Directories, or Show Both.

To use the QuickList,

1	Select the QuickList item you want.

2	Select the file(s) you want.

3	Choose OK.

or

Right-click on the files list, then select the option you want.

See Also

Add or Edit QuickList Item

Delete QuickList Item

Print Lists

Open/Save As Setup


Viewer

Purpose

Use the Viewer to display, print, or play files without retrieving them into the document window.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list, then select a file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

3	Right-click on the Viewer window, then select an option from the QuickMenu to use Viewer features.

4	Choose Close from the Control menu to exit the Viewer.

See Also

Additional Information about Viewer

Viewer Info

Viewing Files


File Options

Purpose

Use the File Options pop-up list to choose options you want to perform on the selected file(s) or directory.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to affect.

2	Choose File Options, then choose from the following options:

Copy

Move

Rename

Delete

Change Attributes

Print

Print File List

Create Directory

Remove Directory

Rename Directory


Directories List

Purpose

Use the Directories list box to view a list of directories and subdirectories in a selected drive and to select the directory you want to use.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select a drive from the Drives drop-down list, then double-click directory names to list their subdirectories.

2	Double-click a directory name to select that directory and display the names of the files in it.

3	Right-click on the Directories list, then choose Create Directory to create a subdirectory within a selected directory.

or

Choose Remove Directory to remove the selected directory.

See Also

Create Directory

Drives

File Options

Print Lists

QuickList

Remove Directory


Sorting Files

Open/Save As Setup, Sort By and Sort Order

Purpose

Use Sort By to sort filenames in the files list box by filename, extension, size, date/time, descriptive name, or descriptive type. Use Sort Order to specify an ascending or descending order.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Select a Sort By option.

3	Select a Sort Order.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Speedup Files

File List Display

Open/Save As Setup


File List Display

Open/Save As Setup, File List Display

Purpose

Use File List Display to specify which elements of a file's description will display in the file list box.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Select a Show option.

3	Select Show Column Labels if you want to display headings for Custom Columns.

4	Select Show Hidden/System Files if you want to display hidden and system files.

5	Select Change Default Directory to change the default directory every time you move to a new directory.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Speedup Files

Open/Save As Setup

Sorting Files


Create Speedup Files

Open/Save As Setup, Create Speedup Files

Purpose

Use Create Speedup Files to make files display faster when you are displaying Document Summary information (descriptive name and type) in the file list.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Select Custom Columns or Descriptive Name, Filename.

3	Select Create Speedup Files.

4	Specify a directory to store the speedup files.

5	If the directory specified does not exist, choose Yes to create the directory.

See Also

File List Display

Open/Save As Setup

Sorting Files


Word Forms

Includes conjugations, plurals, adjective, and adverb forms of the selected word in the search.


Save File As Type

Purpose

Use the Save File As Type drop-down list to choose the format of the file you want to save.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the drive and directory where you want to save your file.

2	Specify the name of the file you want to save.

3	Choose the format you want.

4	Choose OK to save the file in the selected format.

See Also

Directories List

Drives

Filename

File List

QuickList

Save Format


QuickFinder Search For

QuickFinder, Search For

Purpose

Use Search For to specify the word string or word pattern you want QuickFinder to find.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, type a word or phrase to search for.

2	Choose Operators, then choose options to refine your search.

3	Choose Concepts, choose the words you want to include, then choose OK.

4	Specify a File Pattern and choose a Search In option to add further search criteria.

5	Choose Find.

See Also

Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Search In

Refine QuickFinder Searches


QuickFinder

Purpose

Use QuickFinder to search for specific files by file pattern, words or phrases, summary fields (such as descriptive name, abstract, or typist), date range, or QuickFinder (full-text) index. QuickFinder indexes are full-text indexes of all the words in a collection of documents.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then specify your search criteria.

2	Type a file pattern to search for.

3	Type a text string to search for.

4	Choose a Search In option.

5	Select WordPerfect Documents Only to limit the search to documents in WordPerfect 5.0/5.1/5.2/6.0 format.

6	Specify a From date and To date to specify files whose DOS revision date falls within a date range.

7	Choose Find to obtain a list of filenames that match your search criteria. The Search Results List displays all matching filenames.

Choose from the following options for more information:

File Pattern

Search For

Search In

Concepts

Operators

Options

See Also

Additional Information about QuickFinder

Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Preferences


Create or Edit Index Criteria

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use QuickFinder Indexer to create and edit indexing criteria (the directories, files, or indexing options included in your index) and to generate QuickFinder indexes for quick searches. QuickFinder indexes are full-text indexes of all the words in a collection of documents.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Choose Create, type a name for the index, then choose OK.

or

Select the name of the index you want to edit, then choose Edit.

3	Type the name of the directory or file you want to add.

or

Choose Browse to display a list of files and directories, then select the directories you want to index, then choose Add. Select the directories you do not want to index, then choose Remove.

4	Select Include Subtree to include all subdirectories.

5	Choose Options to set individual indexing preferences.

6	Choose Generate to create the index.

If you are editing an index, indicate if you want to regenerate the entire index or update the index with new or modified files, then choose OK.

7	From QuickFinder, enter search criteria, then choose Find to search the newly created index.

Choose the following option for more information:

Options

See Also

Add Directory or File

Index Name

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Viewing Files

Viewer, select a file

Purpose

Use the Viewer to display, print, or play the contents of text, graphics, audio-visual, sound, cursor, icon, and fax files. The Viewer may not show all formatting exactly as it appears in the file.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list, then select a file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

Use the controls in the Viewer to play, stop, reset, fast forward, rewind, or move to the beginning or end of audio-visual or sound file.

3	To use features supported by the Viewer, right-click inside the Viewer window, then select an option from the QuickMenu. The QuickMenu will change, depending on what type of file you are viewing.

Copy to Clipboard

Document Summary

Document Text

Find

Find Next

Find Previous

Font

Go To Page

Graphic Conversion

Hex Display

Invert

Next Page

Previous Page

Print

Remove Highlights

Rotate

Viewer Info

Word Wrap

Zoom

4	Choose Close from the Viewer Control menu to exit the Viewer.

See Also

Printing from the Viewer

Viewer Info


Delete Index

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete Index to delete an existing QuickFinder index.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then select the index you want to delete.

2	Choose Options, choose Delete, then choose Yes.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


QuickFinder Document Summary Fields

QuickFinder, Options, Summary Fields

Purpose

Use Summary Fields to display and search a list of document summary fields. Only WordPerfect 5.0/5.1/5.2/6.0-level documents that contain document summary information will be found.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Options, then choose All Summary Fields to expand the dialog box to display all possible document summary fields.

or

Choose Default Summary Fields to display a selected set of summary fields.

2	Specify the text, numbers, or dates you want to find.

3	Specify additional searching criteria such as file patterns, phrases, or date ranges.

4	Choose Find to perform the search.

See Also

Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Options

Refine QuickFinder Searches


Clear

QuickFinder, Options, Clear

Purpose

Use Clear to remove all present QuickFinder search criteria, including all document summary fields scrolled off-screen (if the dialog has been expanded using Default Summary Fields or All Summary Fields under Options).

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Options, then choose Clear.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Options

QuickFinder Document Summary Fields


Thesaurus

Includes synonyms of the selected word from the Thesaurus list in the search.


Thes. -> Word Forms

Includes conjugations, plurals, adjective, and adverb forms of the synonyms of the selected word in the search.


Typos

Includes possible misspellings and typos of the selected word in the search, and words the selected word might be a misspelling or typo for.


QuickFinder File Pattern

QuickFinder, File Pattern

Purpose

Use File Pattern to find files with filenames that contain characters or extensions in common. You can specify multiple directories or file patterns in this field.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, type a file pattern. Use wildcards to help define the pattern.

2	Type a word string to Search For, along with any operators you want.

You may specify additional search criteria in any of the QuickFinder fields, such as Search For and Date Range.

3	Choose Find to perform the search.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Search For

QuickFinder Search In


QuickFinder Search In

QuickFinder, Search In

Purpose

Use Search In to specify which drives, directories, or indexes you want to search for files.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose a Search In option.

If you selected QuickFinder Index, select the index you want to search from. Information about the index appears on the next line of the dialog box.

If you selected Disk, choose the disk you want to search.

2	Specify your search criteria in the Search For, File Pattern, Date Range, or Document Summary fields, then choose Find.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Search For


Phonetic

Includes phonetic spellings that sound like the selected word in the search.


Scan Off

Appears as /Noscan

Disables QuickFinder's scanning in proximity and quoted searches. This results in a longer list of files that include the search words, but does not check their order or closeness.


button (def)
button

A graphic that represents an option or command. Select the button to activate the option or to execute the command.


template (def)
template

A page layout, chart, or background format you can use as a model.


help prompt (def)
help prompt

A short explanation of the menu item or option you have selected.


folder icon (def)
 folder icon

A small file folder icon next to a text box. The folder icon appears on dialog boxes and is used to access another dialog box to select files or change directories. Sometimes called a list button.


fat bits (def)
fat bits

Small squares of color used to build bitmap images. Also called pixels.


bitmap (def)
bitmap

A graphic formed by a series of dots (pixels). Sometimes called a paint image or a raster image.


menu (def)
menu

A list of options displayed on screen from which you can select a particular function or command.


pathname (def)
pathname

The address of a file. A full pathname includes the drive, the root directory, any subdirectory names, and the filename.


directory (def)
directory

An index of filenames and subdirectories. A directory can be divided into subdirectories. A root directory is the main directory of a disk. All other directories branch from the root.


directory dialog box (def)
directory dialog box

Dialog boxes that allow you to open, save, name, find, view, copy, move, rename, delete, and print files. They also let you create and remove directories. Directory dialog boxes appear when you use any feature that retrieves or saves a file, such as Open, Save As, Insert File, and so on.


Relevancy in QuickFinder Searches

QuickFinder, Options, Estimated Relevance Ranking and Full Word Count Relevance

Purpose

Use Estimated Relevance Ranking and Full Word Count Relevance to let QuickFinder rank the documents satisfying the search query in order of relevancy, based on the number of words found. Complex queries with several words will give higher Relevancy numbers, since relevancy is additive. Relevancy numbers apply only to the current search query-they are not comparable across different queries.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, define a search query using a file pattern or word pattern, along with any operators, date ranges, and document summary field information you want to search for.

2	Choose Options, then choose Estimated Relevance Ranking.

or

Choose Full Word Count Relevancy.

3	Choose Find.

The Search Results List appears sorted in order of relevancy, with the most relevant at the top of the list. This is how QuickFinder determines relevancy:

Scan and Index searching with Full Word Count Relevance:  QuickFinder automatically uses a scanning search.  The Search Results List displays the number of times the search text is found in the document. This search takes longer but is more precise.

Index searching with Estimated Relevance Ranking:  The Search Results List displays the number of hits (search elements) found, determined by the level of the index (document paragraph, line, and so on).

Scan searching with Estimated Relevance Ranking:  The Search Results List displays the estimated # of hits per 1000 words. If the search word(s) is found on page 1, QuickFinder estimates how many hits the document would yield in each 1000 words.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Search Results List


dialog box (def)
dialog box

Dialog boxes let you communicate with an application. They display warnings and messages, and they let you select and implement options by choosing appropriate command buttons. Dialog boxes have a title bar and a control menu, but they do not have a menu bar. They can be moved to different locations on the screen. Most dialog boxes must be closed before you can work in the document window, but a few allow you to move between the window and the dialog box.

When a dialog box option is unavailable and cannot be used, it appears dim. If subsequent actions make the item available, it changes to a normal appearance.


text box (dialog box) (def)
text box (dialog box)

The area in a dialog box where you type text or where the application types text for you. The selection insertion point must be in the text box before you can begin to type.


Viewer Info

Lets you display default settings by viewer or file type.


Find Next

Lets you find the next occurrence of the current Viewer search text. (Find Next appears only if you have used Find in a text file.)


Find Previous

Lets you find the previous occurrence of the current Viewer search text. (Find Previous appears only if you have used Find in a text file.)


drop-down list (def)
drop-down list

A list of options that appears to "drop down" from an option when you click a button in a dialog box. Drop-down lists are marked by downward-pointing arrows.


pop-up list (def)
pop-up list

A list of options that appears when a pop-up button is selected. Most pop-up lists are marked by double arrows or triangles and display mutually exclusive options. The button itself shows the selected option. Other pop-up lists, marked by single arrows or triangles, show the feature name rather than the selected option.


headword (def)
headword

A word that can be looked up in the Thesaurus. A reference marked with a bullet is a headword. Select a headword to display other references which are divided into nouns (n), verbs (v), adjectives (a), and antonyms (ant).


keyboard script (def)
keyboard script

A keyboard script can contain text, extended and WordPerfect characters, and simple commands (such as keystrokes that bring up a dialog box). You can use any keystroke combination available in the Keyboard Editor. Type keystroke combinations in braces: {Alt+F7}.


About QuickFinder

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, About

Purpose

The WordPerfect QuickFinder File Indexer is an application you can use to create indexes for selected documents and then rapidly search through these indexes for documents containing a specific word or phrase. You can also use QuickFinder to search for specific files and file patterns.

Use About QuickFinder to read about your version of QuickFinder, the release date, program paths, and initialization files.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then choose Options.

2	Choose About.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Add or Edit QuickList Item

QuickList, Add Item

Purpose

Use Add QuickList Item to add items to the list of directories and files you use frequently. Use Edit QuickList Item to edit your list of frequently used directories and files.

Steps

To add a QuickList item,

1	Enter any directory dialog box.

2	Right-click on the QuickList, then choose Add Item.

3	Specify the directory or filename you want to add to the QuickList.

4	Type a descriptive name.

5	Choose OK.

To edit a QuickList item,

1	Enter any directory dialog box.

2	Select the item you want to edit.

3	Right-click on the QuickList, then choose Edit Item.

4	Make the changes you want.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Delete QuickList Item

QuickList


Toolbar Image Editor

Toolbar, right-click, Toolbar Editor, double-click a button, Edit

Purpose

Use the Toolbar Image Editor to change the graphic on a button.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar, then choose Preferences.

2	Select a Toolbar, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, select Create a New Toolbar, specify a name for the new Toolbar, then choose Create.

3	Double-click the button you want, then choose Edit.

4	Select the colors you want to use with the left and right mouse buttons.

5	Select Draw to change colors one square at a time.

or

Select Fill to change areas of one color to another color.

6	Choose from the following options:

Copy

Paste

Undo

Clear

7	Choose OK and Close.

See Also

Edit Button and Menu Item Properties

Toolbar Customize

Toolbar Editor


Toolbar Editor

Toolbar, right-click, Edit

Purpose

Use the Toolbar Editor to create and edit Toolbars.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar, then choose Preferences.

2	Select a Toolbar, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, select Create a New Toolbar, specify a name for the new Toolbar, then choose Create.

3	Select Activate a Feature, select a category and feature, then choose Add Button.

or

Select Play a Keyboard Script, type the keystrokes the button will play, then choose Add Script.Select Launch a Program, choose Select File, specify the file you want to run, then choose OK.

or

Select Play a Macro, choose Add Macro, then specify the location, path, and filename of the macro, then choose OK to add a file macro.

or

Select Play a Macro, choose Add Template Macro, select a template macro and location, then choose OK to add a template macro.

4	Drag a Separator onto the Toolbar to add a space between buttons.

5	Drag a button or separator on the Toolbar to move it.

6	Drag a button or separator off the Toolbar to delete it.

7	Choose OK and Close.

See Also

Toolbar Customize

Toolbar Image Editor


Toolbar Customize

Toolbar, right click, Toolbar Editor, double-click a button

Purpose

Use Toolbar Customize to change the text and graphics on buttons and to edit help prompts for buttons.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar, then choose Preferences.

2	Select a Toolbar, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, select Create a New Toolbar, specify a name for the new Toolbar, then choose Create.

3	Double-click the button you want to customize.

4	Type a new button label.

5	Type a new help prompt.

6	Choose Edit, change the button graphic, then choose OK.

7	Choose Properties, edit the macro path, application information, or keyboard script, then choose OK.

8	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Edit Button and Menu Item Properties

Menu Bar Editor

Toolbar Editor

Toolbar Image Editor


Change File Attributes

Purpose

Use Change Attributes to change the Archive, Read-Only, Hidden, and System attributes of one or more files.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to change. Make sure the selected files are not already open.

2	Right-click on the files list, then choose Change Attributes.

3	Choose from the following options:

Archive

Read-Only

Hidden

System

4	Choose OK.

See Also

File Options


 Hint

To open a file without choosing OK, double-click a filename in the file list box of a directory dialog box that lets you open files.


Remove Highlights

Removes any highlights placed in the Viewer file by Find.


Language

Purpose

Use Language to specify the language conventions for text in your documents and to specify a language to use with Grammatik, Hyphenation, Document Information, Spell Checker, and Thesaurus. Language codes  are used to customize date and time formatting, sorting orders, and currency symbols.

You can change the language for the current document only, in the initial codes style (for features such as Grammatik and Sort), and in the default initial codes style to use the formatting conventions of another language in all new documents.

      	Each copy of an application normally comes with only one dictionary for the Spell Checker, Thesaurus, and Hyphenation features.  At least one additional language module must be installed in order to use a different language. You can purchase language modules separately. Language modules also include keyboard files.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to specify the formatting conventions for another language.

or

Select the text you want to specify conventions for.

2	Open the Language dialog box.

3	Choose a language.

or

Type a two-letter language code in the Language text box.

4	Select Disable Writing Tools (in this portion of the text) if you want Spell Checker, Grammatik, or Thesaurus to skip the selected text.

5	Choose OK.


 Hint

Type an ampersand (&) in front of any character you want to make a mnemonic.


Drag and Drop Capabilities

Purpose

Use the drag-and-drop capabilities built into directory dialog boxes to launch applications, open files, package files as OLE objects, and create Windows Program Manager icons for applications.

Steps

To launch an application,

1	In a directory dialog box, drag a filename from the list box onto the .EXE file for the application you want to launch.

This launches the application and opens the selected file within it.

To open a file in an open application,

1	Open the application you want to work in.

2	Open a directory dialog box in another application.

3	Drag the filename of the file you want from the files list onto the title bar of the application.

To package a file as an OLE object,

1	Open a directory dialog box.

2	Drag the filename of the file you want from the files list into an open document window in a different application.

To create an application icon,

1	Open a directory dialog box.

2	Drag an .EXE file into a Program Group in Windows Program Manager.

See Also

Managing Files

Opening Files


 Hint

New key assignments work only when a document window is active (not when a dialog box is open).


 Hint

Filenames can be a maximum of eight characters, followed by a period and a three-character extension. When you name a document, do not use the following characters:  * + = [ ] : ;   < > ? / \ |. A period can be used only to separate the first part of the filename from the filename extension. For example, if you specify the filename GIRAFFE.ABCD, an application will read and record the name as GIRAFFE.ABC.

If you do not specify an extension, an application saves the file with the extension that identifies the format selected. Specify a filename that ends with the period if you do not want to add the default extension.


Import Indexes

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Import

Purpose

Use Import to access QuickFinder indexes created by others.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Choose Options, then choose Import. You can select more than one index at a time to import.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


 Hint

You will not be able to recover the files or subdirectories after you delete them.

If you do not select a different directory before choosing Remove Directory, the application will remove the current directory.


Rename Directories

Purpose

Use Rename Directory to give directories new names.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, right-click on the Directories list, then choose Rename Directory.

2	Specify the new location or name for the selected directory, then choose Rename.

See Also

Create Directory

Remove Directory


Archive

Archives or backs up the file(s) the next time you run a third-party backup program.


Copy Files

Purpose

Use Copy to copy one file or multiple files into other drives or directories.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to copy.

2	Right-click on the files list, then choose Copy.

3	Specify the path or filename for the file(s).

4	Select Don't replace files with the same size, date, and time to avoid copying files that are identical to the files they would replace.

5	Choose Copy.

You can also copy files by selecting a filename from the list box and dragging it to another drive or directory in the Directories list box or the QuickList.

See Also

Move Files

Rename Files


Create Directory

Purpose

Use Create Directory to create a new directory or subdirectory in the current drive.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the drive or directory you want to add a directory to.

2	Right-click on the Directory list, then choose Create Directory.

3	Type a name for the directory.

4	Choose Create.

See Also

File Options

Remove Directory

Rename Directory


Index Name

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create

Purpose

Use Index Name to specify a name for the QuickFinder index you are about to create.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Choose Create.

3	Type a name for the index, then choose OK.

See Also

Create Index

QuickFinder


Read-Only

Protects the file(s) from being modified or deleted.


Password Protect

Purpose

Use Password Protect to assign a password to a WordPerfect document when you save it as a file and to remove a password from a file. When you protect a document with a password, any associated backup or temporary files created by the application are also protected.

      	Enhanced Password Protection is case sensitive and includes powerful encryption capabilities. The Password feature is not available with all applications and file formats. If you save a password protected file in a non-WP format or WP 4.2 format, the password is removed.

Steps

To assign a password to a file,

1	In a directory dialog box, type the name of the file you want to save.

or

Select the name of the file you want to replace with the file you are saving.

2	Choose a WordPerfect format that supports the Password Protect feature.

3	Select Password Protect, then choose OK.

4	If you chose WordPerfect 6.0 format, select Enhanced or Original password protection, then choose OK.

5	Type the password that you want to use, then choose OK.

6	Re-type the password, then choose OK.

To open a password-protected file,

1	In a directory dialog box, type the name of the protected file you want to open, then choose OK.

2	Type the assigned password, then choose OK.

To remove a password from a file,

1	In a directory dialog box, specify the name of the protected file, then choose OK.

2	Type the password, then choose OK.

3	In the open password-protected file, choose Save As from the File menu.

4	Specify the name of the protected file, deselect Password Protect, then choose OK.

5	Choose Yes to replace the password-protected file.


Custom Columns

If you also select Show Column Labels, Custom Columns lets you select from a list of column types to display in a file list.


Location for Index Files

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Preferences

Purpose

Use Location for Index Files to identify the directory where you want to place your QuickFinder indexes.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Choose Options, then choose Preferences.

3	Specify a location for Index Files, then choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Copy

Lets you copy the image to the Clipboard.


Delete Files

Purpose

Use Delete to delete one or more files.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to delete.

2	Right-click on the files list, then choose Delete.

3	Choose Delete.

See Also

Copy Files

File Options

Move Files


Hidden

Hides the file(s) in directory dialog box file lists and QuickFinder Search Results lists, and makes it a hidden file for DOS.


Paste

Lets you paste the Clipboard contents to the image editor.


 Hint

To select a column label, click a blank space between column labels with the right mouse button, then choose an option. You may need to scroll right to find a blank space.


Wildcard Off and Wildcard On

Appear as /Nowildcard and /Wildcard

Wildcard Off disables wildcard functionality and accepts * and ? as characters in your search query.

Wildcard On returns QuickFinder's wildcard capability and treats * and ? as wildcards, not as characters.


Undo

Lets you reverse your last change.


Network

Purpose

Use the Network options list to view and edit network settings. The number and type of options will vary depending on your network software. Network only appears if your computer is connected to a network.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Network.

Depending on the network driver and version you are using, the options that appear will vary. Choose the Help buttons on the Network dialog boxes for more information.


Clear

Lets you remove the entire graphic from the editing area.


Add Directory or File

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create or Edit, Add Directory or File

Purpose

Use Add Directory or File to create or edit a directory pattern that you want to include in the index.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, specify an index name, then choose OK.

2	Type the pathnames of the drives and directories you want to index.

or

Choose Browse to select the drives and directories to be indexed.

3	Select Include Subtrees to include subdirectories.

4	Choose Add to add the directory pattern to the list of directories to be indexed.

5	Choose Generate to generate the index.

See Also

Create or Edit Index Criteria

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Index File Information

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Information

Purpose

Use Index File Information to display information about the contents of your QuickFinder index files.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer.

2	Choose Options, then choose Information.

You must have an index created to use this option.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Index Method

QuickFinder, Indexer, Generate

Purpose

Use Index Method to regenerate the entire index or just update the index with new, modified, or deleted files. Updating an index is faster than regenerating the entire index. But as the incremental (.INC) index file gets large, regenerate the entire index to speed up the updating process.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then choose an index to update.

2	Choose Generate.

3	Choose Index All Files to regenerate the entire index.

or

Choose Update Index With New or Modified Files to update the index with new, modified, or deleted files.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Individual Index Options

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create or Edit, Options

Purpose

Use Individual Index Options to specify indexing conditions for the selected QuickFinder Index.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, specify an index, then choose Edit.

2	Choose Options.

3	Choose from the following options:

Entire Document

Entire Document-Summary Fields

Text Only

Summary Fields Only

Filename Only

4	Select WordPerfect Documents Only to exclude unknown formats.

5	Select Include Numbers in Index to index numbers.

6	Specify file extensions you want to exclude from the index.

7	Specify an Index Level to determine how large an area to look for word patterns.

8	Specify how the index should interpret extended characters in unrecognized formats.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Create or Edit Index Criteria

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Keyboard Editor

Purpose

Use the Keyboard Editor to create or edit a keyboard layout by assigning features to keys on your keyboard. You can assign features and actions to most keys such as alphanumeric keys, number pad keys, positioning keys, and function keys. You can also assign keystrokes that include modifier keys. When you press a keystroke, you activate the feature or command mapped to that keystroke.

Steps

1	Open the Keyboard Editor.

2	Select Activate a Feature, select the keystroke to assign, select a category and feature, then choose Assign Feature.

or

Select Play a Keyboard Script, select the keystroke to assign, type the script, then choose Assign Script.

or

Select Launch a Program, select the keystroke to assign, choose Select File, specify the file you want to run, then choose OK.

or

Select Play a Macro, select the keystroke to assign, choose Assign Macro, specify the location, path, and filename of the macro, then choose OK to add a file macro.

or

Select Play a Macro, select the keystroke to assign, choose Assign Template Macro, select a template macro and location, then choose OK to add a template macro.

3	Choose Unassign to remove the assignment from the selected keystroke.

4	Select Assignment Appears on Menu to display the selected keystroke on the pull-down menus.

5	Select Allow Assignment to Characters to assign a feature, script, macro, or program to a number or letter key without modifier keys.

If you assign an alphanumeric key, it will no longer act as a number or letter key. For example, if you map the Bold command to the letter B, pressing that key will turn on Bold. It will no longer allow you to type the letter B.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Assign Characters to Keys


QuickFinder Search Query

QuickFinder, Options, Load Search Query, Save Search Query, Delete Search Query

Purpose

Use QuickFinder Options to save, reuse, or delete a QuickFinder search query.

Steps

To save a search query,

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, define a search query using a file pattern or word pattern, along with any operators, date ranges, and document summary field information you want to search for.

2	Choose Options, then choose Save Search Query.

3	Type a name for the search, then choose Save.

To reuse a saved search query,

1	Choose Options, then choose Load Search Query.

2	Select the search query you want to retrieve, then choose Load.

To delete a search query,

1	Choose Delete Search Query.

2	Select the search query you want to delete, then choose Remove.

If you accidentally delete a name from the Search Query list, choose Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving the changes.

See Also

QuickFinder Options


Prefix Mode On and Off

Appear as /Prefix and /Noprefix

Prefix Mode On treats all search terms as wildcard searches.  For example, (/Prefix cat & dog) finds "cats," "catapult," "catalepsy," "dogs," "doggerel," and so on.

Prefix Mode Off turns off this functionality and searches only for the words specified.


Menu Bar Editor

Menu Bar, right click, Preferences, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use the Menu Bar Editor to move, delete, add features to, and create new menus on the menu bar.

Steps

1	Right-click on a menu bar, then choose Preferences.

2	Select a Menu Bar, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Create, select Create a New Menu Bar, specify a name for the new Menu Bar, then choose Create.

3	Select Activate a Feature, select a category and feature, then drag the feature to the menu where you want it.

or

Select Play a Keyboard Script, type the keystrokes the menu item will play, then choose Add Script.

or

Select Launch a Program, choose Select File, specify the file you want to run, then choose OK.

or

Select Play a Macro, choose Add Macro, then specify the location, path, and filename of the macro, then choose OK to add a file macro.

or

Select Play a Macro, choose Add Template Macro, select a template macro and location, then choose OK to add a template macro.

4	Drag an item from one menu to another to move it.

5	Drag an item from a menu to delete it.

6	Drag the Menu icon to a menu to add a cascading submenu.

7	Drag the Separator icon to the menu to add a dividing line.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Edit Menu Text


Edit Menu Text

Menu Bar, right-click, Menu Bar Editor, double-click a menu item

Purpose

Use Edit Menu Text to edit the text on menus and on menu help prompts.

Steps

1	Open the Menu Bar Editor, then double-click the menu item you want to edit.

2	Type new text for the menu item.

3	Type a new Help Prompt.

4	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Menu Bar Editor


System

Identifies the file(s) to DOS as part of your computer's operating system. The file(s) are not displayed in directory dialog box file lists or QuickFinder Search Results lists.


Move Files

Purpose

Use Move to move one or more files to a different drive or directory.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to move.

2	Right-click on the files list, then choose Move.

3	Type the path or filename you want the file(s) moved to.

or

Click the list button, select the directory you want the files moved to, then choose OK.

4	Choose Move.

You can also move files by selecting a filename from the list box and pressing Alt or Shift while dragging it to another drive or directory in the Directories list box or the QuickList.

See Also

Copy Files

File Options


Move Index File

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Move

Purpose

Use Move Index File to move a QuickFinder index file to a different file location.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Select the index you want to move.

3	Choose Options, then choose Move.

4	Type a new filename and network or local directory, then choose OK.

See Also

Network Index File Location

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Network Index File Location

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Move

Purpose

Use Move Index File to move a QuickFinder index file to a network file location.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then choose Options.

2	Select the index you want to move.

3	Choose Move.

4	Type a new network or local directory and filename, then choose OK.

See Also

Location for Index Files

Move Index File


Managing Files

Purpose

In certain applications, file management capabilities are provided in directory dialog boxes. For example, you can use this dialog box to select directories, choose macros, locate specific files, open documents, and save documents as new or renamed files. You can find and select directories and files using the drive, directory, and file lists. You can also change network connection or document management options if you are connected to a network or have alternate document management programs.

To find a more specific Help topic about your task, use the Search button above to look up the title of a specific dialog box or option.

      	The options that appear on this dialog box will change depending on its title and the application in which it appears.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Filename

File List

Save File As Type

Directories List

QuickList

Drives

List Files of Type

See Also

Drag and Drop Capabilities

File Options

Network

ODMA Support

Opening Files

Saving Files


Open/Save As Setup

Purpose

Use Open/Save As Setup to specify how you want to display the file list and to set the Speedup Files options for directory dialog boxes.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Make the changes you want, then choose OK.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Create Speedup Files

File List Display

Sorting Files

See Also

Managing Files


Print Files

Purpose

Use Print to print one or more files without opening them into the current document window.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to print.

2	Right-click on the files list, then choose Print.

3	Choose Print.

See Also

File Options

Print Lists


Print Lists

Purpose

Use Print List to print a list of selected files or all files displayed in the file list box, the Directory List, or the QuickList.

Steps

To print a file list,

1	In a directory dialog box, choose Setup, then select the File List Display options you want. The information displayed on a printed file list is identical to the information displayed in the file list box.

2	Select the files in the file list that you want to include on the printed list. Skip this step if you want to print the entire file list.

3	Right-click on the files list, then select Print File List.

4	Choose the type of list you want to print.

5	Select Include Subdirectories to print subdirectories in addition to the list.

6	Choose Setup, select a printer, orientation, and paper size and source, then choose OK.

7	Choose Change, select a font, style, and size, then choose OK.

8	Choose Print.

To print a directory list,

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then right-click on the Directories List.

2	Choose Print Directory List.

3	Select the printing option you want.

4	Choose Setup, select a printer, orientation, and paper size and source, then choose OK.

5	Choose Change, select a font, style, and size, then choose OK.

6	Choose Print.

To print a QuickList,

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose QuickList.

2	Choose Print QuickList.

3	Select the printing option you want.

4	Choose Setup, select a printer, orientation, and paper size and source, then choose OK.

5	Choose Change, select a font, style, and size, then choose OK.

6	Choose Print.

See Also

File Options

Print Files


QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder, Indexer

Purpose

Use the QuickFinder File Indexer to create or edit indexes. QuickFinder indexes are full-text, alphabetical lists of every word contained in the files and directories you specify as well as information about the files. You cannot view or print QuickFinder indexes; they are highly compressed for QuickFinder use only. Searching a QuickFinder index for a word or phrase is extremely fast, compared to opening and searching each individual file.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Choose Create, type an index name, then choose OK.

or

Select the name of the index you want to edit, then choose Edit.

3	Type the name of the directory or file you want to add, then choose Add.

or

Choose Browse for a list of files and directories.Select the directories you do not want to include in an existing index, then choose Remove.

4	Select Include Subtree to include all subdirectories under the directories you have added to the list.

5	Choose Options to specify individual index options.

6	Choose Generate to generate the index of the selected files.

or

Choose an Index Method option to update a previously created index.

See Also

Additional Information about QuickFinder

Create or Edit Index Criteria

Index Method

Individual Index Options

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer Options


QuickFinder Indexer Preferences

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Preferences

Purpose

Use Preferences to change how QuickFinder creates an index. Most of the options affect the speed of indexing.

Steps

To change options for all indexes,

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Choose Options, then choose Preferences.

3	Specify how often you want to display indexing progress.

4	Specify a Location for Index Files.

5	Select Expand Browse Dialog to display the Filename and Directories list boxes by default.

6	Choose Advanced>> to set further Indexer defaults.

7	Specify which file extensions you want to exclude.

8	Select WordPerfect Documents Only to limit indexing to documents in WordPerfect format.

9	Choose index contents and indexing levels.

10	Select Include Numbers in Index to index numbers as well as words.

11	Choose an option for Extended Characters.

12	Choose OK.

To change options for a particular index,

1	Select the index.

2	Choose Edit, then choose Options.

See Also

Additional Information about QuickFinder

Individual Index Options

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Remove Directory

Purpose

Use Remove Directory to remove a directory and to delete any subdirectories and files contained in the directory you want to remove. If you do not select a different directory, the application will delete the current directory.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the directory you want to remove.

2	Right-click on the Directories list, then choose Remove Directory.

3	Choose Yes to delete the selected directory, including all files and subdirectories in it.

See Also

Create Directory

Delete Files

File Options

Rename Directory


Rename Files

Purpose

Use Rename to give one or more files new names and locations.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want to rename.

2	Right-click on the files list, then choose Rename.

3	Specify the new path or filename for the selected file(s), then choose OK.

4	Choose Rename.

See Also

File Options

Move Files

Select Directory


Rename Index

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Rename

Purpose

Use Rename Index to give a QuickFinder index a different name.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then select an index name.

2	Choose Options, then choose Rename.

3	Type a new name, then choose OK.

See Also

Index Name

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Entire Document

Indexes both text and document summary fields, including subfunctions:  headers, footers, footnotes, tables, graphics, and so on. However, document summary information is combined with text information in the index.


QuickFinder Search Results List

QuickFinder, Find, Search Results

QuickFinder, Options, Last Search Results

Purpose

A Search Results List, generated by a QuickFinder search, contains the files that match the search criteria you entered. From the Search Results List you can open as many as nine files. You can also copy, move, rename, delete, preview, or print files, or save the list for reference in further searching.

Steps

To generate and use a list of search results,

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, type a search query, then choose Find.

If any files match the search criteria, a Search Results List will display. If not, you will see a No Files Found message.

2	Select the file(s) you want to process from the Search Results List, then choose either Open, View, or one of the File Options.

or

Choose QuickFinder to continue searching.

To save your Search Results List for future use,

1	Select Save Search Results from the Search Results List, then choose either Open or Close.

2	Choose QuickFinder again to retrieve the saved search results list, choose Options, then choose Last Search Results.

To further refine your search,

1	Choose QuickFinder from the Search Results List.

2	Note that Search In contains a new item called Search Results List. Choose this item if you want to use your previously created search results list.

3	Select Add Matching Files to Search Results List to include matching files to your list.

4	Choose Find. The Search Results List will be displayed again if you have any matching files.

Choose from the following options for more information:

View

QuickFinder

File Options

Sort Setup

See Also

Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Summary Fields

Refine QuickFinder Searches

Relevancy in QuickFinder Searches


QuickFinder Search Results Sort Setup

QuickFinder, Find, Search Results, Sort Setup

Purpose

Use Search Results Sort Setup to sort files in the QuickFinder Search Results by filename, extension, size, date/time, descriptive name, descriptive type, or path, in ascending or descending order.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, type a search query, then choose Find.

2	Choose Sort Setup in the Search Results List.

3	Choose a Sort criterion.

4	Choose an Ascending or Descending sort order, then choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Search Results List

Relevancy in QuickFinder Searches


Entire Document-Summary Fields

Indexes both text and document summary fields, including subfunctions:  headers, footers, footnotes, tables, graphics, and so on. Document summary information is indexed separately to increase speed when searching document summary fields.


Viewer Find

Purpose

Use Viewer Find to highlight all occurrences of the search words or phrases in the file.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list, then select a text file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

3	Right-click inside the Viewer window, then choose Find from the QuickMenu.

4	Type the text you want to find. If you want to find a phrase, enclose it in quotation marks.

5	Select Match Whole Word Only if you do not want to find the search text within other words, like "cat" in "vacation."

6	Select Case Sensitive if you want to search for capital letters just as you have typed them.

7	Press Enter.

8	Choose Find Next or Find Previous to locate other instances of the search text.

9	Choose Close.

See Also

Viewer

Viewing Files


Viewer Font

Purpose

Use Viewer Font to select the font (size and typeface) you want to display in the Viewer.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list, then select a text file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

3	Right-click inside the Viewer window, then choose Font from the QuickMenu.

4	Select a font and point size.

5	Select Bold or Italic if you want the entire Viewer text in bold or italic.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Printing from the Viewer

Viewer

Viewing Files


WordPerfect Characters

Ctrl+W

Purpose

Use WordPerfect Characters to access characters that do not appear on your keyboard, such as phonetic characters and characters in other alphabets. You can insert these characters at your insertion point in a document or in some dialog box text boxes. You can also assign a frequently used character to a specific key on the keyboard. Not all fonts include all characters. Excluded characters are represented by a hollow box on your screen.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the character, then press Ctrl+W.

2	Select the character set you want, then select a character.

or

Specify a character number.

3	Choose Insert to insert the character and leave the dialog box open.

or

Choose Insert and Close to insert the character and close the dialog box.

See Also

Assign Characters to Keys


.BIF file (def)
.BIF file

Binary Initialization File. A file that contains the settings information for certain applications.


Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Copy

Toolbar or menu bar, right click, Preferences, Copy

Edit, Preferences, Keyboard, Copy

Purpose

Use Copy to save a Toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar with a different name.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar or menu bar, then choose Preferences.

or

Select Keyboard from the Preferences dialog box.

2	Select the Toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar you want, then choose Copy.

3	Specify a name for the copy.

4	Choose OK and Close.

See Also

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Create

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Edit


QuickFinder Indexer Options

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options

Purpose

Use the QuickFinder Indexer Options to specify indexing preferences or index operations.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Indexer, then choose Options.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Information

Delete

Rename

Move

Import

Preferences

About

See Also

Individual Index Options

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


QuickFinder Options

QuickFinder, Options

Purpose

Use Options to display summary fields and the results of the last search, and to refine, save, delete, or reuse searches.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Options.

2	Choose No Summary Fields to hide document summary fields.

or

Choose Default Summary Fields to display a portion of the possible document summary fields.

or

Choose All Summary Fields to display all possible summary fields.

3	Choose Last Search results to display the results of the last search.

4	Choose the search query options you want.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Full Word Count Relevancy

No Summary Fields

Default Summary Fields

All Summary Fields

Last Search Results

Clear

Load Search Query

Save Search Query

Delete Search Query

See Also

Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder

Refine QuickFinder Searches


group box (def)
group box

A set of related options in a dialog box, often with its own subtitle.


dialog box title bar (def)
dialog box title bar

The horizontal bar across the top of the dialog box that contains the name of the dialog box and the Control-menu box.


active (def)
active

A window or dialog box that is currently in use. Called the current window when a document is displayed.


.ALL file (def)
.ALL file

A file that contains information for several different printers. WordPerfect and other suite applications use .ALL files to generate .PRS files for your specific printer when you select a printer.


alphanumeric (def)
alphanumeric

Composed of letters or numerals or both. Text and data can be sorted alphanumerically or numerically. When sorting something numerically, 2 comes before 10. When sorting something alphanumerically, 10 comes before 2.


ANSI (def)
ANSI

American National Standards Institute. One of the standard formats for representing characters on a computer. The ANSI character set consists of 256 characters. The first 128 characters are the same as the ASCII character set; the second 128 (characters 129-256) differ from the IBM extended character set. Compare with ASCII.


application (def)
application

Software designed to carry out a certain kind of action or activity, such as word processing, electronic mail, or spreadsheet entries. Sometimes called a program.


application icon (def)
application icon

A unique icon that represents the application when it is minimized.


argument (def)
argument

A variable, constant, or expression required by a command or function.


ASCII (def)
ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange. One of the standard formats for representing characters on a computer. The extended ASCII character set consists of 256 characters. ASCII text is useful when you share files between programs. A DOS text file is usually in ASCII format. Compare with ANSI.


attributes (def)
attributes

The elements that determine the appearance of text (for example, bold, italic, 10-point) or a graphic (for example, fill, line width, background color).


automatic font change (AFC) (def)
automatic font change (AFC)

A font change that the user does not explicitly specify in the document but that automatically takes place to handle a change in the current attribute, size, or position of text.


back up (def)
back up

To save copies of files for safekeeping. You can back up files as you work on them to protect your work in case of a power failure or machine problem, and you can applications make archive copies of your files to safeguard against replacing the original document.


baseline (def)
baseline

The invisible line upon which text is placed. Each letter sits immediately on the baseline. For letters with descenders (such as g, j, p, and y), the descenders drop below the baseline.


baud (def)
baud

The conventional unit of measurement used to describe data transmission speed. One baud is one bit per second.


baud rate (def)
baud rate

The speed at which data is transmitted from one digital device to another, such as over a modem or between a computer and printer. The devices must be configured at the same baud rate for information to transfer between them correctly.


BIOS (def)
BIOS

The Basic Input/Output System or the part of the computer operating system that communicates with the screen, the keyboard, printers, and other peripheral devices.


built-in font (def)
built-in font

A font that is built into the printer.


bullet (def)
bullet

A symbol, such as a filled circle, that may precede each item in a list.


byte (def)
byte

The amount of space needed to store a single character (number, letter, or code). A byte generally represents eight binary digits (bits). 1024 bytes equals one kilobyte (K).


cache (def)
cache

A buffer area in a computer or a special section of random access memory (RAM). A cache is continually updated to contain recently accessed data or program instructions to reduce access time while a program is running.


card (def)
card

A removable printed-circuit board that is plugged into an expansion slot (such as a graphics card, clock card, sound card, or fax card).


cartridge fonts (def)
cartridge fonts

A group of fonts contained on a ROM chip in a plastic cartridge that plugs into a printer. The chips contain font definitions that do not require downloading and are not lost from memory in a power failure.


cascade (def)
cascade

To display document windows in overlapping format on the screen. Compare with tile.


cascading menu (def)
cascading menu

An additional list of menu items opening from a single menu item.


CD-ROM (def)
CD-ROM

Compact Disk-Read Only Memory. Means of data storage using optical storage technology. A single CD-ROM disk can hold more than 650 megabytes of information, or half a billion characters of text. Unlike floppy disks, most CD-ROM disks can be read from but not written to.


cell (def)
cell

The intersection of a row and a column in a table or spreadsheet.


check box (def)
check box

A small box next to an option in a dialog box. Clicking an empty check box selects the option; clicking a marked check box deselects the option.


check mark (def)
check mark

Mark placed next to a menu item that is turned on. When the item is turned off or when it is not active, the check mark is removed.


choose (def)
choose

To use a mouse or the keyboard to pick a menu item or dialog box option that initiates an immediate action. Compare with select.


clear (def)
clear

To remove the X from a check box, or to remove a check mark from a menu item. If a check box is clear, that option is turned off.


click (def)
click

To press and release a mouse button (usually the left button) once.


Clipboard (def)
Clipboard

An area of memory, also called a buffer, where text and graphics can be stored to await further action. It is a temporary holding place for items that have been cut or copied. The item remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy an additional item or until you exit Windows.


close (def)
close

To shut down or exit a dialog box, window, or application.


codes (def)
codes

Hidden markers that control how documents appear on the screen and at the printer. Most commands insert codes into a document. You can see these codes by choosing Reveal Codes.


command (def)
command

An instruction given to a computer to carry out a particular action.


command button (def)
command button

A button in a dialog box that carries out a command such as Open, Close, Exit, OK, or Cancel. The selected command button is indicated by a dotted rectangle.


compressed file (def)
compressed file

A file that has been specially prepared to conserve disk space. Applications are shipped with compressed files; you must run the Installation Program before you can use them.


Control menu (def)
Control menu

The menu containing commands that will open, close, maximize, minimize, or restore a window or dialog box. You can display a Control menu by clicking the Control-menu box or by pressing Alt+Spacebar.


Control-menu box (def)
Control-menu box

A small rectangular button in the upper-left corner of a window or dialog box. Clicking a Control-menu box displays the Control menu; double-clicking the Control-menu box closes the window or dialog box. Several windows can be open at the same time, each with its own Control-menu box.


conversion (def)
conversion

A process by which files created in one application are changed to a format that can be used in another application.


CUA (def)
CUA

Common User Access. A set of terminology, keystrokes, and commands designed by Microsoft to provide standardization among applications. Suite applications come with a keyboard that is CUA compliant.


current directory (def)
current directory

The directory at the end of the current directory path. It is the directory that is searched first for a requested file and where a file is stored if you do not specify a path.


DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) link (def)
DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) link

A connection between a file created by a Windows application that supports DDE and a WordPerfect document. This connection lets you transfer information from the source file into the WordPerfect document. If both files are open, the transferred information can be updated automatically when information changes in the source file.

WordPerfect for Windows also can establish spreadsheet links to some spreadsheet applications that do not support dynamic data exchange.


default (def)
default

A program's predetermined setting or action that takes effect unless specifically changed.


delimiter (def)
delimiter

Most commonly used to refer to a character or code that marks the beginning or end of an item, such as a sentence, paragraph, page, record, field, or word. Also used in dynamic delimiters to refer to a character that expands to enclose part of an equation.


deselect (def)
deselect

To remove the X from a check box, or to remove a check mark from a menu item.


desktop (def)
desktop

The screen background and environment for all applications in Windows.


dimmed (def)
dimmed

The appearance of an icon, command, or button that cannot be chosen or selected.


display font (def)
display font

Also called screen font. Font as it appears on the computer screen.


dither (def)
dither

To combine several different colored pixels to create a new color.


document window (def)
document window

The window in which documents are created or edited.


DOS (def)
DOS

Disk Operating System. Software that oversees disk I/O, video support, keyboard control, and internal commands. A computer needs a disk operating system to function.


DOS prompt (def)
DOS prompt

The on-screen characters, such as C:\>, indicating that you can enter DOS commands.


double-click (def)
double-click

To press and release the mouse button twice in rapid succession.


drag (def)
drag

To move text or an object by positioning the pointer on the item you want to move, pressing the mouse button, moving the mouse, then releasing the mouse button.


driver (def)
driver

A set of commands used to run a peripheral device such as a printer or monitor. For example, .PRS files are drivers that instruct a printer on how to print a WordPerfect file. Also called printer driver.


ellipsis (def)
ellipsis

A punctuation mark consisting of three successive periods (...). Choosing a menu item or command button with an ellipsis opens a dialog box.


expanded memory (def)
expanded memory

Specification for addressing more than 640K of memory. To access expanded memory, you need a special memory board or driver.


extended memory (def)
extended memory

Random access memory that exceeds the DOS standard of one megabyte. It is built into the hardware of a 286, 386, or 486 computer. It can be accessed with a memory management program.


file (def)
file

A collection of information stored on disk under a single name.


file extension (def)
file extension

The optional three-letter suffix following the period in a filename. For example, .EXE.


file format (def)
file format

The arrangement and organizational pattern of the information in a file. The application under which a file was created determines its format. Files created in one application are not accessible by another application unless they are converted to the proper format.


filename (def)
filename

The name given to a data file used by applications to perform open and save operations. In DOS and Windows applications, filenames can have as many as eight characters with an optional extension of as many as three characters. The filename and extension are separated with a period.


fixed-pitch font (def)
fixed-pitch font

Also called monospaced font. A font that allocates the same amount of space for every character (for example, an  i  takes up as much horizontal space as a  w ). Compare with proportionally spaced font.


font (def)
font

A group of letters, numbers, and symbols with a common typeface. Fonts are described by name, appearance, and size, as in Helvetica Bold 10pt.


function keys (def)
function keys

A set of keys, usually labeled F1, F2, F3, and so on, used by themselves or with Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys to provide quick access to certain features in an application.


Saving Files

File, Save or Save As

Purpose

You can save hundreds of files on a hard disk, which works like a filing cabinet with directories and subdirectories as file drawers and folders that group similar files. You can save files with new names, save them in different directories, or save them in different formats. If you do not specify a directory or format,  applications save files in the current directory and default format.

You should use Save periodically to avoid losing your work if a power or system failure occurs. You can also use the Backup features to avoid losing your work.

Steps

1	Choose Save or Save As from the File menu.

2	Select the directory where you want to save the file from the Directories list box or the QuickList.

or

Type the full path for the file before the filename.

3	Type a filename for the file.

or

Select the file you want to replace with the saved file.

4	Choose the format you want.

5	Choose Save to save the file in the selected format.

See Also

Opening Files

Save File As Type

Save Format


handle (def)
handle

An on-screen marker, usually a small black square, that lets you size and manipulate an object or item in a drawing. Handles appear around selected objects. To use a handle, drag it with the mouse.


hexadecimal (def)
hexadecimal

A numbering system based on 16 digits, 0 through F, used in computer programming as a convenient shorthand for working with binary numbers.


highlight (def)
highlight

The change to a reverse-video appearance when a menu item or area of text is selected.


icon (def)
icon

A small graphics image that represents an application, a command, or a tool. Clicking or double-clicking an icon will produce an action.


inactive window (def)
inactive window

A window that is not currently being used. Its title bar changes appearance, and keystrokes and mouse actions do not affect its contents. An inactive window can be activated by clicking it.


incrementing button (def)
incrementing button

A button in a dialog box that lets you specify an amount by clicking it with the mouse instead of typing numbers.


.INI file (def)
.INI file

A file that stores setup and startup information for Windows applications.


insertion point (def)
insertion point

A blinking vertical bar that designates the position on the screen where text or codes will be inserted or deleted. Sometimes called a cursor. Compare with mouse pointer.


kerning (def)
kerning

Altering the space between a pair of characters to give a uniform appearance.


kilobyte (K) (def)
kilobyte (K)

1024 bytes of information or storage space.


landscape orientation (def)
landscape orientation

The position of the page in which the long edge of the page runs horizontally. Compare with portrait orientation.


language code (def)
language code

A two-letter code that represents the language of files such as .MOR, .THS, .TRS, and .ICR files.


leading (def)
leading

The amount of white space between lines of type.


.MOR file (def)
.MOR file

The main dictionary file for use with Spell Checker. The .MOR file may also contain hyphenation information.


list box (def)
list box

A box that displays a list of choices. When a list is too long to display all choices, it will have a scroll bar, so that you can view additional items.


list button (def)
list button

In dialog boxes, a way to get to another dialog box to select files or change directories. It appears as a small file-folder button next to a text box.


macro (def)
macro

A series of commands and menu selections in a file that can be replayed by a few keystrokes or by a mouse click.


main dictionary (def)
main dictionary

The Spell Checker dictionary provided with WordPerfect and other suite applications, or a compatible third-party dictionary.


megabyte (M) (def)
megabyte (M)

1024 kilobytes (1,048,576 bytes) of information or storage space.


memory (def)
memory

A computer's data storage area, measured in RAM and ROM.


menu bar (def)
menu bar

The area at the top of a window containing headings for pull-down menu items.


message box (def)
message box

A type of dialog box that appears with information, a warning, an error message, or a request for confirmation to carry out a command or action.


MIDI (def)
MIDI

Musical Instrument Digital Interface.  A format that allows communication of musical data between devices such as computers and synthesizers.


mnemonics (def)
mnemonics

Underlined letters on menu commands or dialog box options indicating keystroke access for that item or option.


modem (def)
modem

Modulator/demodulator. A device that transmits digital computer data over telephone lines. Modems can be external or internal (built into the computer).


monospaced font (def)
monospaced font

Fonts that use the same amount of horizontal space for each character in the font (for example, an  i  takes up as much horizontal space as a  w ). Monospaced fonts are also referred to as fixed-pitch fonts. Compare with proportionally spaced fonts.


mouse button (def)
mouse button

The part of the mouse that can be pressed (or clicked) manually and that controls certain functions that may be customized to suit the user. WordPerfect documentation uses mouse button to mean the left button (button 1).


pointer (def)
pointer

A symbol that indicates a position on screen as you move the mouse on your desktop.


movement keys (def)
movement keys

Keys on the keyboard that control insertion point movement within a document. They include the arrow keys, Page Up, Page Down, Home, and End.


multitasking (def)
multitasking

A process that allows a computer to perform various tasks simultaneously. Also, the method by which some operating systems allow the user to open and run several applications at one time.


newspaper column (def)
newspaper column

Text flows down a column to the bottom of a page, then starts again at the top of the next column to the right. Compare with parallel column.


open (def)
open

To start an application, to insert a document into a new document window, or to access a dialog box.


option (def)
option

A choice inside a dialog box or on a menu.


outline family (def)
outline family

The collective term for a main level in an outline and all subordinate levels and text under it. For example, if the main levels of an outline are numbered I, II, III, and so on, an outline family would include item I and items A, B, and C under it, with all related text.


palette (def)
palette

An on-screen box or window that contains tools, available colors, or possible fill patterns.


parallel column (def)
parallel column

Text grouped across the page in rows. The next row starts below the longest column of the previous row. Compare with newspaper column.


parallel interface (def)
parallel interface

An interface in which several bits of information (usually 1 byte) are transmitted simultaneously. Compare with serial interface.


parallel printer (def)
parallel printer

A printer that accepts information by way of a parallel interface.


parameter (def)
parameter

A variable used with a command to indicate a specific value or option.


path (def)
path

The address that tells a computer where to locate a directory or file on a disk or network. A path includes the drive, the root directory, and any subdirectory names that branch from the root directory.


pitch (def)
pitch

The number of monospaced characters printed per linear inch.


pixel (def)
pixel

Short for picture element. A pixel is the smallest dot that can be represented on a screen or in a paint (bitmap) graphic.


point (def)
point

To move the mouse until the tip of the mouse pointer rests on an item.


point size (def)
point size

Unit of measure commonly used to indicate font sizes. One point equals 1/72".


pop-up definition (def)
pop-up definition

A graphic or dot-underlined, colored word that you can click to display a definition or explanation.


port (def)
port

A connection device between a computer and another component, such as a printer or modem. For example, a printer cable is plugged into the printer port on the computer so information can be sent to the printer.


portrait orientation (def)
portrait orientation

The position of the page in which the long edge of the page runs vertically. Compare with landscape orientation.


print queue (def)
print queue

The list of print jobs waiting to be sent to a particular printer.


printer definition (def)
printer definition

A file that contains instructions for a program (like WordPerfect) to format printed pages on a particular printer. Also known as a printer driver.


printer driver (def)
printer driver

The software that enables a program to communicate with the printer so that information can be printed. WordPerfect printer drivers are identified by a .PRS file extension. Also called drivers.


program (def)
program

Software designed for a certain use, such as word processing, electronic mail, or spreadsheet entries. Also called an application.


proportionally spaced font (def)
proportionally spaced font

Also called a variable-pitch font. Fonts that vary the amount of horizontal space used by characters in the font (for example, the letter i usually gets less space than the letter w). Compare with monospaced fonts.


.PRS file (def)
.PRS file

A file that contains the printer definition and a complete description of a print station (printer, sheet feeder, fonts, and forms). A .PRS file is created from a .ALL file when a printer is selected.


QuickList (def)
QuickList

A list that lets you access a directory or group of files without entering the full pathname every time you want to locate the same group of files.


QuickMenu (def)
QuickMenu

A pop-up menu that lists a specific set of items that apply to a particular feature. You can open a QuickMenu by placing the mouse pointer over the object and pressing the right mouse button. Click the left mouse button to choose the option you want.


radio button (def)
radio button

One of a set of buttons found before options in a dialog box. Only one radio button in a set can be selected at a time.


RAM (def)
RAM

Random Access Memory. The working space or temporary storage area for the program you are using and the document on your screen. RAM is erased when the power is turned off.


Restore button (def)
Restore button

A button that lets you return the window to the size and position it was prior to being either maximized or minimized.


ROM (def)
ROM

Read Only Memory. The part of a computer's main memory that contains the basic programs that run the computer when it is turned on. ROM cannot be erased.


root directory (def)
root directory

The fundamental directory of a disk, created when the disk is formatted.


scalable font (def)
scalable font

A font that can be printed in virtually any point size, depending on the limits of the software and printer used.


screen font (def)
screen font

Also known as a display font. A font, usually rendered in low-resolution, that mimics a printer font.


scroll (def)
scroll

To move the insertion point through a document or list that extends beyond the screen display.


scroll bar (def)
scroll bar

The bars on the right side and bottom of the window that let you move vertically and horizontally through a document, list, or graphic by clicking the scroll arrows or dragging the scroll box.


select (text or objects) (def)
select (text or objects)

To highlight text that will be affected by the next action.


select (options or commands) (def)
select (options or commands)

To use a mouse or the keyboard to pick a menu item or dialog box option that does not initiate an immediate action. The action takes place after you choose OK. Compare with choose.


selection insertion point (def)
selection insertion point

The highlighted text, dotted rectangle, or insertion point that shows you where the next keystroke or mouse action will apply in a dialog box or window.


serial interface (def)
serial interface

An interface in which information is transmitted one bit at a time. Compare with parallel interface.


serial printer (def)
serial printer

A printer that accepts information from the computer by way of a serial interface. Compare with parallel printer.


shortcut key (def)
shortcut key

A keystroke or keystroke combination that gives you quick access to a feature.


size (def)
size

To change the size of a selected item by dragging the sizing handles that surround it.


sizing handle (def)
sizing handle

The small solid squares that appear on the borders of a graphics box or a graphics line that has been selected. You can drag these handles to size the box and its contents.


soft font (def)
soft font

A font file that is located in a file on a disk. When the printer is switched on, soft font files must be copied (downloaded) from the disk to the printer.


sort key (def)
sort key

Words, fields, or phrases that are used to define criteria in sorting specific items in a document.


spreadsheet (def)
spreadsheet

A grid made up of columns and rows that contain data or formulas often used for financial planning, cost estimating, and other accounting tasks.


spreadsheet import (def)
spreadsheet import

To copy information from a spreadsheet file into a WordPerfect document one time only. Compare with spreadsheet link.


spreadsheet link (def)
spreadsheet link

A connection from a spreadsheet file into a WordPerfect document. It lets you transfer information from the spreadsheet into the document. You can update the transferred information as often as necessary to reflect changes made in the spreadsheet file.


Status Bar (def)
Status Bar

The line at the bottom of a document window that shows information such as the document number, page, line, and vertical and horizontal position of the insertion point.


submenu (def)
submenu

An additional list of menu items opening from a single menu item.


supplementary dictionary (def)
supplemental dictionary

A dictionary created and personalized by the user. Supplemental dictionaries include words and phrases not found in the main dictionary.


syntax (def)
syntax

The rules for organizing elements in an operation. For example, macro commands require a specific syntax or organization for them to function properly.


temporary file (def)
temporary file

A file that a program creates when it is running. Temporary files are deleted when the program is exited properly. For example, WordPerfect creates temporary overflow and backup files.


text box (graphics) (def)
text box (graphics)

A type of graphics box that can be used for placing and rotating text.


text file (def)
text file

A file saved in ASCII file format. It contains text, spaces, and returns, but no formatting codes.


tile (def)
tile

To display open windows side by side, with no window overlapping any other window. Compare with cascade.


toggle (def)
toggle

To turn a feature on and off with the same keystroke or menu selection.


variable-pitch font (def)
variable-pitch font

Also called proportionally spaced font. A font that varies the amount of space used by each character. Compare with monospaced font.


wildcard (def)
wildcard

Character used to replace one character (?) or any number of characters (*) in a search string. These two characters are conventions in most applications.


window (def)
window

A method of displaying a document so that many of its elements appear graphically and many features are immediately available as on-screen choices. The place where you type your documents is called a document window.


workspace (def)
workspace

The part of the document window where you actually work with the text of the document.


.WPG file (def)
.WPG file

WordPerfect graphics file. A file extension added to images in the WordPerfect graphics image format.


WYSIWYG (def)
WYSIWYG

What You See Is What You Get. Refers to a computer screen display that approximates the printed page, showing fonts and graphics in correct proportions.


zoom (def)
zoom

To expand or reduce the image of a document or graphic on the screen. Zooming does not change the actual size of the text or graphics.


application window (def)
application window

The window that contains the operating features of the application, such as the menu bar, Toolbar, and document window. Document windows are placed within the application window and, if your computer has enough memory, you can open as many as nine document windows at a time.


title bar (def)
title bar

The horizontal bar across the top of each window that contains the name of the window, the Control-menu box, and the maximize, minimize, and restore buttons. Sometimes the title bar also contains Help prompts that give you information about menu items you select.


minimize button (def)
minimize button

A button that you use to shrink an application window or document window to an icon.


maximize button (def)
maximize button

A button that you use to enlarge a small application window or document window to its maximum size. A window that is smaller than a full-screen window, but not minimized to an icon, can also be maximized by double-clicking its title bar.


Toolbar (def)
Toolbar

A feature that contains buttons representing features you use often. You can create your own customized Toolbars.


Power Bar (def)
Power Bar

A group of buttons representing frequently used features.


Contents button (def)
Contents button

A Help button you can use to return to the main Contents screen which helps you quickly navigate through specific areas of Help.


Search button (def)
Search button

A Help button you can use to search for Help topics by typing keywords.


Back button (def)
Back button

A Help button you can use to return to the last topic you opened.


History button (def)
History button

A Help button you can use to display the last 40 Help topics you opened, with the most recent at the top of the list. To reopen a topic, double-click it.


Print button (def)
Print button

A Help button you can use to print the current Help topic.


Browse buttons (def)
Browse buttons

Buttons which display the previous (<<) or next (>>) topic in a series of grouped or associated topics. When you reach the first or last topic in the series, the corresponding previous or next button is dimmed.


 Hint

You can reduce the size and move the Help window to keep it on-screen while you follow the steps.

Choose Always on Top from the Help menu above to display the Help window "on top" of other applications, even when it is minimized. Or, size both Help and the application window so they do not overlap.


 Hint

Choose an option from the Save File As Type list to save a file in a format other than the default for the current application. WordPerfect and other suite applications save the file with a default extension that identifies the selected file type and format. You can type a period at the end of the filename to save the file without an extension, or type your own extension.

Some extensions with special meaning include .ALL, .BAT, .BIF, .COM, .DLL, .EXE, .INI, .PRS, .SET, .WCM, .WPT, and .WWK. Do not use these extensions when saving documents unless you have a specific reason for doing so.


 Hint

Click and drag to select a continuous range of items. You can also click an item at one end of the range, then hold down the Shift key and click the item at the other end of the range.

Press Ctrl while clicking each item you want to select noncontinuous items. Press Ctrl+/ to select all items.

Click inside the file list, then type the first letters or numbers of the filename to move to a specific file in a file list sorted by filename, size, or date/time. When the file list is sorted by extension, descriptive name, or descriptive type, those items are used in searching.


 Hint

If the Toolbar is displayed, you can right-click over the Toolbar, then choose Edit.


 Hint

If you map a number or letter key without a modifier key, it will no longer act as an alphanumeric key.


Document Text

Lets you view the body of a document (instead of the Document Summary).


Save Format

Purpose

The Save Format dialog box appears when you attempt to save a document which was converted from another format when you opened the document.

Save Format allows you to save the file in the current default format, the original format, or in another format.

Steps

1	Open a document that was saved in a format other than your current default format, make any changes you want, then choose Save As from the File menu.

2	Choose the default format or the original format.

or

Choose Other, choose OK, then choose the format you want.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Managing Files

Open/Save As Setup

Save File as Type

Saving Files


Hex Display

Lets you display a file in hexadecimal mode. You can print any kind of file as a hexidecimal document.


Copy to Clipboard

Lets you copy selected text from the Viewer to the Clipboard.


Document Summary

Lets you view the Document Summary of a file (instead of the body of the document).


Word Wrap

Lets you wrap document text in the Viewer window so all text shows regardless of the window size.


Opening Files

File, Open

Purpose

Use Open to open as many as nine documents or windows in the same application. Open works with documents you have previously saved as files on a hard disk or floppy disk. When you want to edit a document that is saved on disk, you need to open a copy of the file into a window. The file then becomes active in your computer's memory so that you can edit it. The changes you make are not recorded on disk until you save the file again.

Steps

1	Choose Open from the File menu.

2	Select the drive and directory you want to list the files in.

3	Select the file you want.

or

Type the full path, separated by commas, of as many as nine files at one time to open multiple files.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Managing Files

Open a Copy of a File

Saving Files


Find

Lets you find words or phrases in the document displayed in the Viewer.


Font

Lets you change the font that will show in the Viewer.


 Hint

Press Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Backspace to reset to the default keyboard and menu bar from your document.


Text Only

Indexes only textual information without summary fields or other subfunctions.


 Hint

To assign a WordPerfect Character to a key, select Allow assignment to characters, select a key from the list box, select Play a Keyboard Script, press Ctrl+W, select and insert the character, then choose Assign Script.


 Hint

Filling in more than one field performs a logical AND operation.


 Hint

Make sure you have documents with document summary information.


 Hint

If you choose No Summary Fields from the Options drop-down list to collapse the QuickFinder dialog box, all document summary fields are cleared and are not used in the search.


 Hint

Updating the index with new or modified files speeds up the indexing process.


 Hint

Index level refers to the amount of information stored in the index, that is, which document, paragraph, line, or sentence the word is contained in. Indexing at the larger levels (document, hard page, or page) decreases the size of the index. Indexing at the smaller levels increases the index size but allows you to find multiple words within the same line, sentence, or paragraph much faster.


 Hint

If a query has been saved with document summary fields (expanded mode), then the summary fields display when you load the query.


Filename Only

Indexes only DOS filenames.


Summary Fields Only

Indexes only document summary fields.


Viewer Go To Page

Viewer, right-click, Go To Page

Purpose

Use Viewer Go To Page to view multiple-page fax files.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list, then select a text file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

3	Right-click inside the Viewer window, then choose Go to Page from the QuickMenu.

4	Specify the page number you want to view.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Viewer


 Hint

If a language that you often use contains special characters (WordPerfect Characters), you can create a keyboard for that language by mapping those characters to the keys of your choice.


Toolbar directional arrows (def)
Toolbar directional arrows

The arrows found on a Toolbar that is longer than the screen. The directional arrows let you scroll the Toolbar to show buttons not displayed on the screen.


Cascade

Purpose

Use Cascade to view as many as nine open document windows at the same time. Cascade overlaps the windows.

Steps

1	Choose Cascade from the Window menu.

See Also

Tile


client application (def)
client application

An application that can link and embed text or graphics created in a server application. Also called a container application.


Control Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Control Menu to position, size, close, and switch application windows. Double-click the control-menu box, then choose an option from the Control Menu.

Restore

Move

Size

Minimize

Maximize

Next

Exit

Switch To


copy (def)
copy

To duplicate text or graphics and place them on the Clipboard.


document (def)
document

Any file you create, including drawings, text, slide shows, spreadsheets, and so on.


embed (def)
embed

To place an item created in one application into a document created in another application. For example, you can embed text created in WordPerfect into a Presentations drawing window.


Close

Control Menu, Close

Purpose

Use Close to close a document or to exit an application.

Steps

1	Choose Close from the Control menu.

2	Choose Yes to save changes and exit the document or application.

See Also

Switch To


export (def)
export

To save a document in a different format so that it can be used in another application.


feature (def)
feature

A special capability or tool in an application.


figure (def)
figure

Clip art or other graphics files you can retrieve into an application.


format (def)
format

A collective term for margins, spacing, page length, point size, and the general visual appearance of the printed page.


help topic (def)
help topic

A Help screen containing a brief description of a feature with step-by-step instructions on how to use it. Help topics often contain jump terms, pop-up definitions, and See Also lists.


import (def)
import

To retrieve information from one application into another.


inactive (def)
inactive

The state of an application, window, dialog box, or option that is currently not available or in use.


keyboard layout (def)
keyboard layout

A group of shortcut keys saved together in a file. In many applications, you can create customized keyboard layouts.


keyword (def)
keyword

A word (also known as a search term) you type in the Search feature to find a Help topic for a particular feature or task. For example, if you search for the keyword "zoom," the Help system finds topics about the Zoom feature.


Maximize

Control Menu, Maximize

Purpose

Use Maximize to enlarge a window to full size.

Steps

1	Activate the window you want to maximize, then choose Maximize from the Control menu.

or

Double-click the title bar of the window you want to maximize.Click the Maximize button (the up-arrow button on the window title bar).

See Also

Minimize


Minimize

Control Menu, Minimize

Purpose

Use Minimize to reduce a window to an icon.

1	Activate the window you want to minimize, then choose Minimize from the Control menu.

or

Click the Minimize button (the down-arrow button on the window title bar).

See Also

Maximize


modifier keys (def)
modifier keys

The collective name for the Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys. When pressed simultaneously with other keys (such as function keys), modifier keys change the original functions of those keys.


Move

Control Menu, Move

Purpose

Use Move to relocate a window on the screen.

Steps

1	Activate the window you want to move, then choose Move from the Control menu. Use the arrow keys to move the window to a new location, then press Enter.

or

Drag the title bar to the new location.

See Also

Size


Next

Control Menu, Next

Purpose

Use Next to scroll through open document windows.

Steps

1	Choose Next from the Control menu.

See Also

Switch To


paste (def)
paste

To insert the contents of the Clipboard into the active window or application.


print wheel (def)
print wheel

A detachable printer wheel containing various typefaces.


Restore

Control Menu, Restore

Purpose

Use Restore to return a window to its previous size and position.

Steps

1	Activate the window you want to restore, then choose Restore from the Control menu.

or

Click the Restore button (the double-arrow button on the window title bar).

See Also

Maximize

Size


scroll arrows (def)
scroll arrows

The arrows that appear at either end of a scroll bar. Mouse users click the scroll arrows to scroll. Keyboard uses use the arrow keys to scroll.


scroll box (def)
scroll box

The box within a scroll bar that you move with the mouse or arrow keys. Its position in the scroll bar corresponds to your general location in a file or dialog box (beginning, middle, or end).


server application (def)
server application

An application whose objects can be embedded or linked into other documents and applications.


Size

Control Menu, Size

Purpose

Use Size to modify the size of a window.

Steps

1	Activate the window you want to size, then choose Size from the Control menu. Use the arrow keys until the outline of the window is the size you want, then press Enter.

or

Place the pointer on the window border (the pointer becomes a double arrow), then drag the pointer to the size you want.

See Also

Maximize

Move

Restore


spooler (def)
spooler

An application you use to continue working while you wait for a document to print. When you choose to print, information is sent immediately to the spooler, and the spooler feeds the information to the printer as soon as the printer is ready.


Switch To

Control Menu, Switch To

Purpose

Use Switch To to activate other applications without exiting the current one.

Steps

1	Choose Switch To from the Control menu, select the application you want, then choose Switch To.

or

Press Alt+Tab.

See Also

Next


Tile

Purpose

Use Tile to view as many as nine open windows at the same time. Tile places the windows side by side.

Steps

1	Choose Tile from the Window menu.

See Also

Cascade


typeface (def)
typeface

A specific design of type, such as Courier or Palatino.


window border (def)
window border

The outside border of an application window or a tiled or cascaded document window. Drag the border to size the window.


wrap (def)
wrap

A word processing feature that breaks lines of text automatically to stay within a text area or page margins. The insertion point and any words that extend beyond the margin are carried to the next line or page.


Invert

Lets you change the display of fax files from black on white to white on black and vice versa.


Rotate

Lets you rotate the current page of a fax file 180 degrees.


Zoom

Lets you change your view of a fax, cursor, or icon file. You can enlarge faxes up to 200% or reduce them down to 50%. You can enlarge cursor and icon files up to 800%.

Zoom does not actually size the image, it only changes your view.


Print

Lets you print all or part of a text or hex file, select printers, change fonts, and specify margins.


Printing from the Viewer

Viewer, right-click, Print

Purpose

Use Print to print all or part of a text or hex file, select printers, change fonts, and specify margins.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list, then select a text file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

3	Right-click inside the Viewer window, then choose Print from the QuickMenu.

4	Specify the pages you want to print.

5	Choose Setup to select a printer or change printer options, then choose OK.

6	Select display Font to print using the current display font.

or

Select Specific Font, choose Change, select a font and a point size for printing, then choose OK.

7	Select Inches or Centimeters, then specify the margins for printing.

8	Choose Print.

See Also

Viewing Files


Refine QuickFinder Searches

QuickFinder, define a search

Purpose

Use the operators and switches from Operators lists to create and refine complex searches. Search operators and switches apply to all text that follows in the Search For text box.

      	Search switches should be placed before the search terms they will affect. Use parentheses to group search terms, switches, and operators. Search operators bind in the following order if no parentheses or switches are used:  NOT, FOLLOWED BY, AND, OR.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, choose Operators, then choose options to refine your search.

2	Select the category you want, then choose the operator, switch, or document summary field you want to use.

These are the search operators you can use:

And (&)

Followed By (..)

Group ()

Not (!)

Or (|)

These are the matching operators you can use:

Zero or More Characters (*)

Any Single Character (?)

Case Insensitive

Case Sensitive

Prefix Mode On and Off

These are the switches you can use for word proximity searches:

Document

Field

Hard Page

Line

Page

Paragraph

Phrase ("")

Record

Sentence

Within # Words

These are the switches you can use to search specific parts of a document:

Entire

First Page

Summary Only

Text Only

You can also search any Summary Fields included in the document.

These are the Other operators you can use:

Scan Off

Wildcard Off and On

3	Type the word or phrase you want to search for. Place the switches after the words they affect, and use parentheses to group a search query.

4	Choose Insert to insert the operator or switch and leave the dialog box open.

or

Choose Insert and Close to insert the operator or switch and close the dialog box.

5	Choose Find.

See Also

Expand Word Searches

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Search For


And (&)

Appears as &, AND, or a space.

For example, mountain & goat, mountain AND goat, and mountain goat all find documents containing the search terms "mountain" and "goat."


Any Single Character (?)

Appears as ?.

For example, mountain? finds all documents containing the word "mountain" plus a single character, like "mountains."


Case Sensitive

Appears as /Case.

Finds search terms that match upper- and lowercase pattern of the search terms. For example, /Case Zoo finds "Zoo," but not "zoo."


Document

Appears as /Document.

Finds search terms in the same document (this option resets all other levels).


Entire

Appears as /Entire.

Finds search terms in all document text and in all document summary information. This is the default switch.


Field

Appears as /Field.

Finds search terms in the same field. Use this option with database-oriented files such as Merge files. Works on non-index searches only.


First Page

Appears as /FirstPage.

Finds search terms only in the first page of the document text and in the document summary.


Followed By (..)

Appears as ...

For example, mountain .. goat finds document that contain both search terms, with "mountain" before "goat" somewhere in the document.


Group ()

Appears as ( ) with search text in between.

For example, (/FirstPage (/Line subject reorganization) "John Smith" companyX) finds documents with the first page containing the search terms "subject" and "reorganization" on the same line, with "John Smith" and "companyX" appearing on the same page.


Hard Page

Appears as /HardPage.

Finds search terms in the same section of a document, bounded by hard pages.


Line

Appears as /Line.

Finds search terms on the same line of the document, as currently formatted on disk.


Not (!)

Appears as ! or NOT.

For example, mountain ! goat and mountain NOT goat both find documents containing the word "mountain" but not the word "goat."  Documents that contain both are not included.


Case Insensitive

Appears as /NoCase.

Finds search terms that match the search terms, ignoring upper- and lowercase. For example, /NoCase Zoo finds both "Zoo" and "zoo."  This is the default setting.


Or (|)

Appears as | or OR.

For example, mountain | goat and mountain OR goat both find documents containing "mountain" or "goat" or both search terms.


Page

Appears as /Page.

Finds search terms on the same page of the document, as currently formatted on disk.


Paragraph

Appears as /Paragraph.

Finds search terms on in the same paragraph of the document.


Phrase ("")

Appears as " " with a search phrase between.

Finds phrases, exactly as you type them. For example, "Dr. Jane Smith" finds Dr. Jane Smith, but not Dr Jane Smith or Dr. J. Smith.


Record

Appears as /Record.

Finds search terms in the same record. Use this option with database-oriented files such as Merge files. Works on non-index searches only.


Sentence

Appears as /Sentence.

Finds search terms in the same sentence of the document.


Summary Fields

Appears as /Summary=name, /name, or /Summary=n.

Finds search terms in the document summary field you specify. The name of the field replaces the field number or name in the switch pattern. For example, /Summary=Typist Shauna finds documents with "Shauna" in the Typist field of the Document Summary.


Summary Only

Appears as /Summary.

Finds search terms in all document summary information, but not in the document itself.


Text Only

Appears as /Text.

Finds search terms in all document text, excluding headers, footers, and document summaries.


Within # Words

Appears as /#.

Finds search terms that are within a certain number of words of each other. For example, /2 finds search terms within two words of each other.


Zero or More Characters (*)

Appears as *.

For example, mountain* finds documents containing all variation of words that begin with "mountain," with or without other characters. This includes "mountain," "mountains," "mountainous," and so on.


Edit Button and Menu Item Properties

Toolbar or Menu Bar, right-click, Edit, double-click a script, macro, or program item, Properties

Purpose

Use Properties to set the path or command line and working directory for buttons and menu items that run macros or launch applications, or to edit keyboard scripts.

Steps

To change application launch properties,

1	Open the Toolbar or Menu Bar Editor.

2	Double-click the application button or menu item you want, then choose Properties.

3	Specify the command line for the application.

4	Specify the working directory for the application.

5	Select Run Minimized if you want the application to be minimized when it opens.

6	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

To change macro paths,

1	Open the Toolbar or Menu Bar Editor.

2	Double-click the macro button or menu item you want, then choose Properties.

3	Specify the path for the macro.

4	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

To edit keyboard scripts,

1	Open the Toolbar Editor or Menu Bar Editor.

2	Double-click the keyboard script button or menu item you want, then choose Properties.

3	Edit the keyboard script.

4	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Menu Bar Editor

Toolbar Editor

Toolbar Image Editor

Toolbar Customize


Additional Information about QuickFinder

Speeding Up Indexing

The QuickFinder Indexer is one of the fastest indexers in the industry. However, there are ways to optimize indexing time. Here are some suggestions that can help you increase the speed of creating QuickFinder indexes:

     	Select a broad level of indexing for Index Level, such as Document or Paragraph.

     	Launch QuickFinder File Indexer in standalone mode (while no other programs are running).

     	Create an index that contains only document Summary Fields.

     	Exclude as many document types as you can.

     	Do not include numbers.

     	Index only WordPerfect documents if you have a mix of WP and non-WP documents.

     	If you are indexing a large number of small files, change the show indexing progress to a larger number.

Indexing with Startup Options

You can use the following startup options to automate updating QuickFinder indexes:

     	/ra:  Rebuilds all indexes listed in the QuickFinder Index Names list box.

     	/r-[long index name]:  Rebuilds only the specified index.

     	/ia:  Updates the specified index with new or modified files.

     	/i-[long index name]:  Updates the specified index with new or modified files.

     	/g-[long index name] and /ga:  "Smart update." If the .inc file is 10% the size of the .idx file, it will rebuild the index.  If it is smaller than 10%, it will update the index.

Because the Command Line is case sensitive, entries must be typed exactly. You can specify more than one index name, as long as you separate them with a comma and a space (for example, c:\wpc20\qfwin20.exe /r-newsletters, 1982 magazines).

QuickFinder Log Files

A QuickFinder log file is created when QuickFinder attempts to index a file that is open or password protected. The log file has the same name and directory location as the QuickFinder index file, but has a .LOG file extension.

Saving QuickFinder Indexes

QuickFinder saves indexes after every generation. You name the file when you create the index, and QuickFinder stores the indexes as files that use a .IDX extension (for example, BRIEFS92.IDX). Incremental index files receive a .INC extension. Error messages are stored in a file with a .LOG extension. You can specify the directory where indexes are stored using the Location for Index Files option on the QuickFinder Indexer Preferences dialog box.

Running QuickFinder as a Standalone Application

You can run QuickFinder independent of any other Corel application by double-clicking the QuickFinder icon in the Windows Program Manager.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


 Hint

You can use wildcard characters to include specific types of files. For example, typing c:\october\*.shw will include all files in the OCTOBER subdirectory of the C: drive with the extension .SHW; typing c:\october\*.* includes all files in the OCTOBER subdirectory.


Viewer Info

Viewer, right click, Viewer Info

Purpose

Use Viewer Info to display viewer capabilities by viewer and file type.

Steps

1	Right-click inside the Viewer, then choose Viewer Info.

2	Select Viewer to display available viewers.

or

Select File Type to display available file types.

3	Select the viewer you want to display the file types it can view.

or

Select the file type you want to display the compatible viewers.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Viewing Files


Additional Information about Viewer

Using the Viewer

The Viewer has been designed to:

     	Help you find a specific file quickly, especially when you know something about the content of the file.

     	Help you create documents by copying parts of the document you are viewing into another document.

     	Provide viewing capabilities for files located by a QuickFinder search. The Viewer highlights the word or phrase searched for and displays the document at the first occurrence of the search text.

     	Let you assign viewers to specific types of files.

     	Let you look at or hear a file before you use it in a document.

     	Let you print all or part of a file without retrieving it into a document.

If a Viewer window is displayed, you can select a filename in any list box to view the contents of that file.

How the Viewer Works

The Viewer provides a quick display of the contents of a file. The Viewer can display text, graphics, codes, and faxes. It also plays audiovisual and sound files.

To enhance its speed, the Viewer has been designed to display document contents, but not all of the formatting. Thus, the Viewer does not provide full WYSIWYG viewing of file contents. Files display both text and graphics in the Viewer window. If a file you are viewing contains only graphics, you can view them if they are in a supported graphics format.

Types of Files the Viewer Displays

     	WordPerfect documents (4.2, 5.x, and 6.0 formats)

     	WordPerfect graphics files (.WPG)

     	Sound files (Waveform, MIDI)

     	Various non-WordPerfect document and spreadsheet files (including documents created in Word for Windows, AmiPro, and Lotus 123 spreadsheets)

     	Various graphics file formats

     	Fax files (DCX and some TIFF formats)

     	List of files contained in a ZIP file

     	Cursor and icon files

See Also

Viewer

Viewing Files


Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Create

Edit, Preferences, Toolbar, Keyboard, or Menu Bar, Create

Purpose

Use Create to open the Toolbar Editor, Keyboard Editor, or Menu Bar Editor and create a new Toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar. Toolbars, keyboard layouts, and menu bars can include applications, features, keyboard scripts, and macros.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar or menu bar, then choose Preferences.

or

Select Keyboard from the Preferences dialog box.

2	Choose Create.

3	Specify a name for the new Toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar, then choose Create.

4	Make the changes you want in the Toolbar, Keyboard, or Menu Bar Editor.

5	Choose OK and Close.

See Also

Keyboard Editor

Menu Bar Editor

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Copy

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Edit

Toolbar Editor


Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Delete

Edit, Preferences, Toolbar, Keyboard, or Menu Bar, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete to delete a Toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar or menu bar, then choose Preferences.

or

Select Keyboard from the Preferences dialog box.

2	Select the Toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar you want, then choose Delete.

3	Choose Yes.

4	Choose OK and Close.

See Also

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Create

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Edit


Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Edit

Edit, Preferences, Toolbar, Keyboard, or Menu Bar, Edit

Purpose

Use Edit to open the Toolbar, Keyboard, or Menu Bar Editor and customize a Toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar or menu bar, then choose Preferences.

or

Select Keyboard from the Preferences dialog box.

2	Select the Toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar you want, then choose Edit.

or

Choose Edit to edit the current Toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar.

3	Make the changes you want in the Toolbar, Keyboard, or Menu Bar Editor.

4	Choose OK and Close.

See Also

Keyboard Editor

Menu Bar Editor

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Create

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Copy

Toolbar Editor


Toolbar Options

Edit, Preferences, Toolbar, Options

Purpose

Use Options to set the position and appearance of Toolbars.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar, then choose Preferences.

2	Choose Options.

3	Select the font you want to appear on the buttons.

4	Select the font size you want to appear on the buttons.

5	Select the Appearance and Location options you want.

6	Select Show Quick Tips if you want each button to display a short description when you move the pointer over it.

7	Specify the maximum number of rows or columns of the Toolbar you want to display on the screen.

8	Select Show Toolbar Scrollbars to display scroll arrows at the side of Toolbars too large to display all at once.

9	Choose OK and Close.

See Also

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Create

Toolbar Customize

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Edit

Toolbar Image Editor


Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Preferences

Edit, Preferences, Toolbar, Keyboard, or Menu Bar

Purpose

Use Preferences to select, create, copy, rename, edit, delete, and set the appearance and location options for Toolbars, keyboard layouts, or menu bars.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar or menu bar, then choose Preferences.

or

Select Keyboard from the Preferences dialog box.

2	Select the Toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar you want to use.

3	Choose Close.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Copy

Create

Delete

Edit

Rename

Options (Toolbars only)

See Also

Keyboard Editor

Menu Bar Editor

Toolbar Editor


 Hint

The Language dialog box lists all of the languages WordPerfect currently supports. If WordPerfect adds support for a language, and you install the language module for that language, you can specify the two letter language code for the new language by typing the code in the Language text box.


 Hint

When you select a language, the application inserts the language code [Lang:xx]. The letters xx represent the two letter code indicating the language (such as CA for Catalan and DK for Danish). The application uses the new language code from that point on in the document or until they reach another language code. If you select text before selecting a language, a code for the new language is placed at the beginning of the selection, and a code for the previous language is placed at the end of the selection. For example, you can place different language codes around specific portions of text and have the application spell-check those sections using the specified languages.


 Hint

If you try to open a file that was created in a format other than the format the current application uses, the Convert File Format message box appears. Choose OK to convert the file.

If an application cannot convert the file, an error message will inform you that the file format is unknown. If this occurs, you may want to use the original program to save the file in DCA/RTF or RTF format. If neither of these formats is available, you can save the file as an ASCII (DOS) text file. However, some formatting features in your file may be lost when you open it into the current application.


 Hint

More than 1,500 characters and symbols are grouped into fifteen character sets. Each numbered character set contains a certain type of character. For example, character set 0 contains ASCII characters, and character set 8 contains Greek characters. Most of these characters are listed in the WordPerfect Characters dialog box.

Each character in a set is also numbered. The combination of the set number and the character number identifies each character. For example, the Italian currency symbol is in character set 4, and is number 61. Therefore, that character's number is 4,61.


Graphic Conversion

Lets you convert graphics for viewing. If you choose Disable Graphics Conversion from the QuickMenu, you can use the conversion button in the Viewer to convert individual graphics files for viewing.


 Hint

The language and country as listed on the outside of your applications package is the package language. Screen elements (dialog boxes and menus), dates, and tables display in this language.

To change package languages, use the /LXX startup command (where XX is the two letter language code) when you start your application, or manually add "Resource Language=XX" (where XX is the two letter language code) to your WIN.INI file. If you do not specify a resource language, the application searches the path directories and uses the first YYYYYYXX.DLL it can find (where YYYYYY is the program's acronym and XX is the specified language).

If you are using a language with a non-Roman alphabet (such as Greek, Cyrillic, or Hebrew), choose the correct character map to greatly reduce document size.


 Hint

The Toolbar can be positioned on the Left, Right, Top, or Bottom of your screen, or it can be a floating Palette. You can also drag the Toolbar to position it on your screen.

The Toolbars can appear with Text Only, Picture Only, or Picture and Text.


Exclude Files

Ignores all specified file types. All files with .EXE, .COM, and .DLL extensions are excluded by default.


Expand Browse Dialog

Lets you specify how the Create and Edit Index dialog boxes appear. If you select Expand Browse Dialog, the Filename, Drives, and Directories display each time the dialog box is opened. (Applies to all indexes.)


Extended Characters in Non-WP Documents

Lets you specify how extended characters in documents other than WordPerfect formats are treated in the index. If you are indexing a document created in Windows, choose Interpret as ANSI; if you are indexing a document created in DOS, choose Interpret as ASCII. If you have both or are unsure, select Exclude.


Include Numbers in Index

Indexes numbers as well as letters.


Index Contains

Lets you specify how much of a document to index.


Index Level

Lets you specify an area to search for word patterns (for example, on the same line, or in the same paragraph).


Index WordPerfect Documents Only

Indexes only WordPerfect 5.1/5.2 and 6.0 documents (but not WordPerfect 4.0 documents).


Location for Index Files

Lets you specify the default location for index files. (Applies to all indexes.)


Regenerating Indexes

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create or Edit, Generate

Purpose

Use Index All Files regenerate indexes by indexing all the files in the index again.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Select the index you want to update from the Index Names list box.

3	Choose Generate, select Index All Files, then choose OK.

4	Choose OK when the index is complete.

5	Choose Close, then choose Close again to return to your document.

See Also

Updating Indexes


Show Indexing Progress Every x Files

Lets you specify how many files will be indexed before the progress line shows change. (Applies to all indexes.)


Updating Indexes

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create or Edit, Generate

Purpose

Use Update Index with New or Modified Files to add new information to the most recently generated index file.

Steps

1	Open QuickFinder stand-alone or from a directory dialog box, then choose Indexer.

2	Select the index you want to update from the Index Names list box.

3	Choose Generate, select Update Index With New or Modified Files, then choose OK.

4	Choose OK when the index is complete.

5	Choose Close, then choose Close again to return to your document.

See Also

Regenerating Indexes


Delete QuickList Item

QuickList, Delete Item

Purpose

Use Delete Item to remove an item from a QuickList.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box.

2	Select the item you want to delete.

3	Right-click on the QuickList, then choose Delete Item.

4	Choose Yes.

See Also

Add or Edit QuickList Item

QuickList


counter box (def)
counter box

A box in which you specify a number by typing or by using the incrementor/decrementor buttons.


Go to Page

Lets you specify the page number you want to view.


Next Page

Lets you move to the next page of the fax file.


Previous Page

Lets you move to the previous page in the fax file.


Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Rename

Preferences, Toolbar, Keyboard, or Menu Bar, Rename

Purpose

Use Rename to give a Toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar a new name.

Steps

1	Right-click on a Toolbar or menu bar, then choose Preferences.

or

Select Keyboard from the Preferences dialog box.

2	Select the Toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar you want, then choose Rename.

3	Specify a new name.

4	Choose OK and Close.

See Also

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Create

Toolbar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Copy


UNC Drive Mappings

Purpose

When your computer is part of a network, use Universal Naming Convention (UNC) drive mapping formats anywhere you specify a filename.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box or QuickFinder search results list.

2	Specify the filename of the file, using the following drive mapping conventions:

Format	Syntax
UNC Acceptable	\\Server\Volume\Dir\Dir etc... //Server/Volume/Dir/Dir etc...
Novell Acceptable	Server/Volume:Dir\Dir etc... Server\Volume:Dir/Dir etc...
3	Choose OK.

See Also

Managing Files